PCS-902

Line Distance Relay

Instruction Manual

NR Electric Co., Ltd.

 PCS-902 Line Distance Relay

Preface

Introduction
This guide and the relevant operating or service manual documentation for the equipment provide
full information on safe handling, commissioning and testing of this equipment.

Documentation for equipment ordered from NR is dispatched separately from manufactured goods
and may not be received at the same time. Therefore, this guide is provided to ensure that printed
information normally present on equipment is fully understood by the recipient.

Before carrying out any work on the equipment, the user should be familiar with the contents of
this manual, and read relevant chapter carefully.

This chapter describes the safety precautions recommended when using the equipment. Before
installing and using the equipment, this chapter must be thoroughly read and understood.

Health and Safety

The information in this chapter of the equipment documentation is intended to ensure that
equipment is properly installed and handled in order to maintain it in a safe condition.

When electrical equipment is in operation, dangerous voltages will be present in certain parts of
the equipment. Failure to observe warning notices, incorrect use, or improper use may endanger
personnel and equipment and cause personal injury or physical damage.

Before working in the terminal strip area, the equipment must be isolated.

Proper and safe operation of the equipment depends on appropriate shipping and handling,
proper storage, installation and commissioning, and on careful operation, maintenance and
servicing. For this reason, only qualified personnel may work on or operate the equipment.

Qualified personnel are individuals who:

z Are familiar with the installation, commissioning, and operation of the equipment and of the
system to which it is being connected;

z Are able to safely perform switching operations in accordance with accepted safety
engineering practices and are authorized to energize and de-energize equipment and to
isolate, ground, and label it;

z Are trained in the care and use of safety apparatus in accordance with safety engineering
practices;

z Are trained in emergency procedures (first aid).

Instructions and Warnings

The following indicators and standard definitions are used:

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD i

PCS-902 Line Distance Relay

DANGER!

It means that death, severe personal injury, or considerable equipment damage will occur if safety
precautions are disregarded.

WARNING!

It means that death, severe personal, or considerable equipment damage could occur if safety
precautions are disregarded.

CAUTION!

It means that light personal injury or equipment damage may occur if safety precautions are
disregarded. This particularly applies to damage to the device and to resulting damage of the
protected equipment.

WARNING!

The firmware may be upgraded to add new features or enhance/modify existing features, please
make sure that the version of this manual is compatible with the product in your hand.

WARNING!

During operation of electrical equipment, certain parts of these devices are under high voltage.
Severe personal injury or significant equipment damage could result from improper behavior.

Only qualified personnel should work on this equipment or in the vicinity of this equipment. These
personnel must be familiar with all warnings and service procedures described in this manual, as
well as safety regulations.

In particular, the general facility and safety regulations for work with high-voltage equipment must
be observed. Noncompliance may result in death, injury, or significant equipment damage.

DANGER!

Never allow the current transformer (CT) secondary circuit connected to this equipment to be
opened while the primary system is live. Opening the CT circuit will produce a dangerously high
voltage.

WARNING!

z Exposed terminals

Do not touch the exposed terminals of this equipment while the power is on, as the high voltage
generated is dangerous

ii NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 PCS-902 Line Distance Relay

z Residual voltage

Hazardous voltage can be present in the DC circuit just after switching off the DC power supply. It
takes a few seconds for the voltage to discharge.

CAUTION!

z Earth

The earthing terminal of the equipment must be securely earthed

z Operating environment

The equipment must only be used within the range of ambient environment detailed in the
specification and in an environment free of abnormal vibration.

z Ratings

Before applying AC voltage and current or the DC power supply to the equipment, check that they
conform to the equipment ratings.

z Printed circuit board

Do not attach and remove printed circuit boards when DC power to the equipment is on, as this
may cause the equipment to malfunction.

z External circuit

When connecting the output contacts of the equipment to an external circuit, carefully check the
supply voltage used in order to prevent the connected circuit from overheating.

z Connection cable

Carefully handle the connection cable without applying excessive force.

Copyright
Version: PCS-902 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD.
Manual: R1.00 69 SuYuan. Avenue, Nanjing 211102，China
P/N: EN_XLBH5102.0063.1101 Tel: 86-25-87178185, Fax: 86-25-87178208
Copyright © NR 2010. All rights reserved Website: www.nari-relays.com
Email: [email protected]
We reserve all rights to this document and to the information
contained herein. Improper use in particular reproduction and
dissemination to third parties is strictly forbidden except where
expressly authorized.

The information in this manual is carefully checked periodically,

and necessary corrections will be included in future editions. If
nevertheless any errors are detected, suggestions for correction or
improvement are greatly appreciated.
We reserve the rights to make technical improvements without
notice.

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD iii

PCS-902 Line Distance Relay

Table of Contents
Preface ....................................................................................................................................... i 

Introduction........................................................................................................................ i 

Health and Safety .............................................................................................................. i 

Instructions and Warnings ............................................................................................... i 

Table of Contents .....................................................................................................................iv 

Chapter 1 Introduction .............................................................................................................1 

1.1 Application ...................................................................................................................1 

1.2 Function .......................................................................................................................2 

1.3 Features........................................................................................................................3 

1.4 Order Information ........................................................................................................4 

Chapter 2 Technical Data .........................................................................................................7 

2.1 Electrical Specifications .............................................................................................7 

2.1.1 Analog Input Ratings.........................................................................................7 

2.1.2 Power Supply .....................................................................................................7 

2.1.3 Binary Input .......................................................................................................8 

2.1.4 Binary Output.....................................................................................................8 

2.1.5 Power Supply Output for Opto-coupler ...........................................................8 

2.2 Mechanical Specifications ..........................................................................................9 

2.3 Ambient Temperature and Humidity Range ..............................................................9 

2.4 Communication Port ...................................................................................................9 

2.4.1 EIA-485 Port .......................................................................................................9 

2.4.2 Ethernet Port ....................................................................................................10 

2.4.3 Optical Fibre Port ............................................................................................10 

2.4.4 Print Port ..........................................................................................................10 

2.4.5 Clock Synchronization Port ............................................................................10 

2.5 Type Tests ..................................................................................................................10 

2.5.1 Environmental Tests ........................................................................................10 

2.5.2 Mechanical Tests ............................................................................................. 11 

iv NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 PCS-902 Line Distance Relay

2.5.3 Electrical Tests ................................................................................................ 11 

2.5.4 Electromagnetic Compatibility ....................................................................... 11 

2.6 Certifications ..............................................................................................................12 

2.7 Protective Functions .................................................................................................12 

2.7.1 Optical Interface ..............................................................................................12 

2.7.2 Fault Detector ..................................................................................................12 

2.7.3 Pilot Protection ................................................................................................12 

2.7.4 DPFC Distance Protection ..............................................................................13 

2.7.5 Distance Protection .........................................................................................13 

2.7.6 Directional Zero-sequence Overcurrent Protection .....................................13 

2.7.7 Directional Phase Overcurrent Protection ....................................................13 

2.7.8 Overvoltage Protection ...................................................................................13 

2.7.9 Undervoltage Protection .................................................................................14 

2.7.10 Inverse-time Zero-sequence Overcurrent Protection .................................14 

2.7.11 Breaker Failure Protection (BFP) .................................................................14 

2.7.12 Transient Overreach ......................................................................................14 

2.7.13 Fault Locator ..................................................................................................14 

Chapter 3 Protection Description ..........................................................................................15 

3.1 General Description ..................................................................................................15 

3.2 General Fault Detector Element (GFD) ....................................................................15 

3.2.1 DPFC overcurrent element .............................................................................15 

3.2.2 Zero-sequence overcurrent element..............................................................16 

3.2.3 Overvoltage Element .......................................................................................16 

3.3 Protective Fault Detector Element (PFD) .................................................................16 

3.4 DPFC distance protection .........................................................................................17 

3.5 Pilot Protection ..........................................................................................................18 

3.5.1 General Description ........................................................................................18 

3.5.2 Communication channel .................................................................................20 

3.5.3 Protection logic ...............................................................................................20 

3.6 Overcurrent Protection .............................................................................................29 

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD v

PCS-902 Line Distance Relay

3.6.1 Application .......................................................................................................29 

3.6.2 Scheme logic ...................................................................................................30 

3.7 Distance Protection ...................................................................................................33 

3.7.1 Distance element with memorized polarization ............................................34 

3.7.2 Phase-to-ground distance element ................................................................37 

3.7.3 Phase-to-phase distance element ..................................................................39 

3.7.4 Reverse Distance Element ..............................................................................39 

3.7.5 Blinder Scheme ...............................................................................................40 

3.7.6 Power Swing Blocking Releasing (PSBR) .....................................................40 

3.7.7 Scheme Logic ..................................................................................................42 

3.8 Switch Onto Fault Protection ...................................................................................43 

3.8.1 Zero-sequence SOTF Protection ....................................................................44 

3.8.2 Distance SOTF Protection ..............................................................................45 

3.9 Voltage Protection .....................................................................................................45 

3.9.1 Overvoltage Protection ...................................................................................45 

3.9.2 Undervoltage Protection .................................................................................48 

3.10 Stub Overcurrent Protection ..................................................................................50 

3.11 Breaker Failure Protection ......................................................................................51 

3.11.1 Application .....................................................................................................51 

3.11.2 Function Description .....................................................................................52 

3.11.3 Logic Scheme ................................................................................................53 

3.12 Fault Phase Selection..............................................................................................54 

3.12.1 Deviation of operation voltage fault phase selection element ..................54 

3.12.2 I0 and I2A fault phase selection element .....................................................55 

3.13 Pole Disagreement ..................................................................................................55 

3.13.1 Single-phase tripping ....................................................................................56 

3.13.2 Three-phase tripping .....................................................................................56 

3.14 Inverse-time Thermal Overload Protection ...........................................................56 

3.14.1 Application .....................................................................................................56 

3.14.2 Function Description.....................................................................................57 

vi NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 PCS-902 Line Distance Relay

3.14.3 Logic Scheme ................................................................................................58 

3.15 Synchrocheck Function ..........................................................................................58 

3.15.1 Application .....................................................................................................58 

3.15.2 Function Description.....................................................................................59 

3.15.3 Logic Scheme ................................................................................................63 

3.15.4 I/O signal ........................................................................................................69 

3.16 Automatic Reclosure ...............................................................................................72 

3.16.1 Application ......................................................................................................72 

3.16.2 Function Description ......................................................................................72 

3.16.3 Logic Scheme .................................................................................................73 

3.16.4 I/O Signal .........................................................................................................84 

3.17 Trip Scheme .............................................................................................................86 

Chapter 4 Automatic Supervision .........................................................................................93 

4.1 General Description ..................................................................................................93 

4.2 Understand the Alarms..............................................................................................93 

4.3 Relay Self-supervision ..............................................................................................96 

4.3.1 Relay hardware monitoring ............................................................................96 

4.3.2 Fault detection monitoring .............................................................................96 

4.3.3 Check Output tripping circuit .........................................................................96 

4.3.4 Check setting ...................................................................................................96 

4.4 AC Input Monitoring ..................................................................................................96 

4.4.1 Voltage and current drift monitoring and auto adjustment ..........................96 

4.4.2 Protection DSP sampling monitoring ............................................................96 

4.4.3 Fault Detector DSP sampling monitoring ......................................................96 

4.5 Secondary Circuit Monitoring ..................................................................................97 

4.5.1 Opto-coupler power supervision ...................................................................97 

4.5.2 Circuit breaker supervision ............................................................................97 

4.5.3 VT circuit supervision .....................................................................................97 

4.5.4 Synchronism voltage circuit failure supervision ..........................................98 

4.5.5 CT circuit supervision .....................................................................................98 

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD vii

PCS-902 Line Distance Relay

4.5.6 Binary input supervision ................................................................................99 

Chapter 5 Metering and Recording .....................................................................................101 

5.1 Metering....................................................................................................................101 

5.2 Recording .................................................................................................................104 

5.2.1 General description .......................................................................................104 

5.2.2 Event recorder ...............................................................................................104 

5.2.3 Disturbance recorder ....................................................................................104 

Chapter 6 Hardware Description .........................................................................................107 

6.1 General Description ................................................................................................107 

6.2 Typical Wiring ..........................................................................................................108 

6.2.1 Typical wiring of PCS-902 .............................................................................109 

6.3 Terminal Definition .................................................................................................. 110 

6.3.1 PWR Module (NR1301) .................................................................................. 110 

6.3.2 Pins definition of MON module (NR 1102) ................................................... 112 

6.3.3 DSP Module 1 (Protection Calculation) ....................................................... 114 

6.3.4 DSP Module 2 (Fault Detector Calculation) ................................................. 114 

6.3.5 AI Module ....................................................................................................... 115 

6.3.6 GOOSE Module (Optional) ............................................................................ 117 

6.3.7 Binary Input Module (NR1504)...................................................................... 118 

6.3.8 Binary Output Module ...................................................................................122 

6.3.9 Display Panel .................................................................................................122 

Chapter 7 Configurable Function ........................................................................................123 

7.1 General Description ................................................................................................123 

7.2 Introduction on PCS-PC software ..........................................................................123 

7.3 Protective Device Configuration ............................................................................123 

7.3.1 System Configuration ...................................................................................123 

7.3.2 Function Configuration .................................................................................124 

7.3.3 Configuration of LED Indicators ..................................................................124 

7.3.4 Configuration of Binary Input .......................................................................125 

7.3.5 Configuration of Binary Output ....................................................................126 

viii NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 PCS-902 Line Distance Relay

7.3.6 Setting configuration ....................................................................................127 

7.4 Configurable Signal List .........................................................................................127 

7.4.1 Configurable Binary Input ............................................................................127 

7.4.2 Configurable Binary Output .........................................................................130 

7.5 Default configurations.............................................................................................136 

7.5.1 Default LED configuration ............................................................................136 

7.5.2 Default binary inputs configuration .............................................................137 

7.5.3 Default binary outputs configuration ...........................................................139 

Chapter 8 Settings ................................................................................................................141 

8.1 Equipment Parameters............................................................................................141 

8.2 System Parameters .................................................................................................143 

8.3 Protection Settings ..................................................................................................144 

8.4 VEBI Settings ...........................................................................................................172 

Chapter 9 Human Machine Interface ...................................................................................173 

9.1 Overview...................................................................................................................173 

9.1.1 Keypad Operation ..........................................................................................174 

9.1.2 LED Indications .............................................................................................175 

9.1.3 Communication Port .....................................................................................176 

9.1.4 Communication .............................................................................................176 

9.2 Understand the HMI Menu Tree ..............................................................................177 

9.2.1 Overview ........................................................................................................177 

9.2.2 VALUES ..........................................................................................................180 

9.2.3 REPORT .........................................................................................................180 

9.2.4 PRINT..............................................................................................................180 

9.2.5 SETTINGS ......................................................................................................181 

9.2.6 LOCAL_CTRL ................................................................................................182 

9.2.7 CLOCK ............................................................................................................182 

9.2.8 VERSION ........................................................................................................182 

9.2.9 TEST_MODE ..................................................................................................182 

9.2.10 INTERFACE ..................................................................................................183 

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD ix

PCS-902 Line Distance Relay

9.3 Understand the LCD Display ..................................................................................183 

9.3.1 Normal Status Display...................................................................................183 

9.3.2 Display Fault Report......................................................................................184 

9.3.3 Display Self-supervision Report ..................................................................184 

9.3.4 Display Binary Input Change Report ...........................................................184 

9.3.5 Display Control Report .................................................................................185 

9.4 Keypad Operation ....................................................................................................185 

9.4.1 View Device Status ........................................................................................185 

9.4.2 View Device Report .......................................................................................185 

9.4.3 View Module Information ..............................................................................186 

9.4.4 Print Device Report .......................................................................................186 

9.4.5 View Device Setting .......................................................................................187 

9.4.6 Modify Device Setting ...................................................................................188 

9.4.7 Copy Device Setting ......................................................................................190 

9.4.8 Switch Setting Group ....................................................................................190 

9.4.9 Delete Device Message .................................................................................191 

9.4.10 Modify Device Clock....................................................................................191 

9.4.11 Check Software Version ..............................................................................191 

9.4.12 Communication Test ...................................................................................192 

Chapter 10 Communications ...............................................................................................195 

10.1 General Description...............................................................................................195 

10.2 Rear Communication Port Information ................................................................195 

10.2.1 RS-485 Interface ..........................................................................................195 

10.2.2 Ethernet Interface ........................................................................................197 

10.2.3 IEC60870-5-103 Communication ................................................................198 

10.3 IEC60870-5-103 Interface over Serial Port ...........................................................198 

10.3.1 Physical Connection and Link Layer .........................................................198 

10.3.2 Initialization ..................................................................................................198 

10.3.3 Time Synchronization .................................................................................199 

10.3.4 Spontaneous Events ...................................................................................199 

x NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 PCS-902 Line Distance Relay

10.3.5 General Interrogation ..................................................................................199 

10.3.6 General Service ...........................................................................................199 

10.3.7 Disturbance Records ..................................................................................199 

10.4 IEC60870-5-103 Interface over Ethernet ..............................................................200 

10.5 Messages Description for IEC61850 Protocol .....................................................200 

10.5.1 Overview ......................................................................................................200 

10.5.2 Communication profiles .............................................................................201 

10.5.3 Server data organization .............................................................................202 

10.5.4 Server features and configuration .............................................................204 

10.5.5 ACSI Conformance ......................................................................................206 

10.5.6 Logical Nodes ..............................................................................................210 

10.6 GOOSE Service ......................................................................................................212 

10.6.1 GOOSE Introduction ...................................................................................212 

10.6.2 GOOSE Function .........................................................................................213 

10.7 General Description...............................................................................................214 

10.8 Rear Communication Port Information ................................................................214 

10.8.1 RS-485 Interface ..........................................................................................214 

Chapter 11 Installation and Commissioning ......................................................................217 

11.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................217 

11.2 Safety Information .................................................................................................217 

11.3 Overview .................................................................................................................219 

11.4 Unpacking And Checking The Protection Equipment ........................................219 

11.5 Installing The Protective Device ...........................................................................220 

11.5.1 Overview .......................................................................................................220 

11.5.2 Dimensions ..................................................................................................221 

11.5.3 Grounding Guidelines .................................................................................221 

11.5.4 Cubicle Grounding ......................................................................................222 

11.5.5 Ground Connection on the Device .............................................................223 

11.5.6 Grounding Strips and their Installation......................................................223 

11.5.7 Making the electrical connections .............................................................223 

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD xi

PCS-902 Line Distance Relay

11.6 Check The External Circuitry ................................................................................225 

11.7 Energizing The Protective Device ........................................................................226 

11.8 Setting The Protective Device ..............................................................................227 

11.9 Establishing Connection And Verifying Communication ...................................227 

11.10 Verifying settings by secondary injection .........................................................227 

11.10.1 Insulation test (if required) .......................................................................228 

11.10.2 AC measurement check ............................................................................229 

11.10.3 Print fault report.........................................................................................229 

11.10.4 On-load Checks .........................................................................................230 

11.11 Final Check ...........................................................................................................230 

Chapter 12 Maintenance ......................................................................................................231 

12.1 Appearance Check ................................................................................................231 

12.2 Failure Tracing And Repair ...................................................................................231 

12.3 Replace Failed Modules ........................................................................................232 

12.4 Replace Button Battery .........................................................................................233 

12.5 Cleaning .................................................................................................................233 

12.6 Storage ...................................................................................................................233 

Chapter 13 Decommissioning and Disposal ......................................................................235 

13.1 Decommissioning ..................................................................................................235 

13.2 Disposal..................................................................................................................235 

Chapter 14 Manual Version History.....................................................................................237 

xii NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 1 Introduction

Chapter 1 Introduction

1.1 Application
The PCS-902 is a numerical EHV line distance protection with the main and back-up protection
functions, which mainly is designed for transmission line of various voltage levels.

Figure 1.1-1 Typical application of PCS-902

The main protection of PCS-902 comprises of pilot distance protection (POTT and PUTT) and pilot
directional earth-fault protection (DEF), which can clear the fault immediately for the whole line.
DPFC distance protection can reach to extremely fast speed for the fault near the busbar.

The back-up protection of PCS-902 comprises of 3 zones phase-to-phase and 3 zones

phase-to-ground distance protection, 4 stages directional zero-sequence overcurrent protection, 2
stages directional phase overcurrent protection, voltage protection (under/over voltage protection)
and stub overcurrent protection. Additionally, 1 zone reverse distance protection is also provided,
and as an substitution, phase/zero-sequence overcurrent protection are enabled when VT circuit
is failure. PCS-902 can implement single-phase or three-phase trip and configurable
auto-reclosing that can implement 1-pole, 3-poles and 1/3-pole reclosing.

Figure 1.1-2 Functional diagram of PCS-902

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 1

Chapter 1 Introduction

1.2 Function
1. Main protection

„ Pilot protection (85)

z Pilot distance protection

z Directional earth-fault protection

„ DPFC distance protection (21D)

2. Backup protection

„ Three zones phase-to-phase distance protection (21P)

„ Three zones phase-to-ground distance protection (21G)

„ One zone reserval distance protection (21R)

„ Four stages directional zero-sequence overcurrent protection (67N)

z Instantaneous directional zero-sequence overcurrent protection

z Definite-time directional zero-sequence overcurrent protection

„ Two stages directional phase overcurrent protection (67P)

„ One stage inverse-time zero-sequence overcurrent protection (IDMT)

„ Voltage protection

z Two stages over voltage protection (59)

z Two stages under voltage protection (27)

„ Stub overcurrent protection (51P)

„ Breaker failure protection (50BF)

„ Phase overcurrent protection when VT circuit failure (51PVT)

„ Zero-sequence overcurrent protection when VT circuit failure (51GVT)

„ Switch onto fault (SOTF)

z Distance protection for SOTF

z Directional zero-sequence overcurrent protection for SOTF

3. Additional function

„ Power swing blocking releasing

„ Auto-reclosing (79)

„ Synchro-checking (25)

„ VT circuit supervision (VTS)

2 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 1 Introduction

„ CT circuit supervision (CTS)

„ Line VT circuit supervision (LVTS)

„ Self diagnostic test

„ Voltage and current drift auto regulation

„ Fault location (FL)

„ Fault phase selection

Note!

DPFC is the abbreviation of “Deviation of Power Frequency Component”. When a fault

occurs in the power system, the fault current consists of three parts: the pre-fault power
frequency components , the power frequency variables during the fault and the transient
variables during the fault. DPFC is the power frequency variables during the fault.

1.3 Features
1. Protection and Control

„ Quickly clearing the internal fault for whole line, the time is less than 10 ms for fault where is
near the busbar, is less than 15ms for fault where is in the center of line and is less than 25ms
for fault where is in the remote end.

„ Plug connectors from the relay rear panel to the terminal blocks on the rack or cabinet, which
makes the on-site commissioning and replacement much easier than what you do the
commissioning using the traditional screw terminals on the rear panel.

„ Two independent data acquisition paths, one for fault detector element and another for
protections and logic functions, to prevent any undesired trip.

„ The unique DPFC distance element is integrated in the protective device, which can clear the
internal fault quickly with high sensitivity and high speed and is not affected by power swing.

„ Self-adaptive floating threshold which only reflects deviation of power frequency component
can defend system imbalance and system disturbance. Hence, it is both rather reliable and
very fast, and it is very sensitive but does not pickup frequently.

„ Main protection adopts integral transform to ensure high-speed; Back-up protection adopts
Fourier transform, which has an excellent filtering result, to ensure accuracy.

„ 24 samples per cycle, all task including data measurement, protection calculation, logic
discrimination, event recording and protection logic calculation could be done within one
sampling period.

„ GPS clock synchronization – PPS (pulse per second), PPM (pulse per minute), IEC 1588
synchronization, SNTP(BC) synchronization, SNTP(PTP) synchronization, IRIG-B
synchronization and DCF77 synchronization.

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 3

Chapter 1 Introduction

„ High-speed 64 Kbit/s PCM channel or 2048 Kbit/s dedicated optical fiber channel for pilot
scheme (optional)

2. Communication

„ 2 RS-485 communication rear ports conform to IEC 60870-5-103 protocol

„ 1 RS-485 communication rear ports for clock synchronization

„ 4 Ethernet ports at most (depend on the choosed CPU type), IEC 61850, or IEC 60870-5-103
over TCP/IP

„ 2 Ethernet ports via optic fiber at most (ST interface or SC interface, depend on the choosed
CPU type)

3. Monitoring and Metering

„ Event Recorder including 1024 status change reports of binary input, 1024 self-supervision
reports and 1024 operating reports.

„ Disturbance recorder including 1024 fault reports, and 64 waveforms (The file format of
disturbance recorder is compatible with international COMTRADE file.)

„ Self diagnostic test

4. User Interface

„ Friendly HMI interface with LCD and 9-button keypad on the front panel.

„ 1 RS-232 communication faceplate port for testing and setting

„ 1 RS-232 communication rear ports or RS-485 for printer

„ Multi-language option - English, Chinese and Russian

„ Auxiliary software - PCSPC

1.4 Order Information

This device is very flexible to configure according to the practical engineering. The following table
shows the required information when ordering a PCS-902.

Information Required with Order:

Description and Option S1 S2 S3 − H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 H6 H7 H8 H9

Application
Standard A
Series compensated lines B*

Software Version
Standard 1

Language

4 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 1 Introduction

Chinese + English E
Chinese + French F
Chinese + Russian R
Chinese + Spanish S
Chinese + Portuguese P

Auxiliary Power
88~300 Vdc 1

Analog AC Inputs
Non available O
CT 1A A
CT 5A B

Digital AC Inputs
Non available 0
2 x 100Base-FX,
1
ST-Connector
2 x 100Base-FX,
ST-Connector, IRIG-B 2
input (ST)
Other 3*

Support to GOOSE
Non available O
2 x 100Base-FX,
A
ST-Connector
Other B*

Binary Inputs
Non available 0
4 fixed + 14 configurable 1
4 fixed + 32 configurable 2
4 fixed + 50 configurable 3

Binary Outputs
Non available O
33 contacts (22 contacts
A
controlled by fault detector)
44 contacts (22 contacts
B
controlled by fault detector)

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 5

Chapter 1 Introduction

55 contacts (22 contacts

C
controlled by fault detector)

Communication Ports
for Automation
2 x EIA-485 + 2 x
1
100Base-TX, RJ45
4 x 100Base-TX, RJ45 2
2 x 100Base-TX, RJ45 + 2
x 100BaseFX, 3
ST-Connector
Other 4*

Protocol
IEC 60870-5-103 A
DNP 3.0 B
IEC 61850 C*

Pilot Channel
Power line carrier 1

Note!

The items marked with “*” are not included in the basic price and have an additional cost.

6 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 2 Technical Data

Chapter 2 Technical Data

2.1 Electrical Specifications

2.1.1 Analog Input Ratings
1. Analog current

Standard IEC 60255-27:2005

Phase rotation ABC
Nominal frequency 50±5Hz, 60±5Hz
Rated Current 1A 5A
Linear to 0.05In~40In 0.05In~40In
Thermal withstand
-continuously 4In 4In
-for 10s 30In 30In
-for 1s 100In 100In
-for half a cycle 250In 250In
Burden < 0.2VA/phase @In < 0.25VA/phase @In

2. Analog voltage

Standard IEC 60255-6, IEC60288

Phase rotation ABC
Nominal frequency 50±5Hz, 60±5Hz
Rated Voltage (Un) 100V, 110V, 115V
Linear to 0.01Un~1.7Un
Thermal withstand
-continuously 2Un
-10s 2.6Un
-1s 3Un
Burden at rated < 0.25VA/phase @Un

2.1.2 Power Supply

Standard IEC 60255-11:2008
Rated Voltage 110VDC/125VDC, 220VDC/250VDC
Variation 80%Un~120%Un
Permissible AC ripple
<15% of the nominal auxiliary voltage
voltage
Voltage short
200ms for interruption without de-energizing
interruptions
Voltage dips Up to 10s for dips to 40%Un without reset

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 7

Chapter 2 Technical Data

Burden
Quiescent condition <20W
Operating condition <25W

2.1.3 Binary Input

Rated Voltage (Un) 24V, 48V, 110V, 125V, 220V, 250V
Maximal pickup
70%Un
voltage
Minimum dropout
55%Un
voltage
Maximum permissible
120%Un
voltage
Withstand 2000VAC, 2800VDC
Resolving time for
<1ms
logic input

2.1.4 Binary Output

Item Tripping contact Signal contact
Output mode Potential free contact
8A@250VAC 8A@380V AC
Continuous carry
5A@30VDC 5A@30V DC
Pickup time <5ms <10ms
Breaking capacity 0.1A@110VDC resistance 0.3A@220VDC resistance
Making capacity
2000VA 3040VA
(L/R=40ms)
Maximal system 250VAC 380VAC
voltage 30VDC 250VDC
Test voltage across
1000V RMS for 1min 1200V RMS for 1min
open contact
Short duration current [email protected] [email protected]
Loaded
100,000 operations minimum 100,000 operations minimum
contact
Durability
Unloaded
10,000,000 operations minimum 10,000,000 operations minimum
contact

2.1.5 Power Supply Output for Opto-coupler

Standard IEC 60255-1
Rated Voltage 24V
Rated Current 200mA
Maximal current 500mA

8 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 2 Technical Data

2.2 Mechanical Specifications

Enclosure dimensions
482.6×177×291 (unit: mm)
(W×H×D)
Mounting Way Flush mounted
Trepanning
450×179, M6 screw
dimensions (W×H)
Housing color Silver grey
Weight per device Approx. 15kg
Display language English
Housing material Aluminum
Location of terminal Rear panel of the device
Protection class
Standard IEC 60255-1:2009
Front side IP40, up to IP51 (Flush mounted)
Other sides IP30
Rear side, connection
IP20
terminals
Pollution degree 2

2.3 Ambient Temperature and Humidity Range

Standard IEC 60255-1:2009

Operating
-40°C to +70°C
temperature
Transport and storage
-40°C to +70°C
temperature range
Permissible humidity 5%-95%, condensation not permissible
Altitude <3000m

2.4 Communication Port

2.4.1 EIA-485 Port

Baud rate 4.8kbit/s, 9.6kbit/s, 19.2kbit/s, 38.4kbit/s, 57.6kbit/s, 115.2kbit/s
Protocol IEC 60870-5-103:1997
Maximal capacity 32
Transmission distance <500m
Safety level Isolation to ELV level
Twisted pair Screened twisted pair cable

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 9

Chapter 2 Technical Data

2.4.2 Ethernet Port

Connector type RJ-45
Transmission rate 100Mbits/s
Transmission
100Base-TX
standard
Transmission distance <100m
Protocol IEC 60870-5-103:1997 or IEC 61850
Safety level Isolation to ELV level

2.4.3 Optical Fibre Port

Characteristic Plastic optical fiber glass optical fiber
Terminal BFOC/2.5 (OR F-SMA) BFOC/2.5 (OR F-SMA)
Fibre size Step-index 980/1000 μm Graded-index 62.5/125 μm
Transmission distance Up to 40m Up to 1000m
Wave length 660nm 820nm~860nm
Temperature range -5°C ~+55°C -5°C ~+55°C
Transmission power Min. -7dBm Min. -16dBm
Minimum receiving
Min. -20dBm Min. -24dBm
power
System reserve Min +3dB Min +3dB

2.4.4 Print Port

Type RS-232
Baud Rate 4.8kbit/s, 9.6kbit/s, 19.2kbit/s, 38.4kbit/s, 57.6kbit/s, 115.2kbit/s
Printer type EPSON® 300K printer
Safety level Isolation to ELV level

2.4.5 Clock Synchronization Port

Type RS-485
Transmission distance <500m
Maximal capacity 32
Timing standard PPS, IRIG-B
Safety level Isolation to ELV level

2.5 Type Tests

2.5.1 Environmental Tests

Dry cold test Per IEC60068-2-1:2007

Dry heat test Per IEC60068-2-2:2007
Damp heat test, cyclic Per IEC60068-2-30:2005

10 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 2 Technical Data

2.5.2 Mechanical Tests

Vibration Per IEC 60255-21-1:1988 Class I

Shock and bump Per IEC 60255-21-2:1988 Class I

2.5.3 Electrical Tests

Standard IEC 60255-27:2005

Dielectric tests Test voltage 2kV, 50Hz, 1min
Standard IEC 60255-5:2000
Impulse voltage tests Test voltage 5kV
Overvoltage category Ⅲ
Insulation resistance
Isolation resistance >100MΩ@500VDC
measurements

2.5.4 Electromagnetic Compatibility

1MHz burst disturbance Per IEC 60255-22-1:2007
test Common mode: class III 2.5KV
Differential mode: class III 1.0KV
Electrostatic discharge Per IEC60255-22-2:2008 class IV
test For contact discharge: 8kV
For air discharge: 15kV
Radio frequency Per IEC 60255-22-3:2007 class III
interference tests Frequency sweep
Radiated amplitude-modulated
10V/m (rms), f=80~1000MHz
Spot frequency
Radiated amplitude-modulated
10V/m (rms), f=80MHz/160MHz/450MHz/900MHz
Radiated pulse-modulated
10V/m (rms), f=900MHz
Fast transient Per IEC 60255-22-4:2008
disturbance tests Power supply, I/O, Earth: class IV, 4kV, 2.5kHz, 5/50ns
Communication terminals: class IV, 2kV, 5kHz, 5/50ns
Surge immunity test Per IEC 60255-22-5:2008
Power supply, AC input, I/O port: class IV, 1.2/50us
Common mode: 4kV
Differential mode: 2kV
Conducted RF Per IEC 60255-22-6:2001
Electromagnetic Power supply, AC, I/O, Comm. Terminal: Class III, 10Vrms, 150
Disturbance kHz~80MHz
Power Frequency Per IEC 61000-4-8:2001
Magnetic Field Immunity class V, 100A/m for 1min, 1000A/m for 3s
Pulse Magnetic Field Per IEC 61000-4-9:2001
Immunity class V, 6.4/16μs, 1000A/m for 3s

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 11

Chapter 2 Technical Data

Damped oscillatory IEC 61000-4-10:2001

magnetic field immunity class V, 100kHz & 1MHz–100A/m

2.6 Certifications

z ISO9001: 2000

z ISO14001:2004

z OHSAS18001: 1999

z ISO10012:2003

z CMMI L3

z EMC: 89/336/EEC, EN50263:2000

z Products safety(PS): 73/23/EEC, EN61010-1: 2001, EN60950: 2002

2.7 Protective Functions

2.7.1 Optical Interface
Optic connector: FC/PC

Fibre optic: Single mode, CCITT Rec.G652, 1310nm

Optic emitter: 1310nm FP laser diode

Optic receiver: InGaAs photodiode module

Receiver sensitivity: 64kbit/s: -38dBm 2048kbit/s: -38dBm

Maximum transmission distance: 64kbit/s: 90km 2048kbit/s: 90km

2.7.2 Fault Detector

2.7.2.1 DPFC overcurrent element

Setting range: 0.02In~10.00In

Accuracy: ≤2.5% or 0.02In whichever is greater

2.7.2.2 Zero-sequence overcurrent element

Setting range: 0.02In~10.00In

Accuracy: ≤2.5% or 0.02In whichever is greater

2.7.3 Pilot Protection

2.7.3.1 Pilot distance protection

Setting range: 0.00~2Unn/In

Accuracy: ≤2.5% or 0.1Ω/In whichever is greater

12 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 2 Technical Data

Typical operating time: <25ms

2.7.3.2 Pilot directional zero-seuqence protection (POTT)

Min operating voltage: <1V, >0.5V

Min operating current: <0.1In

Typical operating time: <25ms

2.7.4 DPFC Distance Protection

Setting range: 0~2Unn/In (Unn:phase-to-phase rated voltage)

Accuracy: ≤10%

Operating time: <20ms

2.7.5 Distance Protection

Setting range: 0.00~2Unn/In

Accuracy: ≤2.5% or 0.1Ω/In whichever is greater

Time delay: 0s~10s

Accuracy: ≤1%Setting+40ms

Operating time: ≈20ms (Zone 1)

2.7.6 Directional Zero-sequence Overcurrent Protection

Setting range: 0.02In~40In

Accuracy: ≤2.5% or 0.02In whichever is greater

Time delay: 0s~10s

Accuracy: ≤1%Setting+40ms

Operating time: ≈30ms (Stage 1)

2.7.7 Directional Phase Overcurrent Protection

Setting range: 0.02In~40In

Accuracy: ≤2.5% or 0.02In whichever is greater

Time delay: 0s~10s

Accuracy: ≤1%Setting+40ms

2.7.8 Overvoltage Protection

Setting range: Un~2Unn

Accuracy: ≤1%Un (Un:phase-to-ground rated voltage)

Time delay: 0s~10s

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 13

 Chapter 2 Technical Data

Accuracy: ≤1%Setting+20ms

Accuracy: (inverse-time characteristic is selected) ≤5% of theoretical value + Max( 2.5 % voltage
tolerance, 0.02U2n voltage tolerance), at least
40ms

2.7.9 Undervoltage Protection

Setting range: 0~Unn (phase-to-phase rated voltage)

Accuracy: ≤1%Un

Time delay: 0s~10s

Accuracy: ≤1%Setting+20ms

Accuracy: (inverse-time characteristic is selected) ≤5% of theoretical value + Max( 2.5 % voltage
tolerance, 0.02U2n voltage tolerance), at least
40ms

2.7.10 Inverse-time Zero-sequence Overcurrent Protection

Setting range: 0.02In~40In

Accuracy: ≤5% or 0.04In whichever is greater

Time delay: 0s~10s

Accuracy: ≤5% of theoretical value + Max( 2.5 % current

tolerance, 0.02In current tolerance), at least
40ms

2.7.11 Breaker Failure Protection (BFP)

Range of time delay of stage 1 of BFP: 0.00~10.00s

Range of time delay of stage 2 of BFP: 0.00~10.00s

Reset time for stage 1 of BFP: <20ms

Reset time for stage 2 of BFP: <20ms

2.7.12 Transient Overreach

Tolerance for all high-speed protection: ≤2%

2.7.13 Fault Locator

Accuracy for multi-phase faults with one end source: < ±2.5%

Tolerance will be higher in case of single-phase fault with high ground resistance.

14 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 3 Protection Description

Chapter 3 Protection Description

3.1 General Description

The equipment has 2 plug-in DSP modules (i.e. protection DSP module and fault detector DSP
module) for protection calculation. Protection DSP module is responsible for calculation of
protection element, and fault detector DSP module is responsible for calculation of fault detector of
protection. Fault detectors on fault detector DSP module picks up to connect positive pole of
power supply of output relays. The equipment output relays can operate to trip only if the fault
detector on fault detector DSP module picks up and the corresponding protection element on
protection DSP module operates simultaneously. Otherwise, the output relays can’t operate to trip.
An alarm message will be issued with blocking tripping output if a protection element on protection
DSP module operates while the corresponding fault detector on fault detector element does not
operates.

3.2 General Fault Detector Element (GFD)

Main part of GFD is DPFC overcurrent fault detector element that reflects the deviation of
phase-to-phase power frequency current, and zero-sequence overcurrent fault detector element
that reflects total current is taken as supplementary.

The GFD comprise of the following elements:

„ DPFC overcurrent element

„ Zero-sequence overcurrent element

„ Overvoltage element

If any of the above fault detector elements operates, the GFD will operate to provide DC power
supply to the output relays to enable the output circuit.

3.2.1 DPFC overcurrent element

This element adopts adaptive floating threshold which consists of unbalanced output of deviation.
The adaptive floating threshold is kept higher than the unbalanced output all along, which makes it
not pick up frequently and have an extremely high sensitivity and reliability. By using adaptive
floating threshold, the unbalanced output value is small under normal condition, so this element
has extremely high sensitivity. When power swing occurs, the adaptive floating threshold
increases while the sensitivity decreases automatically, so it is not influenced by power swing
condition and need not be controlled by power swing blocking element.

Its criterion:

ΔIΦΦMAX>1.25ΔITh+ΔISet (Equation 3.2-1)

Where:

ΔIΦΦMAX: The maximum half-wave integration value of phase-to-phase current

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 15

Chapter 3 Protection Description

ΔISet: The fixed threshold value (i.e. the setting [I_DPFC_OC_FD])

ΔITh: The floating threshold value

If operating condition is met, DPFC overcurrent element will operate to provide DC power supply
for output relay, and pickup signal will be kept for 7 seconds after DPFC overcurrent element drops
out.

3.2.2 Zero-sequence overcurrent element

This element will operate when both 3I0 and 3I0Cal are greater than the setting [I_ROC_FD].

where:

3I0: zero-sequence current derived at the neutral current circuit from three-phase currents

3I0Cal: zero-sequence current calculated depending on the summation of IA, IB and IC (i.e.
3I0Cal=IA+IB+IC)

If operating condition is met, zero-sequence overcurrent element will operate to provide DC power
supply for output relay, and pickup signal will be kept for 7 seconds after zero-sequence
overcurrent element drops out.

When CT circuit failure is detected, this element will be disabled and an alarm [Alm_CTS_CB1] or
[Alm_CTS_CB2] will be issued.

Note!

The zero-sequence current should be connected to the protective device; otherwise all
protection elements corresponding with zero-sequence current will be blocked.

3.2.3 Overvoltage Element

If overvoltage protection is enabled, overvoltage fault detector element is valid.

If the logic setting [Opt_1P/3P_Volt] is set as “1”, i.e. the protective device adopts 1-out-of-3 mode,
so when any phase voltage is greater than the setting [V_OV], the overvoltage fault detector
element will operate to provide DC power supply for output relay, and pickup signal will be kept for
7 seconds after overvoltage fault detector element drops out.

If the logic setting [Opt_1P/3P_Volt] is set as “0”, i.e. the protective device adopts 3-out-of-3 mode,
so when three phase voltages are all greater than a threshold setting, the overvoltage fault
detector element will operate to provide DC power supply for output relay, and pickup signal will be
kept for 7 seconds after overvoltage fault detector element drops out.

3.3 Protective Fault Detector Element (PFD)

For protective fault detector element, all fault detector elements mentioned above are included,
besides, there is an additional fault detector element used to initiate sending signal of directional
comparison blocking scheme.

Its criterion:

16 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 3 Protection Description

ΔIΦΦMAX>1.125ΔITh+0.5ΔISet (Equation 3.3-1)

ΔIΦΦMAX, ΔISet, ΔITh, their meanings are as same as what mentioned in Equation 3.2-1.

When this criterion is met, the program flow still goes to the regular program, the program flow will
go to fault calculation program only if Equation 3.2-1 is also met or zero-sequence overcurrent
element also operates.

3.4 DPFC distance protection

The power system is normally treated as a balanced symmetrical three-phase network. When a
fault occurs in the power system, by applying the principle of superposition, the load currents and
voltage can be calculated in the system prior to the fault and the pure fault component can be
calculated by whole fault current or voltage subtracted by load current or voltage. DPFC distance
protection reflects deviation of power frequency, therefore, only pure fault current and voltage is
useful to DPFC distance protection which is not influenced by load current and voltage.

„ For forward direction fault

jX

ZZD
ZK

R
ZS+ZK

-ZS

Figure 3.4-1 Operation characteristic for forward fault

ZZD: The setting of distance protection

ZS: Total impedance between local system and protective device location

ZK: Measurement impedance

Figure 3.4-1 shows the operation characteristic of the DPFC distance element on R-X plane when
a fault occurs in forward direction, which is the circle with the –Zs as the center and the│Zs+Zzd│ as
the radius. When measured impedance Zk is in the circle, the DPFC distance element will operate.
The DPFC distance element has a large capability of enduring fault resistance. When there is
infeed current from power source at the other end in the fault resistance, the phase of ΔIN is the
same as ΔI and the phase of voltage of fault resistance is same as ΔI, so the fault resistance
appears resistive and is in parallel with R axes. The overreaching problem that results from infeed
current can be prevented.

„ For reverse direction fault

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 17

Chapter 3 Protection Description

Figure 3.4-2 Operation characteristic for reverse fault

Z'S：Total impedance between remote system and protective device location

Figure 3.4-2 shows the operation characteristic of the DPFC distance element on R-X plane when
a fault occurs in reverse direction, which is the circle with the Z's as the center and the │Z's-Zzd│ as
the radius. The region of operation is in the quadrant 1 but the measured impedance –Zk is always
in the quadrant 3, so the DPFC distance element will not operate and have the definite
directionality.

Note!

The DPFC distance protection can be enabled or disabled by corresponding logic setting
and binary input.

3.5 Pilot Protection

3.5.1 General Description
Pilot protection of PCS-902 series comprises directional distance relay and directional
zero-sequence relay. Pilot protection is the term used to describe communication-assisted
protection. The pilot protection channel could operate over power line carrier or fiber optic paths.
Exchanging signal through channel can implement to clear the internal fault quickly.

There are three kinds of application modes associated with different auxiliary device and channel.

1. Auxiliary optical fibre channel

18 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 3 Protection Description

Figure 3.5-1 Typical application using auxiliary optical fibre channel

This kind of application must be cooperated with digital optical fibre interface device, such as
FOX-40F and FOX-41A.

2. PLC channel with blocking scheme

Figure 3.5-2 Typical application using PLC channel with blocking scheme

This kind of application must be coordinated with dedicated PLC transceiver, such as LFX-912 and
LFX-913. At the same time, the pilot protection must be blocking scheme.

3. PLC channel with permissive scheme

PCS-902 PCS-902

Protection Protection
signal signal

PLC equipment PLC channel PLC equipment

Figure 3.5-3 Typical application using PLC channel with permissive scheme

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 19

Chapter 3 Protection Description

If PLC channel is used and the pilot protection adopts permissive scheme, this kind of application
should be selected. If the audio interface is available in the PLC equipment, additional audio
interface device is not needed. Otherwise, audio interface device should be equipped with
PCS-902, for example, CAT-50.

3.5.2 Communication channel

A PLC channel includes the signal path from the transmitting electronic equipment at one terminal,
through its coupling equipment, over the power line, through the tuning equipment at the receiving
end, and into the electronic equipment at the receiving terminal. In bidirectional applications, a
similar return path is provided.

As shown in Figure 3.5-4, a basic PLC system consists of three distinct parts: the terminal
assemblies, the coupling equipment, and the transmission line. Terminal assemblies consist of
transmitters, receivers, and protective relays. The coupling equipment consists of the line tuner,
coupling capacitor, and line trap. The transmission line provides a suitable path for transmission of
carrier energy between terminals in the PLC band of frequencies. At the terminals, one or more
transmitters and/or receivers may be required, depending on the number of functions to be
performed.

Figure 3.5-4 The application of power carrier line channel

There are three coupling modes are selectable:

1) Phase-to-ground coupling

2) Phase-to-phase coupling

3) Line-to-line coupling

3.5.3 Protection logic

Pilot protection distinguishes between the forward fault and the reverse fault through directional
comparison element. Through exchanging signal via channel, PCS-902 associated with directional
distance element and directional zero-sequence element can clear the fault for the whole
transmission line without time delay.

20 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 3 Protection Description

3.5.3.1 Directional distance element

The directional distance element is formed by distance element with overreaching scheme and
consists of undervoltage distance element, phase-to-ground distance element and
phase-to-phase distance element. The operation characteristic of these elements is as same as
that of distance protection.

1. Undervoltage distance element

Please refer to section 3.7.1 about the operation characteristic.

2. Phase-to-ground distance element

Please refer to section 3.7.2 about the operation characteristic.

3. Phase-to-phase distance element

Please refer to section 3.7.3 about the operation characteristic.

3.5.3.2 Weak infeed

PCS-902 also provides weak infeed element to identify a fault in forward direction or reverse
direction. It is invalid unless the logic setting [En_WE_POTT] is set as “1”.

Figure 3.5-5 The logic scheme of weak infeed

In the case of weak infeed, if none of forward distance element, reverse distance element, forward
zero-sequence element and reverse zero-sequence element operate and any phase voltage or
phase-to-phase voltage is smaller than 30V, the protective device regards it as a fault in forward
direction. Thus distance element will operate for this case.

3.5.3.3 Directional zero-sequence element

Forward zero-sequence element (F0＋) and reverse zero-sequence element (F0－) are determined by
the zero-sequence power (P0). P0 derives from Equation 3.5-1.

P0=3U0Cal×3I0Cal×ZD (Equation 3.5-1)

Where:

3I0Cal: The zero-sequence current calculated depending on the summation of IA, IB and IC (i.e.

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 21

Chapter 3 Protection Description

3I0Cal=IA+IB+IC)

3U0Cal: The zero-sequence voltage calculated depending on the summation of UA, UB and UC (i.e.
3U0Cal=UA+UB+UC)

ZD: The unit vector (Its amplitude is 1 and its phase angle is 78º)

When P0>0, F0－ operates.

When P0<-1 (IN=5A) or P0<-0.2 (IN =1A), F0＋ operates.

The forward direction of directional zero-sequence element derives from the output of F0＋ through
an AND gate with directional comparison zero-sequence overcurrent element. The reverse
direction of directional zero-sequence element derives from the output of F0－ through an AND
gate with zero-sequence overcurrent element. The logic scheme is shown as Figure 3.5-6.

Figure 3.5-6 Logic diagram of directional zero-sequence element

Please refer to Chapter 8 about the description of corresponding settings.

ROC DIR+: The forward direction of directional zero-sequence element

ROC DIR-: The reserve direction of directional zero-sequence element

3.5.3.4 Current reversal

Another fault situation requiring timing coordination occurs when two protected lines run in parallel
or substantially in parallel through short interconnecting lines. This situation is commonly referred
as current reversal. In Figure 3.5-7, a fault occurrs on line C–D near breaker D. Relay A will be
prevented from tripping because the directional information from the relay near breaker B
indicates that the fault is in the reverse direction.

M N
A B
EM EN

C D

Figure 3.5-7 Setup for current reversal scenario

22 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 3 Protection Description

M N
A B
EM EN

C D

Figure 3.5-8 Current reversal occurrence

If the line A–B protection is a blocking scheme, then the relay at B sends a blocking signal to A to
prevent tripping. Conversely, if the scheme is a permissive overreaching type, then B continues
the normal guard signal to A, which indicates that A should not trip. If breaker D should open
before breaker C on the faulted line, the fault current in line A–B suddenly reverses direction as
shown in Figure 3.5-8.

In a blocking scheme, relays at both A and B have a tendency to trip incorrectly during the current
reversal, but they are prevented from doing so by the pickup and reset coordination timers. The
pickup coordination timer at B prevents the forward-looking relay at B from tripping while waiting
for the reverse-looking relay at A to send a blocking signal. Also, the reset timer at B continues
transmission of a blocking signal to A long enough to permit the forward-looking relay at A to reset.

In a permissive overreaching scheme, the initial fault near D will cause the forward-looking relay at
A to send trip permission to B. When the current reverses, relay B will suddenly see a fault in its
forward direction and time coordination is necessary to ensure that B does not trip before the
permissive signal from A can be removed. The simplest solution to this race is a pickup timer for
the forward-reaching relay, just like that described for the blocking scheme. The required timing for
this timer is the sum of

1. The difference between the reset time of relay A forward direction and the pickup time of relay
B reverse direction [A – B]

2. The channel dropout time

3. Plus a time margin

3.5.3.5 POTT and PUTT

PCS-902 adopts channel-aided pilot distance protection which can be configured as POTT or
PUTT via logic settings [En_POTT_PilotP] and [En_PUTT_PilotP]. Besides, an additional
directional earth-fault element is provided for POTT to improve the sensitivity of high-resistance
fault. It is the supplement of POTT. The dedicated directional earth-fault element for POTT can be
enabled/disabled via logic setting [En_ROC_POTT].

The permissive scheme can use PLC channel or optic fiber channel as communication channel.
These signals, which are used to initiate sending permissive signal, such as normally closed
auxiliary contact of circuit breaker, external protection tripping and so on, should be connected to
the protective device directly but not to the dedicated transceiver.

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 23

Chapter 3 Protection Description

&
[BI_52b_Pha_CB1]
BI_52b_Pha
[BI_52b_Pha_CB2]

&
[BI_52b_Phb_CB1]
BI_52b_Phb
[BI_52b_Phb_CB2]

&
[BI_52b_Phc_CB1]
BI_52b_Phc
[BI_52b_Phc_CB2]
&
BI_52b

If only one circuit breaker (CB1) is equipped with the device, the binary input for normally closed
auxiliary contact of CB2 will be regarded as being energized.

[BI_52b_Pha_CB1]: Binary input for normally closed auxiliary contact of phase A of CB1

[BI_52b_Phb_CB1]: Binary input for normally closed auxiliary contact of phase B of CB1

[BI_52b_Phc_CB1]: Binary input for normally closed auxiliary contact of phase C of CB1

[BI_52b_Pha_CB2]: Binary input for normally closed auxiliary contact of phase A of CB2

[BI_52b_Phb_CB2]: Binary input for normally closed auxiliary contact of phase B of CB2

[BI_52b_Phc_CB2]: Binary input for normally closed auxiliary contact of phase C of CB2

„ POTT

24 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 3 Protection Description
[VEBI_PilotP]

[En_POTT_PilotP]

Receiving carrier signal 1

[En_ROC_POTT]

[VEBI_ROC] & & 8ms 0 & Pilot protection operating

&
Reverse zero-sequence element
≥1
Other protection logic operating to trip T1 T2
&
Forward zero-sequence element &

[VEBI_ROC] &

[En_ROC_POTT]

[En_Z_POTT_Quad]
&
Zp< [Z_POTT_Quad]

ZP<[Z_POTT] ≥1

ZPP<[Z_POTT]
&
&
[En_Z_POTT]
& ≥1
PSBR_PilotP

[En_WE_POTT]
&
Distance element for weak infeed
&
0 100ms ≥1 ≥1
Other protection logic operating to trip
& Sending carrier signal 1

[BI_ExTrp_PilotP] 0 150ms

≥1
BI_52b=1
&
≥1 200ms 0
Trip confirmation &

IA,B and C<0.06In

Receiving carrier signal 1

[VEBI_PilotP]

[En_POTT_PilotP]

Figure 3.5-9 Logic scheme of POTT after fault detector operating

T1: t_Dly_CurRev
T2: t_Ext_CurRev

Please refer to Chapter 8 about the description of settings and section 7.4 about the description of
binary signals.

1. If the forward element operates and the reverse element does not operate, it will result in
sending permissive signal, at the same time, the pilot protection will operate if permissive
signal has been received from the opposite end for more than 8ms.

2. If during the time delay [t_Dly_CurRev] after the fault has been detected, the operation
condition for pilot protection is not satisfied, but the condition is only met after the delay, then
the pilot protection will operate with time delay [t_Ext_CurRev], which can prevent PCS-902
from mal-operation when current reversal happens.

3. If other protection logic operate to trip circuit breaker (such as directional zero-sequence
overcurrent protection and distance protection), permissive signal is sent immediately and the

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 25

Chapter 3 Protection Description

permissive signal is kept for 100ms continually after tripping signal drops off. However, that
reverse element operate will stop sending permissive signal immediately.

4. If external protection operate to trip circuit breaker (for example, busbar protection), i.e. binary
input [BI_ExTrp_PilotP] is energized, permissive signal is sent immediately and the
permissive signal is kept for 150ms continually after trip signal drops off.

5. Three-phase trip confirmation is detected or 52b of three phases are energized (i.e.
[BI_52b_Pha] = [BI_52b_Phb] = [BI_52b_Phc] =1), moreover, three phases current are all
zero, PCS-902 will send permissive signal for 200ms if receiving the carrier signal from
opposite end of line.

6. For POTT, pilot zero-sequence element can be enabled or disabled by logic setting
[En_ROC_POTT]. For internal fault associated with high resistance, it can clear the fault
quickly. Pilot weak infeed element can be enabled or disabled by logic setting
[En_WE_POTT]. For internal fault, it can send permissive signal to opposite end of line. If
receiving permissive signal from the opposite end of line, pilot protection will operate quickly.

7. When POTT is enabled, if polit distance protection and directional earth-fault protection use
the same contact to initiate sending permissive signal, logic setting [En_Z_POTT] and
[En_ROC_POTT] can be set as “1”. If pilot distance protection and directional earth-fault
protection use independent contact to initiate sending permissive signal, logic setting
[En_Z_POTT] and [En_DEF_PilotP] are set as “1” and logic setting [En_ROC_POTT] must be
set as “0”.

8. When PCS-902 detects the status of manually closing or auto-reclosing, POTT will be
disabled.

9. For double-circuit lines on the same tower, in order to prevent incorrect selection of faulty
phase when a cross-line fault occurs, POTT based on phase-segregated command scheme
is adopted (the logic setting [Opt_Ch_PhSeg] should be set as “1”). If the operation condition
for pilot protection is satisfied and permissive signal of corresponding phase (“BI_Recv1” for
phase A, “BI_RecvB” for phase B and “BI_RecvC” for phase C) is received, pilot protection
will operate to trip faulty phase of this line.

10. When the operation condition for pilot protection is satisfied, permissive signal of faulty phase
(“Send1” for phase A, “SendB” for phase B and “SendC” for phase C) will be sent if it is a
single phase fault while permissive signals of three phase will be sent if it is a multi-phase
fault.

„ PUTT

26 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 3 Protection Description

[VEBI_PilotP]

[En_PUTT_PilotP]

Receiving carrier signal 1

[En_ZPG2_Quad ]
&
Zone 2 of quadrilateral distance element

[En_ZPG2]
& ≥1
Zone 2 phase-to-ground distance element & Op_Z_PilotP
& 8ms 0
[En_ZPP2]
&
Zone 2 phase-to-phase distance element
&

PSBR_PilotP

&
[En_ZPG1]
&
Zone 1 phase-to-ground distance element

[En_ZPP1]
& ≥1 ≥1
Zone 1 phase-to-phase distance element & Sending carrier signal 1

[En_ZPG1_Quad ]
&
Zone 1 of quadrilateral distance element

[BI_ExTrp_PilotP] 0 150ms

[VEBI_PilotP]

[En_PUTT_PilotP]

Figure 3.5-10 Logic scheme of PUTT after fault detector operating

Please refer to Chapter 8 about the description of settings and section 7.4 about the description of
binary signals.

1. If zone 1 of distance element operates to trip circuit breaker, permissive signal is sent
immediately and the permissive signal is kept for 100ms continually after tripping signal drops
off.

2. If zone 2 of distance element operates to trip circuit breaker and permissive signal is received
from the opposite end of line for 8ms, pilot protection operates.

3. If external protection operate to trip circuit breaker (for example busbar protection), i.e. binary
input [BI_ExTrp_PilotP] is energized, permissive signal is sent immediately and the
permissive signal is kept for 150ms continually after trip signal drops off.

4. When PCS-902 detects the status of manually closing or auto-reclosing, PUTT will be
disabled.

5. For double-circuit lines on the same tower, in order to prevent incorrect selection of faulty
phase when a cross-line fault occurs, PUTT based on phase-segregated command scheme is

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 27

Chapter 3 Protection Description

adopted (the logic setting [Opt_Ch_PhSeg] should be set as “1”). If zone 2 of distance
element operates and permissive signal of corresponding phase (“BI_Recv1” for phase A,
“BI_RecvB” for phase B and “BI_RecvC” for phase C) is received, pilot protection will operate
to trip faulty phase of this line.

6. When zone 1 of distance element operates, permissive signal of faulty phase (“Send1” for
phase A, “SendB” for phase B and “SendC” for phase C) will be sent if it is a single phase fault
while permissive signals of three phase will be sent if it is a multi-phase fault.

3.5.3.6 Directional earth-fault Protection (DEF)

Directional earth-fault protection is controlled by logic setting [En_DEF_PilotP].

[VEBI_PilotP]

[En_DEF_PilotP]

Recieving carrier signal 2 (BI_Recv2) & Op_DEF_PilotP

& t_DEF 0
[En_DEF_PilotP]

[VEBI_ROC] &
&
Forward zero-sequence element
20ms 0
VTS
0 100ms ≥1
Sending carrier signal 2
&
(i.e. Send2)
Other protection logic operating

[BI_ExTrp_PilotP] 0 150ms

≥1
BI_52b=1
≥1
&
Trip confirmation &
200ms 0
IA,B and C<0.06In

Receiving carrier signal 2

[En_DEF_PilotP]

[VEBI_PilotP]

Figure 3.5-11 Logic scheme of DEF after fault detector operating

Please refer to Chapter 8 about the description of settings and section 7.4 about the description of
binary signals.

1. If forward zero-sequence element operates, with 20ms delay, PCS-902 sends permissive
signal to opposite end of line. At the same time, if permissive signal is received from the
opposite end of line, pilot zero-sequence element will operate after the time delay [t_DEF].
The time delay [t_DEF] can ensure DEF operate correctly when the fault with high resistance
occurs.

2. If other protection logic operate to trip circuit breaker (such as directional zero-sequence
overcurrent protection and distance protection), permissive signal is sent immediately and the
permissive signal is kept for 100ms continually after tripping signal drops off.

3. If external protection operate to trip circuit breaker (for example, busbar protection), i.e. binary
input [BI_ExTrp_PilotP] is energized, permissive signal is sent immediately and the
permissive signal is kept for 150ms continually after trip signal drops off.

28 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 3 Protection Description

4. Three-phase trip confirmation is detected or 52b of three phases are energized (i.e.
[BI_52b_Pha] = [BI_52b_Phb] = [BI_52b_Phc] =1), moreover, three phases current are all
zero, PCS-902 will send permissive signal for 200ms if the carrier signal is received from the
opposite end of line.

5. When PCS-902 detects the status of manually closing or auto-reclosing, DEF will be disabled.

3.5.3.7 Normal condition

[En_POTT_PilotP]
&
Recieving carrier signal 1

[En_WE_POTT]

Phase voltage UP<0.6UN & & Sending carrier signal 1

≥1 & 200ms 0
Phase-to-phase voltage UP<0.6UNN ≥1

BI_52b=1
& & Sending carrier signal 2
200ms 0
IA,B and C<0.06In &

Receiving carrier signal 2

&
[En_DEF_PilotP]

Figure 3.5-12 Logic scheme of pilot protection under normal condition

After receiving permissive signal from opposite end of line, if local circuit breaker is in the opening
state, PCS-902 will send permissive signal to opposite end of line. When POTT is adopted, for
weak infeed end, PCS-902 will send permissive signal to opposite end of line after receiving
permissive signal from opposite end of line if any phase voltage or phase-to-phase voltage is less
than 33V, which can ensure internal fault cleared quickly by protective device of remote end when
fault detector element does not operate because of light load of line.

3.6 Overcurrent Protection

3.6.1 Application
The fault current on long transmission lines depends mostly on the fault position and decreases
with the distance from the generation point. For this reason the protection must operate very
quickly for faults very close to the generation (and protective device) point, for which very high fault
currents are characteristic.

The conventional distance protection can manage the fault clearance of earth-faults in most of the
cases. In some applications, especially applications with long lines, the clearance can be
improved by use of an instantaneous zero-sequence overcurrent protection. Those are for
instance:

1. In the case of high infeed of fault current from the opposite end of the line, this might increase
the fault resistance seen by the distance relay to such a value that the instantaneous zone of
the distance protection will not operate.

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 29

Chapter 3 Protection Description

2. In applications with series compensated lines, where the capacitor is located at the end of the
line and very strong infeed of fault current from that end, will result in a difficult problem for the
distance protection to perform a selective fault clearance. This due to the voltage reversal that
might occur.

3.6.2 Scheme logic

1. Directional zero-sequence overcurrent protection

Directional zero-sequence overcurrent protection consists of four stages of zero-sequence

overcurrent elements with their independent time delay and the corresponding directional
elements can be enabled or disabled by setting the logic settings [En_Dir_ROC1], [En_Dir_ROC2],
[En_Dir_ROC3] and [En_Dir_ROC4]. When any of the logic settings [En_Dir_ROC1],
[En_Dir_ROC2], [En_Dir_ROC3] and [En_Dir_ROC4] is set as “0”, corresponding stage of
zero-sequence overcurrent protection is no-directional zero-sequence overcurrent protection.

3I0>[I_ROC_FD]
&
3I0Cal>[I_ROC_FD]
& ROC DIR+
F0+

F0-
& ROC DIR-

[En_Dir_ROC1]
≥1 [t_ROC1]
Op_ROC1
3I0Cal > [I_ROC1] &

[En_ROC1] &

[En_Dir_ROC2]
≥1 [t_ROC2]
Op_ROC2
3I0Cal > [I_ROC2] &

[En_ROC2] &

[En_Dir_ROC3]
≥1 [t_ROC3]
Op_ROC3
3I0Cal > [I_ROC3] &
&
[En_ROC3]
≥1
[t_ROC4]
[En_Dir_ROC4] & Op_ROC4

3I0Cal > [I_ROC4]

&
[En_ROC4]

Figure 3.6-1 Logic diagram of directional zero-sequence overcurrent protection

Please refer to Chapter 8 about the description of corresponding settings.

F0＋: Forward zero-sequence element

30 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 3 Protection Description

F0－: Reverse zero-sequence element

2. Directional Phase Overcurrent Protection

The overcurrent protection in this relay provides two-stage phase overcurrent protection with
independent definite-time characteristics. Each stage can be enabled or disabled by scheme logic
settings independently. All overcurrent element and directional element settings apply to all three
phases but are independent for each stage. Configuring the relevant settings can enable or
disable the corresponding directional element.

Reverse direction

UJ
φ=phi_RCA_OC

Forward direction

IJ

Figure 3.6-2 Operation characteristic of direction element

Where:

φ: The characteristic angle of phase overcurrent element, i.e. the setting [phi_RCA_OC].

Polarized positive sequence voltage is used for directional element of phase overcurrent
protection. When close-in three-phase fault happens, the positive sequence voltage maybe very
low, then memorized positive sequence polarized voltage is used instead.

Figure 3.6-3 Logic diagram of directional phase overcurrent protection

Please refer to Chapter 8 about the description of corresponding settings.

3. Inverse-time zero-sequence overcurrent protection

Inverse-time zero-sequence overcurrent protection is available in PCS-902, inverse-time

characteristics (IDMT) defined in IEC60255-3 are adopted, the formula is shown as follows:

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 31

Chapter 3 Protection Description

β
t(I ) = Tp (Equation 3.6-1)
I
( 0 )τ − 1
Ip

Where:

TP : Time constant, i.e. the setting [t_InvROC]

IP : Reference current, i.e. the setting [I_InvROC]

β is a certain constant.

τ is the exponent.

I0 is the actual value of measured zero-sequence current.

For Inverse-time zero-sequence overcurrent protection, three kinds of inverse-time characteristics

can be choose from by setting the logic setting [Opt_Characteristic_ROC]. The parameters of
each characteristics are listed in the following table.

Table 3.6-1 Parameters of each characteristics

[Opt_Characteristic_ROC] τ β

0: Standard inverse-time characteristic 0.02 0.14

1: Very inverse-time characteristic 1 13.5
2: Extremely inverse-time characteristic 2 80

The logic scheme of inverse-time zero-sequence overcurrent protection is shown in the Figure
3.6-4.

Figure 3.6-4 Logic diagram of inverse-time zero-sequence overcurrent protection

Where:

[t_InvROC]: Time delay of inverse-time zero-sequence overcurrent protection

[I_InvROC]: Current setting of inverse-time zero-sequence overcurrent protection

32 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 3 Protection Description

[En_Dir_InvROC]: Logic setting for enabling inverse-time zero-sequence overcurrent protection

controlled by direction element

[En_FixDly_InvROC]: Logic setting for enabling inverse-time zero-sequence overcurrent

protection operate with an additional time delay (100ms)

[En_InvROC]: Logic setting for enabling inverse-time zero-sequence overcurrent protection

4. Zero-sequence/phase overcurrent protection when VT circuit failure

When bus VT circuit failure happens, the distance protection will be disabled. As a substitute,
phase overcurrent protection and zero-sequence overcurrent protection will be put into work
automatically in this case if VEBI setting [VEBI_DistP] and [VEBI_ROC] are set as “1”.

Figure 3.6-5 Logic diagram of zero-sequence/phase overcurrent protection when VT circuit failure

Please refer to Chapter 8 about the description of corresponding settings.

1. Whether stage 1, stage 2 and 3 of directional zero-sequence overcurrent element operating

will lead to trip three-phase circuit breaker and block auto-reclosing is controlled by the logic
settings [En_ROC1_Blk_AR], [En_ROC2_Blk_AR] and [En_ROC3_Blk_AR]. If the logic
setting is set as “1” and all the operating condition are met, the corresponding stage of
zero-sequence overcurrent element will operate to trip three-phase circuit breaker and block
auto-reclosing.

2. If bus VT circuit failure happens, phase overcurrent protection or zero-sequence overcurrent

protection will be put into service automatically if the virtual binary inputs [VEBI_DistP] or
[VEBI_ROC] are set as “1”.

3.7 Distance Protection

The distance protection comprises 3 zones phase-to-phase distance elements, 3 zones
phase-to-ground elements which include Mho characteristic and quadrilateral characteristic and 1
zone reverse distance element. When the fault with high resistance occurs, phase-to-ground
element with quardrilateral characteristic can operate correctly. In order to ensure the reliability,
phase-to-ground element with quardrilateral characteristic will operate with a longer time delay
than phase-to-ground element with Mho characteristic.

For each independent distance element zone, full scheme design provides continuous
measurement of impedance separately in three independent phase-to-phase measuring loops as
well as in three independent phase-to-ground measuring loops.

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 33

Chapter 3 Protection Description

Phase-to-phase distance element is suitable as a basic protection function against two- and
three-phase faults in all kinds of networks, regardless of the treatment of the neutral point.
Independent setting for each zone separately makes it possible to create fast and selective
protection in power systems.

Phase-to-ground distance element serves as basic earth fault protection in networks with solidly or
low impedance grounded networks. Independent setting for each zone separately makes it
possible to create fast and selective protection in power systems.

Polarized positive sequence voltage is used for distance protection so that faults with high
resistance can also be cleared easily. In case of short lines, in order to enhance performance
against high fault resistance, the impedance characteristic of the zone 1 and zone 2 could be
inclined toward quadrant 1.

Zero-sequence reactance character is used for phase-to-ground distance element so that

overreach due to resistance earth fault could be avoided.

If the positive sequence polarized voltage is high enough, directionality of the distance protection
using positive sequence polarized voltage is very good. However, when close-in three phase fault
happens, the positive sequence voltage may reduce to 10% or less, the distance protection will go
to low voltage program (please refer to section 3.7.1) in which memorized positive sequence
polarized voltage is used instead.

Threshold will be set forward for zones 1 and 2 of distance element before its operation, so that
directionality could be assured during busbar three phase fault. In addition, this threshold will be
changed to reverse direction after operation of the protection, so that forward close-in three phase
fault can be fully cleared. As to the zone 3 of the distance element, direction of the threshold is
always reverse, because it acts as a backup protection for busbar.

Note!

When VT circuit failure happens, the alarm [Alm_VTS] displayed, all distance protection
will be disabled.

3.7.1 Distance element with memorized polarization

3.7.1.1 General description

Distance element with memorized polarization is an algorithm used when positive sequence
voltage reduces to 10% or less. There are only two possibilities for this condition: power swing or
three phase short circuit fault.

As the power swing will be identified by power swing blocking function, only three phase short
circuit should be considered and discussed herein.

Because three phase-to-ground impedance and three phase-to-phase impedance are equal in
case of three phase short circuit fault, so only phase-to-ground impedance should be measured.

Impedances of all three phase are usually equal. Nevertheless, in order to ensure fast tripping
even in the case of transition from bus fault to three phase line fault, all of three phase impedances

34 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 3 Protection Description

are calculated and operation of any phase element will lead to three phase tripping.

3.7.1.2 Operation characteristic

Distance element with memorized polarization compares phasor angle of operating voltage and
polarized voltage.

If a forward fault occurs:

The transient operation characteristic is shown inFigure 3.7-1. Operation characteristic of ZK on

R-X plane is a circle with line connecting ends of ZZD and -ZS as the diameter. The origin is
enclosed in the circle.

Figure 3.7-1 Operation characteristic for forward fault

ZZD: the setting of distance protection

ZS: total impedance between local system and protective device location

ZK: measurement impedance

This does not mean it will operate incorrectly during reverse direction fault but means it will
operate correctly during forward fault even if the fault occurs just on the outlet because that is
derived supposing forward direction fault.

If a reverse fault occurs:

Figure 3.7-2 shows operation characteristic of measured impedance -ZK on R-X plane. This
characteristic is a circle with line connecting ends of ZZD and Z'S as the diameter. It will operate
only when -ZK is in the circle. Therefore directionality of the protection is explicit.

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 35

Chapter 3 Protection Description

Figure 3.7-2 Operation characteristic during reverse fault

Z'S：total impedance between remote system and protective device location

The conditions mentioned above are before fading of memorized voltage, in another word, they
are transient characteristic.

jX

ZZD

ZK

Figure 3.7-3 Steady state characteristic of three phase short circuit fault

When the memorized voltage fade, Figure 3.7-3 shows operation characteristic of measured
impedance ZK on R-X plane for forward direction fault as well as that of -ZK for reverse direction
fault. Since the circle covers the origin, the equipment will be just on the margin of operation for
fault on the bus or line outlet. In order to prevent the mal-operation for bus fault, especially the
three phase bus fault with arc resistance, zone1 and 2 of distance element is equipped with a
positive threshold. Voltage value of the threshold is equal to maximum voltage drop of the arc.
Moreover, when zone 1 or 2 of distance element operates, phase of the threshold voltage will be
inverted so that the origin can be enclosed in the characteristic circle to ensure the fault can be
fully cleared. In order to ensure backup protection of zone 3, phase of threshold voltage is always
inverted and the origin is always enclosed in the characteristic circle.

36 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 3 Protection Description

3.7.2 Phase-to-ground distance element

3.7.2.1 Zone 1 and zone 2 of Mho phase-to-ground distance element

This element use polarized positive sequence voltage which can improve the performance against
the fault resistance so that it can not overreach when earth fault associated with high fault
resistance occurs.

jX

1=0 ° ZZD 1=15 ° 1=30 °

A
R

-ZS

Figure 3.7-4 Characteristic of the relay for forward fault

In short line case, in order to improve the relay performance against high fault resistance, phase
shift θ1 is used for polarized voltage. This phase shift could move the directional impedance
characteristic toward quadrant 1 as is shown in Figure 3.7-4. Value of θ1 can be set to 0°, 15° or
30°.

This relay could measure high fault resistance and keep a very satisfied performance under high
fault resistance condition. However, if there is a considerable power source in remote end, an
overreach caused by infeed from remote end during resistance earth fault may occur. In order to
prevent overreach, the following zero-sequence reactance relay is introduced.

3.7.2.2 Zero-sequence reactance element

Typical zero-sequence reactance characteristic is shown as the straight line A in Figure 3.7-4.
Therefore, directional impedance characteristic integrating with the zero-sequence characteristic
are adaptive with the fault resistance.

Actually, zero-sequence reactance characteristic line will incline downward for 12°. Therefore, in
an actual system, even if zero-sequence impedance angles of both ends of a line are not the same
and the phase difference exists between 3I0Cal and voltage drop on fault resistance, overreach
condition will not happen. If the directional distance element with phase shift θ1 and
zero-sequence reactance element operate simultaneously, zones 1 and 2 of distance element with
good directionality will operate.

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 37

Chapter 3 Protection Description

3.7.2.3 Zone 3 of Mho phase-to-ground distance element

The no-memorized positive sequence voltage is used as polarized voltage because during earth
fault, positive sequence voltage is mainly formed by healthy phase and the phase of positive
sequence voltage is kept as it was before the fault. Therefore, characteristic of zone 3 of
phase–to-earth distance element is the same as the transient characteristic of distance element
with memorized polarization and have a very good directionality.

3.7.2.4 Quadrilateral phase-to-ground distance element

The sensitivity of phase-to-ground distance element with Mho characteristic may be not enough
during ground fault with extreme high resistance. So additional three-zone phase-to-ground
distance element with quadrilateral characteristic is adopted in the equipment to compensate the
sensitivity of Mho characteristic. The logic relationship between quadrilateral distance element and
Mho distance element is OR. It means that any ground fault in one of the two operation zones will
be cleared. The quadrilateral phase-to-ground distance element can significantly improve the
sensitivity to clear ground fault with extreme high resistance. The three zones of quadrilateral
characteristic can be enabled or disabled by the logic setting [En_ZPG1_Quad], [En_ZPG2_Quad]
and [En_ZPG3_Quad] respectively.The operation characteristic of quadrilateral distance element
is shown in Figure 3.7-5:

Φ Φ

Figure 3.7-5 Operation Characteristic of quadrilateral distance element

Where:

Φ is the phase angle of positive sequence line impedance

[R1_Quad], [R2_Quad] or [R3_Quad] is the resistance setting of corresponding zone of
quadrilateral distance protection

[Z_PG1], [Z_PG2] or [Z_PG3] are the impedance setting of corresponding zone of Mho distance
protection.

The quadrilateral characteric is a supplement to Mho characteric for phase-to-ground distance

38 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 3 Protection Description

protection. It is used to improve sensitivity for ground fault with high resistance. However, if the
voltage is extreme low, the directionality of quadrilateral characteristic is not clear. But Mho
characteric of phase-to-ground distance element using polarized positive sequence voltage has
definite directionality. Therefore, In case that phase voltage is lower than 10% of rated voltage, the
quadrilateral characteric will be disabled automatically and the Mho characteric is reserved.

3.7.3 Phase-to-phase distance element

3.7.3.1 Zone 1 and zone 2 of Phase-to-phase distance element

Zone 1,2 of phase-to-phase distance element use polarized positive sequence voltage. Phase
shift θ2 is introduced here for polarized voltage in zones 1 and 2 just like θ1 in case of
phase-to-ground distance element. It is used also for improving performance against high fault
resistance in short line case. Value of θ2 can be set as 0° or 15°or 30°.

3.7.3.2 Zone 3 of phase-to-phase distance element

No-memorized positive sequence voltage is used as polarized voltage. Operation characteristic of

faulty phase is shown as Figure 3.7-1 and Figure 3.7-2. This element has a very good
directionality.

If three-phase short circuit fault occurs, since the polarized voltage has not been memorized, its
operation characteristic is a circle passing through the origin (Please refer to Figure 3.7-3). If the
positive sequence voltage is low, the fault will be measured by impedance element with
memorized polarization. There is neither problem about dead zone nor loss of directionality for bus
fault in this case.

3.7.4 Reverse Distance Element

When a fault occurs in the backside of the busbar, reverse distance element is provided to clear it
with defined time delay and is taken as backup protection for reversal busbar fault. Its operation
characteristic is shown in Figure 3.7-6.

Figure 3.7-6 Operation characteristic of reverse distance element

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 39

Chapter 3 Protection Description

Z ZD is impedance setting [Z_Rev] of reverse distance element, usually, which is set to 50% of the
protected line. In order to prevent existing dead zone in the protected zone, origin is included in
1
the operation characteristic which is shifted Z ZD toward forward direction.
2
3.7.5 Blinder Scheme
The blinder characteristic shown in Figure 3.7-7 can be used to restrict the reach of a distance
relay on a long line or during heavy load conditions. The distance relay will be allowed to trip only
when both blinders are operated (i.e., the apparent impedance must be between the two
characteristics).

jX

B ZZD A

Φ
R

RZD RZD

Figure 3.7-7 The operation characteristic of blinder

In order to ensure distance relay not affected by load impendence, the phase-to-phase and
phase-to-ground blinders are used. As shown in Figure 3.7-7, the slope of blinder is same to
positive sequence sensitivity angle Φ, RZD is the setting [R_Blinder]. The operation region is
between line A and line B. The logic setting [En_Blinder] can decide whether the blinder is enabled
or not.

3.7.6 Power Swing Blocking Releasing (PSBR)

When power swing occurs on the power system, the impedance measured by the distance
measuring element may vary from the load impedance area into the operating zone of the
distance element. The operation of the distance measuring element due to the power swing
occurs in many points of interconnected power systems. To keep the stability of whole power
system, tripping due to operation of the distance measuring element during a power swing is
generally not allowed. PCS-902 adopts releasing power swing blocking to avoid maloperation of
distance protection resulting from power swing. In another word, distance protection is blocked all
along under the normal conditions and power swing. Only if fault (internal fault or power swing with
internal fault) is detected, power swing blocking for distance protection is released by PSBR
element.

40 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 3 Protection Description

Power swing blocking for distance element will be released if any of the following PSBR elements
operate.

„ Fault detector PSBR element (FD PSBR)

„ Unsymmetrical fault PSBR element (UF PSBR)

„ Symmetrical fault PSBR element (SF PSBR)

„ Pole disagreement PSBR element (PD PSBR)

1. Fault Detector PSBR Element

If any of the following condition is matched, FD PSBR will operate for 160ms.

1) Positive sequence current is lower than the setting [I_OC_PSBR] before general fault detector
element operates.

2) Positive sequence current is higher than the setting [I_OC_PSBR] before general fault
detector element operates, but the duration is less than 10ms.

2. Unsymmetrical Fault PSBR Element

The operation criterion:

I0+I2>m×I1

The “m” is an internal fixed coefficient which can ensure UF PSBR operate during power swing
with internal unsymmetrical fault, while not operate during power swing or power swing with
external fault.

3. Symmetrical Fault PSBR Element

If a three-phase fault occurs and FD PSBR is invalid (160ms after GFD operates), neither FD
PSBR nor UF PSBR will be able to operate to release the distance protection. Thus, SF PSBR is
provided for this case specially. This detection is based on measuring the voltage at power swing
center:

UOS=U1×COSΦ

Where:

Φ: the angle between positive sequence voltage and current

U1: the positive sequence voltage

The criterion of SF PSBR element comprises the following two parts:

„ when -0.03UN<UOS<0.08UN, the SF PSBR element will operate after 150ms.

„ when -0.1UN<UOS<0.25UN, the SF PSBR element will operate after 500ms.

4. Pole Disagreement PSBR Element

When three-phase circuit breaker is in the unsymmetrical state, PD PSBR will operate if any of the

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 41

Chapter 3 Protection Description

following conditions is met.

1) The faulty phase selected by fault phase selection element is not the phase tripped.

2) The difference of current deviation of power frequency component between two healthy
phases increases to certain value all of a sudden.

3.7.7 Scheme Logic

Figure 3.7-8 Logic diagram of PSBR for zone x of distance element

In the above diagram, x can be 1, 2 or 3. If the logic setting [En_PSBR_Zx] is set as “0”, zone x of
distance element is not blocked by PSBR and PSBR for zone x of distance element will operate
right now (i.e. output value of [PSBR_Zx] in the above diagram is “1”).

If the logic setting [En_PSBR_Zx] is set as “1”, zone x of distance element is controlled by PSBR
element. Only if zone x of distance element operates and PSBR condition for zone x is also met,
PSBR for zone x of distance element will operate (i.e. output value of [PSBR_Zx] in the above
diagram is “1”).

The logic diagram of PSBR for directional distance element of pilot protection is similar as the logic
diagram of PSBR for zone x of distance element, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 3.7-9 Logic diagram of PSBR for directional distance element of pilot protection

42 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 3 Protection Description

Zone 1 of PG distance element (Quadrilateral)

&
[En_ZPG1_Quad] ≥1
≥1
Zone 1 of PG distance element (Mho)
& [Op_Z1]
&
[En_ZPG1]

Zone 1 of PP distance element (Mho)

&
[En_ZPP1]

[PSBR_Z1]

[PSBR_Z2]

Zone 2 of PG distance element (Quadrilateral)

&
[En_ZPG2_Quad] ≥1 [t_PG2] & [Op_Z2]
≥1
Zone 2 of PG distance element (Mho)
&
[En_ZPG2]

Zone 2 of PP distance element (Mho)

& [t_PP2]
[En_ZPP2]

[PSBR_Z3]

Zone 3 of PG distance element (Quadrilateral)

&
[En_ZPG3_Quad] ≥1 [t_PG3] & [Op_Z3]
≥1
Zone 3 of PG distance element (Mho)
&
[En_ZPG3]

Zone 3 of PP distance element (Mho)

& [t_PP3]
[En_ZPP3]

Reversal PP distance element

&
[En_ZPP_Rev] ≥1 [t_Rev] [Op_Z_Rev]

Reversal PG distance element

&
[En_ZPG_Rev]

Figure 3.7-10 Logic diagram of distance protection

Please refer to Chapter 8 about the description of corresponding settings.

3.8 Switch Onto Fault Protection

When the circuit breaker is closed manually or automatically, it is possible to switch on to an

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 43

Chapter 3 Protection Description

existing fault. This is especially critical if the line in the remote station is grounded, since the
distance protection and directional zero-sequence overcurrent protection would not clear the fault
until their time delays had elapsed. In this situation, however, the fastest possible clearance is
desired.

The SOTF (switch onto fault) protection is a complementary function to the distance protection and
to the directional zero-sequence overcurrent protection. With the SOTF protection, a fast trip is
achieved for a fault on the whole line, when the line is being energized. It shall be responsive to all
types of faults anywhere within the protected line.

The SOTF protection shall be controlled by an reclosing logic using both voltage and current level
detectors. It shall be enabled for a period when the circuit is energized either manually or via a
auto-reclosing system.

3.8.1 Zero-sequence SOTF Protection

3I0>[I_ROC_FD]
&
3I0Cal>[I_ROC_FD]

Status of 3-pole AR
≥1
& 100ms 0
Status of manually closing

& ≥1 Op_ROC_SOTF
3I0Cal > [I_ROC_SOTF]
& 60ms 0
Status of 1-pole AR

Figure 3.8-1 Logic diagram of zero-sequence SOTF protection

Please refer to Chapter 8 about the description of corresponding settings.

Zero-sequence SOTF protection will operate to trip three-phase circuit breaker with a time delay of
60ms when 1-pole auto-reclosing.

Zero-sequence SOTF protection will operate to trip three-phase circuit breaker with a time delay of
100ms if 3I0Cal is greater than setting [I_ROC_SOTF] when 3-pole auto-reclosing or manually
closing.

44 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 3 Protection Description

3.8.2 Distance SOTF Protection

Figure 3.8-2 Logic diagram of distance SOTF protection

Please refer to Chapter 8 about the description of corresponding settings.

Zone 3 of distance element for SOTF will operate to trip three-phase circuit breaker when
manually closing.

Zone 2 and 3 of distance element for SOTF without PSBR logic will operate to trip three-phase
circuit breaker if the logic setting [En_Z2SOTF_AR3P] and [En_Z3SOTF_AR3P] are set as “1”
when 3-pole auto-reclosing.

Zone 2 of distance element for SOTF with PSBR logic will operate to trip three-phase circuit
breaker when 1-pole or 3-pole auto-reclosing if the logic setting [En_Z2SOTF_AR3P] is set as “0”.

3.9 Voltage Protection

Voltage protection has the function of protecting protective device against undervoltage and
overvoltage. Both operational states are unfavourable as overvoltage may cause, for example,
insulation problems or undervoltage may cause stability problems. Each voltage protection
function has two-stages, i.e. it is provided with two threshold settings, each one with its respective
time delay. These voltage protection functions can be switched on or off separately. Definite-time
characteristic and several kinds of inverse-time characteristics are provided to choose from.

3.9.1 Overvoltage Protection

Abnormal high voltages often occur e.g. in low loaded, long distance transmission lines, in
islanded systems when generator voltage regulation fails, or after full load shutdown of a
generator with the generator disconnected from the system. Even if compensation reactors are

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 45

Chapter 3 Protection Description

provided to avoid line overvoltage by compensation of the line capacitance and thus reduction of
the overvoltage, the overvoltage will endanger the insulation if the reactors fail (e.g. due to fault
clearance). The line must be de-energised within a very short time.

The overvoltage protection in this device detects the phase voltages UA, UB and UC or the
phase-to-phase voltages UAB, UBC and UCA. The overvoltage protection can be used for trip
purpose. Besides, the overvoltage protection can also be used to initiate transfer trip, which can
be controlled by local circuit breaker selectively.
[En_OV1]
&
[En_Vpp_OV]

UA>[V_OV1] & &

>=1
[t_OV1] &

&

UAB>[V_OV1] >=1
[Op_OV1]
&

UB>[V_OV1] &
>=1
[t_OV1]

&

UBC>[V_OV1]

&

UC>[V_OV1] &
>=1
[t_OV1] >=1
&
&

UCA>[V_OV1]
&

[Opt_1P/3P_OV]

[BI_52b_Pha] >=1
& [BO_OV_Init_TT]
[BI_52b_Phb]

[BI_52b_Phc]

&
[En_52b_Ctrl_TT]

[En_OV1_Init_TT]

Figure 3.9-1 Logic diagram of stage 1 of overvoltage protection

46 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 3 Protection Description

Figure 3.9-2 Logic diagram of stage 2 of overvoltage protection

Please refer to Chapter 8 about the description of corresponding settings.

Where:

UA, UB, UC: Three phase voltage

UAB, UBC, UCA: Three phase-to-phase voltage

[Op_OV1]: Stage 1 of overvoltage protection operates to trip

[Op_OV2]: Stage 2 of overvoltage protection operates to trip

[BO_OV_Init_TT]: Overvoltage protection operates to initiate transfer trip

Inverse-time characteristics (IDMT) defined in IEC60255-3 can be adopted, the formula is shown
as follows.

β
t (U ) = Tp
U (Equation 3.9-1)
( )τ − 1
Up

Where :

U p is the basic voltage (also called voltage limit), i.e. the setting [V_OVn] (n=1 or 2).

T p is the basic time.

β is a certain constant.

τ is the exponent.
U is the actual value of measured voltage.

For stage 1 and stage 2 of overvoltage protection, definite-time characteristic and five kinds of
inverse-time characteristics can be choose from by setting the logic setting
[Opt_Characteristic_OVn] (n=1 or 2). The parameters of each characteristics are listed in the
following table.

Table 3.9-1 Parameters of each characteristics

[Opt_Characteristic_OVn] τ β

0: Definite-time characteristic 0 0
1: inverse-time characteristic 1 1
2: Standard inverse-time characteristic 0.02 0.14

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 47

Chapter 3 Protection Description

3: Very inverse-time characteristic 1 13.5

4: Extremely inverse-time characteristic 2 80
5: Long time inverse-time characteristic 1 120

3.9.2 Undervoltage Protection

The undervoltage protection can be applied to trip when fault occurs in a system.

The undervoltage protection can also use the phase voltages UA, UB and UC or the
phase-to-phase voltages UAB, UBC and UCA. Only stage 1 of undervoltage protection can be used
for alarm purpose or trip purpose. Stage 2 of undervoltage protection can be used for trip purpose
only. The undervoltage protection is used to separation instead of load shedding.

When GFD element reflecting current operates, including DPFC overcurrent element and
zero-sequence overcurrent element, the undervoltage protection will pick up.

When any of the following conditions is fulfilled, the undervoltage protection will be blocked.

1. VT circuit fails, if the voltage comes from busbar VT, the voltage will restore to the normal level
immediately after the fault being cleared away. If the voltage comes from line VT, the voltage
will decrease to zero immediately after the fault being cleared away. For the latter case, in
order to prevent undervoltage protection from not dropping off, auxiliary current criterion is
provided to resolve it. (Input 1)

2. Any phase is out of service, i.e. UP<0.01UNN and IP<0.06IN. (Input 2)

3. Binary input of blocking undervoltage is energized, such as normally closed contact of line
disconnector. (Input 3)

4. Any phase of circuit breaker is open (binary input of normal close contact of breaker is
energized) and the corresponding phase current is smaller than 0.06IN. (Input 4)

Figure 3.9-3 Logic diagram of blocking undervoltage protection

48 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 3 Protection Description

[En_UV1]

Block UV
&
[En_Vpp_UV]

UA<[V_UV1] & &

>=1
[t_UV1] &

&

UAB<[V_UV1] >=1
&
[Alm_UV1]
&

UB<[V_UV1] &
>=1
[t_UV1]

&

UBC<[V_UV1]

&

UC<[V_UV1] &
>=1
[t_UV1] >=1
&
&

UCA<[V_UV1]

[Opt_1P/3P_UV]
&
[Op_UV1]
[En_Alm_UV1]

Figure 3.9-4 Logic diagram of stage 1 of undervoltage protection

Figure 3.9-5 Logic diagram of stage 2 of undervoltage protection

Please refer to Chapter 8 about the description of corresponding settings.

Where:

[Op_UV1]: Stage 1 of undervoltage protection operates to trip

[Op_UV2]: Stage 2 of undervoltage protection operates to trip

[Alm_UV1]: Stage 1 of undervoltage protection operates to issue alarm signal

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 49

Chapter 3 Protection Description

Block UV: Blocking undervoltage protection

Inverse-time characteristics (IDMT) defined in IEC60255-3 are adopted, the formula is shown as
follows.

β
t (U ) = Tp
U (Equation 3.9-2)
1 − ( )τ
Up

Where :

U p is the basic voltage (also called voltage limit), i.e. the setting [V_UVn] (n=1 or 2).

T p is the basic time.

β is a certain constant.

τ is the exponent.
U is the actual value of measured voltage.

For stage 1 and stage 2 of undervoltage protection, definite-time characteristic and five kinds of
inverse-time characteristics can be choose from by setting the logic setting
[Opt_Characteristic_UVn] (n=1 or 2). The parameters of each characteristics are listed in the
following table.

Table 3.9-2 Parameters of each characteristics

[Opt_Characteristic_UVn] τ β

0: Definite-time characteristic 0 0
1: inverse-time characteristic 1 1
2: Standard inverse-time characteristic 0.02 0.14
3: Very inverse-time characteristic 1 13.5
4: Extremely inverse-time characteristic 2 80
5: Long time inverse-time characteristic 1 120

3.10 Stub Overcurrent Protection

The stub overcurrent protection is mainly designed for stub in one and a half busbar arrangement.

50 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 3 Protection Description

Figure 3.10-1 3/2 breakers arrangement

Stub overcurrent protection only including one stage can be enabled or disabled by the logic
setting [En_OC_Stub] and normally closed auxiliary contact of line disconnector [BI_DS_Line].
Based on calculating input current, which is summation current of CT1 and CT2, the logic scheme
of stub overcurrent protection is shown as Figure 3.10-2.

Figure 3.10-2 Logic diagram of stub overcurrent protection

Where:

IA, IB, IC: Three phase current

[BI_DS_Line]: Binary input for normally closed auxiliary contact of disconnector

[En_OC_Stub]: Logic setting of enabling stub overcurrent protection

[I_OC_Stub]: Current setting of stub overcurrent protection

[Op_OC_Stub]: Stub overcurrent protection operating

3.11 Breaker Failure Protection

3.11.1 Application
In general, the duplicated protection configurations are used for EHV power system, but the
primary device, circuit breaker, is not duplicated, in order to prevent a tripping failure of the circuit
breaker, it is necessary to configure breaker failure protection for the circuit breaker. Two breaker
failure protection module can be equipped in one protective device.

Breaker failure protection issues a back-up trip command to trip adjacent circuit breakers in case
of a tripping failure of the circuit breaker, and clears the fault as requested by the object protection.

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 51

Chapter 3 Protection Description

To utilize the protection information of faulty equipment and the electrical information of failure
circuit breaker to constitute the criterion of breaker failure protection, it can ensure that the
adjacent circuit breakers of failure circuit breaker are tripped with a shorter time delay, so that the
blackout range is minimum, and ensure stable operation of the entire power grid to prevent
generators, transformers and other components from seriously damaged and the power grid from
collapse.

3.11.2 Function Description

The instantaneous re-tripping function, after receiving tripping signal from other protection device
and the corresponding phase overcurrent element operating, are available and provides
phase-segregated binary output contact, which can ensure the circuit breaker be still tripped even
if the secondary circuit between the protection device and the circuit breaker is abnormal, to avoid
undesired trip of breaker failure protection and the expansion of the accident scope. Instantaneous
re-tripping function does not block AR.

When both the phase-segregated tripping contact from line protection and the corresponding
phase overcurrent element operate, or both the three-phase tripping contact and any phase
overcurrent element operate, breaker failure protection will send three-phase tripping command to
trip local circuit breaker with the time delay of [t_BFP1] and trip all adjacent circuit breakers with
the time delay of [t_BFP2].

Taking into account that the faulty current is too small for generator or transformer fault, the
sensitivity of phase current element may not meet the requirements, so zero-sequence current
criterion and negative-sequence current criterion are provided for breaker failure protection
initiated by generator and transformer protection. They can be enabled or disabled by logic
settings [En_ROC_3P_BFP] and [En_NegOC_3P_BFP] respectively.

For some special fault (for example, mechanical protection or overvoltage protection operating),
maybe faulty current is very small and current criterion of breaker failure protection is not met, in
order to make breaker failure protection can also operate under the above situation, the binary
input [BI_BF_Start_WOI] is equipped, once the binary input is energized, breaker failure protection
can be chose to be initiated by normally closed contact of circuit breaker.

52 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 3 Protection Description

3.11.3 Logic Scheme

Figure 3.11-1 Breaker failure protection

[BI_ExTrpA]: The binary input of phase-A tripping contact from external protection

[BI_ExTrpB]: The binary input of phase-B tripping contact from external protection

[BI_ExTrpC]: The binary input of phase-C tripping contact from external protection

[BI_ExTrp3P_L]: The binary input of three-phase tripping contact from line protection

[BI_ExTrp3P_GT]: The binary input of three-phase tripping contact from generator or transformer
protection

[Op_ReTrpA]: Breaker failure protection operates to re-trip phase-A circuit breaker

[Op_ReTrpB]: Breaker failure protection operates to re-trip phase-B circuit breaker

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 53

Chapter 3 Protection Description

[Op_ReTrpC]: Breaker failure protection operates to re-trip phase-C circuit breaker

[Op_ReTrp3P]: Breaker failure protection operates to re-trip three-phase circuit breaker

[Op_BFP1]: Stage 1 of breaker failure protection operates

[Op_BFP2]: Stage 2 of breaker failure protection operates

[BI_BF_Start_WOI]: Once the binary input is energized, breaker failure protection can be chose to
be initiated by normally closed contact of circuit breaker.

An alarm signal [Alm_BI_ExTrp] will be issued if any of the binary inputs of single-phase or
three-phase tripping contact from external protection is energized and the duration is longer than
10s.

When the protection element operates and the tripping signal issued, the breaker failure protection
will also be initiated.

3.12 Fault Phase Selection

Fault phase selection logic can be implemented by the following methods:

1. Detecting the deviation of operation voltage

2. Detecting the phase difference between I0 and I2A

The logic makes the relay ideal for single-phase tripping applications.

3.12.1 Deviation of operation voltage fault phase selection element

ΔUOPA, ΔUOPB and ΔUOPC: deviation of phase operation voltages.

ΔUOPAB, ΔUOPBC and ΔUOPCA: deviation of phase-to-phase operation voltages.

ΔUOΦMAX=MAX(ΔUOPA, ΔUOPB, ΔUOPC).

ΔUOΦΦMAX=MAX(ΔUOPAB, ΔUOPBC, ΔUOPCA).

If ΔUOΦMAX is several times higher than the other two deviation of phase operation voltages, the
single-phase fault is ensured, otherwise, the multiplex-phase fault is ensured.

Table 3.12-1 The relation between ΔUOΦMAX and fault phase

ΔUOΦMAX or ΔUOΦΦMAX Fault phase

ΔUOPA Phase A
ΔUOPB Phase B
ΔUOPC Phase C
ΔUOPAB Phase AB
ΔUOPBC Phase BC
ΔUOPCA Phase CA

54 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 3 Protection Description

3.12.2 I0 and I2A fault phase selection element

The phase selection algorithm uses the angle relation between I0 and I2A of the relay currents. As
shown in Figure 3.12-1, three regions of fault phase selection are ensured.

Figure 3.12-1 The region of fault phase selection

Depended on the phase relation between I0 and I2A,

When -60º<Arg(I0/I2A)<60º, region A is selected, 60º<Arg(I0/I2A)<180º, region B is selected,

180º<Arg(I0/I2A)<300º, region C is selected.

Table 3.12-2 The relation between Arg(I0/I2A)and fault phase

Arg(I0/I2A) Region Fault phase

-60º~60º A A phase or BC phase
60º~180º B B phase or CA phase
180º~300º C C phase or AB phase

1) For single-phase earth fault, I0 and I2 of faulty phase are in-phase and its distance element
operates.

2) For two-phase earth fault, I0 and I2 of non-faulty phase are in-phase but its distance element
does not operate.

3.13 Pole Disagreement

Circuit breaker pole position disagreement can occur on the operation of a breaker with
independent operating gears for the three poles. The reason may be an interruption in the trip coil
circuits, or a mechanical failure resulting in a stuck breaker pole. A pole disagreement can be
tolerated for a limited time.

Pole disagreement procedure comprises of the protection of pole disagreement state and switch
onto fault protection. When the following conditions are met, pole disagreement state is ensured
delay 50ms.

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 55

Chapter 3 Protection Description

1) Trip confirmation

Trip confirmation means that tripping signal is issued and any phase current is smaller than 0.06IN

2) 52b is energized and phase current is smaller than 0.06IN

3.13.1 Single-phase tripping

When there is single-phase trip confirmation, or 52b of any phase is energized and corresponding
phase current is smaller than 0.06IN, pole disagreement state is confirmed by protective device.
After that, the following things will be done.

1) Measuring impedance deviation of power frequency component of non-fault phase and

non-fault phase-to-phase

2) Calculating positive sequence voltage of non-fault phase as polarized voltage of distance

protection

3) Measuring current deviation of power frequency component of non-fault phase as condition of

PSBR under pole disagreement conditions

4) When tripped phase current is greater than 0.06IN or 52b of tripped phase is de-energized,
SOTF protection is initiated for 200ms

3.13.2 Three-phase tripping

When there is three-phase trip confirmation, or three-phase 52b are energized and three-phase
currents are smaller than 0.06IN, pole disagreement state is confirmed by protective device. After
that, the following thing will be done.

1) When three-phase currents are greater than 0.06IN or three-phase 52b are de-energized,
SOTF protection is initiated for 200ms

When pole disagreement state is ensured, corresponding tripped phase-to-ground and

phase-to-phase DPFC distance protection will be disabled. Stage 1, 2 and 3 of directional
zero-sequence overcurrent protection are disabled and stage 4 of directional zero-sequence
overcurrent protection is not controlled by directional element.

When the primary system is in the single-phasing, three-phase trip signal will be sent with a time
delay of 200ms if the following conditions are met.

1. There are 52b of two phases are energized

2. The corresponding phases current are smaller than 0.06IN

3. The zero-sequence current is smaller than 0.15IN

3.14 Inverse-time Thermal Overload Protection

3.14.1 Application
Load currents that exceed the permissible continuous value may cause damage to the conductors
and isolation due to overheating. The permissible load current will vary with the ambient

56 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 3 Protection Description

temperature.

The inverse-time thermal overload function supervises the phase currents and provides a reliable
protection against damage caused by excessive currents. When the conductor heat exceeds the
permissible value, based on a thermal model calculated from phase currents, the inverse-time
thermal overload protection can provide alarm signal to prompt operator or trip to directly isolate
the overload line.

3.14.2 Function Description

The inverse-time thermal overload protection is coordinated with IEC60255-8 IDMT characteristic,
as shown below.

I
KIB

Figure 3.14-1 The inverse-time characteristic of thermal overload

IEC60255-8 “cold” curve (Thermal overload protection without preload):

For thermal overload protection without consideration of previous load current, the following
tripping characteristic is applied. For different thermal time constants τ , the operating time T is
calculated in accordance with the following equation:

I2
T = τ ⋅ ln (Equation 3.14-1)
I 2 − (k ⋅ I B ) 2

IEC60255-8 “hot” curve (Thermal overload protection with preload):

The thermal overload protection with consideration of previous load current constantly updates the
uppper thermal model calculation. The operating time T is calculated in accordance with the
following equation (complete memory in accordance with IEC 60255-8).

I 2 − I p2
T = τ ⋅ ln (Equation 3.14-2)
I 2 − (k ⋅ I B ) 2

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 57

Chapter 3 Protection Description

where:

T: operating time

τ : time constant of the line, corresponding with setting [t_Disspt_OvLd]

IB: basic current, corresponding with setting [Ib_OvLd]

k: constant, overload coefficient, k2: threshold multiple of thermal capacity, corresponding with
setting [ThM_OvLd1] or [ThM_OvLd2]

I: current measured by the relay

IP: specified load current before the overload occurs

ln: natural logarithm

The protection device is equipped with IEC60255-8 “hot” curve to make up thermal overload
protection, and it calculates real-time temperature rise curve without interruption, continuously
beginning with Ip is equal to zero from the beginning. When thermal capacity of temperature rise is
greater than setting [ThM_OvLd1] (shown as percentage), protectiondevice operates to issue
alarm signal if the logic setting [En_OvLd1_Alm] is set as “1”. When heat quantity of temperature
rise is larger than setting [ThM_OvLd2] (shown as percentage), protection device will operate to
trip if the logic setting [En_OvLd2_Trp] is set as “1” or issue alarm signal if the logic setting
[En_OvLd2_Alm] is set as “1”.

3.14.3 Logic Scheme

Figure 3.14-2 Logic scheme of inverse-time thermal overload protection

TRise :Temperature rise

3.15 Synchrocheck Function

3.15.1 Application
The purpose of synchrocheck is to provide controlled closing of circuit breaker when two
asynchronous systems are going to be connected.

When two asynchronous systems are connected together, due to phase difference between
systems at both sides, larger impact will be led to the system during closing. In addition, the

58 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 3 Protection Description

auto-reclosing and manual closing are applied with the synchrocheck to avoid this situation and
improve the system stability. The synchrocheck includes synchronism check and dead check.

3.15.2 Function Description

The synchronism check function measures the conditions across the circuit breaker and compares
them with the corresponding settings. The output is only given if all measured quantities are
simultaneously within their set limits.

The dead check function measures the amplitude of line voltage and bus voltage at both sides of
the circuit breaker; then compare them with the live check setting [V_Live] and the dead check
setting [V_Dead]; The output is only given when the actual measured quantities match the set
conditions.

Synchrocheck in this device can be used for auto-reclosing and manual closing for both
single-breaker and dual-breaker.

Voltage selection function

When used for the synchrocheck of single-breaker, comparative relationship between reference
voltage (UL) and synchronous voltage (UB) is as follows.

Figure 3.15-1 Comparative relationship between reference voltage and synchronous voltage

When not applying voltage selection function and for single-breaker, the MCB of voltage and
voltage connecting method are shown in the following figure.

(a) Bus voltage used for three-phase voltage of protection

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 59

Chapter 3 Protection Description

(b) Line voltage used for three-phase voltage of protection

Figure 3.15-2 Wiring diagram of voltage connecting method without voltage selection for
single-breaker

In the figure, [En_LineVT] is system setting, indicating the voltage Ua, Ub, Uc used by protection is
from line VT or bus VT of the circuit breaker, it should be set according to the actual situation.

When applying voltage selection function, it involves voltage selection of bus breaker and tie
breaker for double bus and one and a half breakers arrangements. Selecting approach is as
follows.

1） Double busbars arrangement

}
}

Figure 3.15-3 Wiring schematics of single-breaker for double busbars connection

For the disconnector positions, the normally open (NO) and normally closed (NC) contacts of the
disconnector for bus 1 and bus 2 are supplied to determine the disconnector open and closed
positions. The logic is as follows.

60 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 3 Protection Description

BI UB1D_Clsd &
UB1_SEL
BI UB1D_Open
Voltage
selection UB2_SEL
logic
BI UB2D_Clsd &

BI UB2D_Open

&
InvalidSEL

UB1 UB

UB2

Figure 3.15-4 Voltage selection for a single-breaker with double busbars

After acquiring the disconnector open and closed positions of double busbars, use the following
logic to acquire the branch voltage of double busbars.

Disconnector that connect the Disconnector that connect the

line with bus 2 is closed line with bus 2 is open

Disconnector that connect Keep the original value Obtain from Bus 1 VT
the line with bus 1 is closed (UB1_Sel=1)

Disconnector that connect Obtain from Bus 2 VT Keep the original value
the line with bus 1 is open (UB2_Sel=1)

If voltage selection is invalid (Invalid_Sel＝1), keep the original selection and without switchover.

2） One and a half breakers arrangement (take line 1 as an example)

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 61

Chapter 3 Protection Description

Figure 3.15-5 One and a half breakers arrangement schematics

For bus breaker (take bus breaker of bus 1 as an example), the device acquires the disconnector
open and closed positions of two outgoing feeders and bus 2. The logic is as follows.

Figure 3.15-6 Logic diagram of the voltage selection function for the bus breaker in one and a half

62 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 3 Protection Description

breakers arrangement

For the tie breaker, the device acquires the disconnector open and closed positions of two
outgoing feeders and two busbars. The logic is as follows.

Figure 3.15-7 Logic diagram of the voltage selection function for the tie breaker in one and a half
breakers arrangement

When the selected voltage fails (including VT circuit failure and MCB failure), the device will issue
the corresponding voltage failure signal. If the voltage selection is invalid (Invalid_Sel＝1), keep
the original selection and without switchover.

In order to easy to describe, one of the two voltages used in the synchrocheck (synchronism check
and dead check) which obtained after voltage selection function is regarded as line voltage, and
another is bus voltage.

3.15.3 Logic Scheme

The logic diagram gives the introduction to the working principles of the synchronism check and
dead check.

3.15.3.1 Synchrocheck for auto-reclosing

When the frequency difference, voltage difference, and phase difference of voltages on both sides
of the circuit breaker is calculated in the protective device, they can be used as input conditions of
the synchronism check.

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 63

Chapter 3 Protection Description

When the synchronism check function is enabled and the voltages of both ends meets the
requirements of the voltage difference, phase difference, and frequency difference, and there is no
synchronism check blocking signal, it is regarded that the synchronism check conditions are met.

The dead check conditions have three types, namely, live-bus and dead-line check, dead-bus and
live-line check and dead-bus and dead-line check. The above three modes can be enabled and
disabled respectively by the corresponding logic settings. The protection can calculate the
measured bus voltage and line voltage at both sides of the circuit breaker and compare them with
the setting [V_Live] and [V_Dead], when the voltage is higher than [V_Live], the bus/line is
regarded as live; when the voltage is lower than [V_Dead], the bus/line is regarded as dead.

SIG Blk_SYN >=1

&
SIG Blk_SynChk

EN [En_SynChk_AR]

SIG Start_SYN
&
[t_SynChk] 0ms
SIG UBLive SynChkOk

&
50ms 0ms
OTH ULLive &

OTH UDiffOk

OTH phiDiffOk

OTH fDiffOk

Figure 3.15-8 Synchronism check scheme

64 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 3 Protection Description

Figure 3.15-9 Dead check scheme

SIG SynChkOk
>=1

En [En_NoChk_AR] SYNOk

SIG DeadChkOk

Figure 3.15-10 Synchrocheck scheme

This device comprises two synchrocheck modules, correspond to circuit breaker 1 and circuit
breaker 2 respectively.

Please refer to Chapter 8 about the description of settings and section 7.4 about the description of
binary signals.

Where:

1) UdiffOk

Voltage difference condition for AR is satisfied, voltage difference between bus voltage and line
voltage is smaller than [V_Diff_SynChk].

2) phiDiffOk

Phase difference condition for AR is satisfied, phase difference between bus voltage and line
voltage is smaller than [phi_Diff_SynChk].

3) fDiffOk

frequency difference condition for AR is satisfied, frequency difference between bus voltage and

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 65

Chapter 3 Protection Description

line voltage is smaller than [f_Diff_SynChk].

4) Blk_SYN

The binary input of total blocking of the synchrocheck function for AR.

5) Blk_SynChk

Blocking synchronism check for AR. If the value is “1”, the output of synchronism check is “0”.

6) Blk_DeadChk

Blocking signal of dead check for AR.

7) Start_SYN

Synchronism check starting signal, usually it was the auto-reclosure starting signal of
auto-reclosure module.

8) ULLive, UBLive

The line voltage and the bus voltage is greater than the voltage setting [V_Live].

9) UBDead, ULDead

The bus voltage and the line voltage is smaller than the voltage setting [V_Live].

10) Alm_VTS_UB

Synchronous voltage circuit of bus voltage is abnormal.

11) Alm_VTS_UL

Synchronous voltage circuit of line voltage is abnormal.

12) DLDBOk

Dead line and dead bus condition is satisfied.

13) DLLBOk

Dead line and live bus condition is satisfied.

14) LLDBOk

Live line and dead bus condition is satisfied.

3.15.3.2 Synchrocheck for manual closing

The logic diagram gives the introduction to the working principles of the synchronism check and
dead check for manual closing.

When the frequency difference, acceleration of frequency difference, voltage difference, and
phase difference of voltages on both sides of the circuit breaker is calculated in the protective
device, they can be used as input conditions of the synchronism check for manual closing.

The dead check conditions for manual closing have three types, namely, live-bus and dead-line

66 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 3 Protection Description

check, dead-bus and live-line check and dead-bus and dead-line check. The above three modes
can be enabled and disabled by the logic settings [En_LvB_DdL_M], [En_DdB_LvL_M] and
[En_DbB_DdL_M] respectively.

Figure 3.15-11 Synchronism check scheme for Manual closing

Figure 3.15-12 Dead check logic for manual closing

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 67

Chapter 3 Protection Description

OTH BI_ManCls

SIG En_SynChk_M &

&
OTH SynChkOk_M 0ms [t_PW_M]
>=1 ManCls_Out
OTH En_NoChk_M

SIG En_DeadChk_M &

OTH DeadChkOk_M

Figure 3.15-13 Output logic for manual closing

This device comprises two synchrocheck modules, correspond to circuit breaker 1 and circuit
breaker 2 respectively.

Please refer to Chapter 8 about the description of settings and section 7.4 about the description of
binary signals.

Where:

1) Blk_SYN_M

The binary input of total blocking of the synchrocheck function for manual closing

2) Blk_SynChk_M

Blocking synchronism check for manual closing. If the value is “1”, the output of synchronism
check is “0”.

3) UdiffOk_M

Voltage difference condition for manual closing is satisfied, the voltage difference between two
synchronous voltages is smaller than the voltage difference blocking setting [V_Diff_SynChk_M].

4) fBus_Ok, fLine_Ok

The frequency on both sides of the circuit breaker (f_Line, f_Bus) should be measured, and the
two frequencies must not deviate from the rated frequency more than ±5Hz.

5) phiDiffOk_M

Phase difference condition for manual closing is satisfied, phase difference between two
synchronous voltages is smaller than the phase difference blocking setting [Phi_Diff_SynChk_M].

6) fDiffOk_M

Frequency difference condition for manual closing is satisfied, the frequency difference between
the bus frequency and the line frequency is smaller than the frequency difference blocking setting
[f_Diff_SynChk_M].

7) fDiffDtOk_M

Acceleration of frequency difference condition for manual closing is satisfied, acceleration of

68 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 3 Protection Description

frequency difference between two synchronous voltages is smaller than the corresponding
blocking setting [Df/dt_SynChk_M].

8) Blk_DeadChk_M

Blocking signal of dead check for manual closing.

9) ManCls_Out

Triggering signal: manually closing the circuit breaker if the value is “1”.

3.15.4 I/O signal

Note!

This device comprises two synchrocheck modules, correspond to circuit breaker 1 and
circuit breaker 2 respectively, the corresponding settings and singals will be suffixed by
CBn (n is the number of the CB and it can be 1 and 2).

Table 3.15-1 Input signal

No. Signal Description

1 UL1 Line 1 voltage

2 UB1 Bus 1 voltage

3 UB2 Bus 2 voltage

4 UL2 Line 2 voltage

5 UL1D_Clsd Normally closed (NC) contacts of the disconnector for line 1

6 UL1D_Open Normally open (NO) contacts of the disconnector for line 1

7 MCB_VT_UL1 Normally closed (NC) contacts of the MCB for line 1 voltage

8 UL2D_Clsd Normally closed (NC) contacts of the disconnector for line 2

9 UL2D_Open Normally open (NO) contacts of the disconnector for line 2

10 MCB_VT_UL2 Normally closed (NC) contacts of the MCB for line 2 voltage

11 UB1D_Clsd Normally closed (NC) contacts of the disconnector for bus 1

12 UB1D_Open Normally open (NO) contacts of the disconnector for bus 1

13 MCB_VT_UB1 Normally closed (NC) contacts of the MCB for bus 1 voltage

14 UB2D_Clsd Normally closed (NC) contacts of the disconnector for bus 2

15 UB2D_Open Normally open (NO) contacts of the disconnector for bus 2

16 MCB_VT_UB2 Normally closed (NC) contacts of the MCB for bus 2 voltage

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 69

Chapter 3 Protection Description

Total blocking signal of synchrocheck function for AR of

17 Blk_SYN
corresponding circuit breaker
The binary input of blocking synchronism check for AR of
18 Blk_SynChk
corresponding circuit breaker
The binary input of blocking dead check for AR of corresponding
19 Blk_DeadChk
circuit breaker
Triggering signal: manually closing the corresponding circuit
20 BI_ManCls
breaker if the value is “1”
Total blocking signal of synchrocheck function for manual closing
21 Blk_SYN_M
of corresponding circuit breaker
The binary input of blocking synchronism check for manual
22 Blk_SynChk_M
closing of corresponding circuit breaker
The binary input of blocking dead check for manual closing of
23 Blk_DeadChk_M
corresponding circuit breaker
Synchronism check starting signal, usually it was the
24 Start_SYN
auto-reclosure starting signal of auto-reclosure module

Table 3.15-2 Output signal

No. Signal Description

1 UL1_Sel Voltage of line 1 is selected

2 UL2_Sel Voltage of line 2 is selected

3 UB1_Sel Voltage of bus 1 is selected

4 UB2_Sel Voltage of bus 2 is selected

5 Invalid_Sel Voltage selection is invalid

The binary output for indicating frequency difference condition
6 fDiffOk
for synchronism check for AR is met
The binary output for indicating voltage difference condition for
7 UDiffOk
synchronism check for AR is met
The binary output for indicating phase difference condition for
8 phiDiffOk
synchronism check for AR is met
9 DLDBOk Dead line and dead bus condition is met

10 DLLBOk Dead line and live bus condition is met

11 LLDBOk Live line and dead bus condition is met

12 ULLive The line voltage is greater than the voltage setting [V_Live]

13 ULDead The line voltage is smaller than the voltage setting [V_Live]

14 UBLive The bus voltage is greater than the voltage setting [V_Live]

15 UBDead The bus voltage is smaller than the voltage setting [V_Live]

70 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 3 Protection Description

The binary output for indicating dead check condition for AR is

16 DeadChkOk
met
The binary output for indicating synchronism check condition for
17 SynChkOk
AR is met
The binary output for indicating synchrocheck condition for AR is
18 SYNOk
met
19 Alm_VTS_UB Synchronous voltage circuit of bus voltage is abnormal

20 Alm_VTS_UL Synchronous voltage circuit of line voltage is abnormal

21 ManCls_Out Output of manual closing signal

22 f_Line Frequency of line voltage

23 f_Bus Frequency of bus voltage

24 u_Diff Voltage difference for synchronism check

25 f_Diff Frequency difference for synchronism check

26 phi_Diff Phase difference for synchronism check

Acceleration of frequency difference for synchronism check for
27 fDiff/dt
manual closing
The binary output of indicating acceleration of frequency
28 fDiffDtOk_M difference condition for synchronism check for manual closing is
satisfied
The binary output for indicating synchrocheck condition for
29 SYNOk_M
manual closing is met
The binary output for indicating synchronism check condition for
30 SynChkOk_M
manual closing is met
The binary output for indicating dead check condition for manual
31 DeadChkOk_M
closing is met
The binary output for indicating voltage difference condition for
32 UDiffOk_M
synchronism check for manual closing is met
The binary output for indicating phase difference condition for
33 phiDiffOk_M
synchronism check for manual closing is met
The binary output for indicating change rate of frequency
34 fDiffDtOk_M difference condition for synchronism check for manual closing is
met
Bus frequency must not deviate from the rated frequency more
35 fBus_Ok_M
than ±5Hz
Line frequency must not deviate from the rated frequency more
36 fLine_Ok_M
than ±5Hz
The binary output for indicating frequency difference condition
37 fDiffOk_M
for synchronism check for manual closing is met

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 71

Chapter 3 Protection Description

3.16 Automatic Reclosure

3.16.1 Application
To maintain the integrity of the overall electrical transmission system, protective relays are
installed on the transmission system to isolate faulted segments during system disturbances.
Faults caused by lightning, wind, or tree branches could be temporary in nature and may
disappear once the circuit is de-energized. According to statistics actual data, for overhead
transmission line, 80%~90% of the fault is the temporary fault. Automatic reclosing systems are
put into place to re-energize and restore the faulted section of the transmission system once the
fault is extinguished (providing it is a temporary fault). For certain transmission systems, reclosing
is used to improve system stability by restoring critical transmission paths as soon as possible.

Besides overhead lines, other equipment failure, such as cables, busbar, transformer fault and so
on, are generally permanent fault, and no automatic reclosing is initiated after faulty feeder is
tripped. For some joint line, such as overhead line and transformer unit wiring, overhead line and
cables, hybrid transmission lines, etc., need to ensure that only the fault of overhead line can
reclosed, or make a choice according to the actual situation.

3.16.2 Function Description

This automatic reclosing logic can be used with either the protection device or external protection
device. When the internal automatic reclosure is used with the protection device, the inner
protection logic can initiate AR, moreover, the tripping contact from external protection device can
be connected to the protection device via opto-coupler to initiate internal AR.

When the protection device uses external automatic reclosure instead of the automatic reclosure,
the protection device can output some configurable output to initiate external AR, such as, contact
of initiating AR, phase-segregated tripping contact, single-phase tripping contact, three-phase
tripping contact and contact of blocking AR. According to actual requirement, these contacts can
be selectively connected to external automatic reclosure device to initiate AR.

For phase-segregated circuit breaker, AR mode can be 1-pole AR for single-phase fault and
3-pole AR for multi-phase fault, or always 3-pole AR for any kinds of fault according to actual
system requirement. If the fault still exists after reclosing or AR number is equal to preset value of
AR number, the protection device will send final tripping command. The protection device must
provide tripping function based on faulty phase selection if adopting 1-pole AR.

AR can be enabled or disabled by internal logic setting or external input. When AR is enabled, the
protection device will output contact [AR_On], otherwise, output contact [AR_Off]. After some
reclosing conditions, such as, CB position, CB pressure and so on, is satisfied, the protection
device will output contact [Ready_AR].

According to requirement, the protection device can be set as one-shot or multiple-shot AR. When
adopting multiple-shot AR, the AR mode of first time reclosing can be set as 1-pole AR, 3-pole AR
or 1/3-pole AR. The rest AR mode is only set as 3-pole AR and its number is determined by the
maximum 3-pole reclosing number.

For one-shot AR or first reclosing, AR mode can be selected by logic setting [En_1PAR],

72 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 3 Protection Description

[En_3PAR] and [En_1/3P_AR] or external inputs. When 3-pole or 1/3-pole AR mode is selected,
the following three types of check modes can be selected: dead check, synchronism check and no
check.

3.16.3 Logic Scheme

3.16.3.1 AR Ready

For the first reclosing, AR mode can be 1-pole AR or 3-pole AR, however, the selection is valid
only to the first reclosing, after that it can only be 3-pole AR.

When logic setting [En_SetOpt_AR] is set as “1”, AR mode is determined by logic settings:

Logic Setting AR mode

En_1PAR 1PAR_Sel
En_3PAR 3PAR_Sel
En_1/3P_AR 1/3PAR_Sel

When logic setting [En_SetOpt_AR] is set as “0”, AR mode is determined by external inputs. The
relation between AR mode and external inputs, see the table below.

Binary input 1PAR_Sel 3PAR_Sel 1/3PAR_Sel Disable

EBI_Opt1_AR 0 1 0 1
EBI_Opt2_AR 0 0 1 1

The automatic reclosure must be ready to operate (AR ready) before performing reclosing. AR
ready means the automatic reclosure can perform at least one time of reclosing function: breaker
open-close-open.

When the protection device is energized or the settings modified, the following conditions must be
met before the reclaim time begins:

1. AR function is enabled

2. The circuit breaker is ready, such as, normal storage energy and no low pressure signal

3. The duration when the circuit breaker is on closed state before fault occurrence is not smaller
than the setting [t_CBClsd_AR]

4. There is no block signal of automatic reclosure

After the automatic reclosure operates, to meet the condition of AR ready once again, the
automatic reclosure must drop off (Active_AR=0) besides the above conditions which shall be met.

The logic scheme of AR ready is shown in Figure 3.16-1.

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 73

Chapter 3 Protection Description

Figure 3.16-1 Get ready scheme of AR

1. CB Closed

It means the circuit breaker is on closed position. Moreover the duration when the circuit breaker is
on closed position must be greater than the setting [t_CBClsd_AR].

2. Healthy_CB

It is an external input via opto-coupler indicating whether circuit breaker has enough energy to
close, and the input [Healthy_CB] must be energized before the automatic reclosure gets ready.
Because most circuit breakers can finish one time complete process: open-closed-open, it is
necessary that circuit breaker has enough energy before reclosing. When the time delay of AR is
exhausted, AR will be blocked if the input [Healthy_CB] is still not energized with a time delay
[t_Wait_CBHealthy]. If the function is not needed, this input cannot be configured, and its state will
be thought as “1” by default.

3. [EBI_Lockout]

It is the input signal used to block AR, which can connect with manual closing contact or tripping
contact of breaker failure protection and transformer protection. When the input is energized, the
automatic reclosure will be blocked immediately. After this input is de-energized, the blocking
condition will disappear with a time delay [t_Broaden_BlkAR].

When the internal blocking condition of AR is met (such as, zone 3 of distance protection operates,
the protection device operates for multi-phase fault, the protection device operates for three-phase
fault and so on.) The blocking flag of AR will be also controlled by the internal blocking condition of
AR. When the blocking flag of AR is valid, the automatic reclosure will be blocked immediately.
After the blocking flag of AR is invalid, the blocking for AR will disappear with a time delay

74 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 3 Protection Description

[t_Broaden_BlkAR].

4. t_Broaden_BlkAR

It is stretching time of blocking AR. AR will be blocked immediately once the blocking condition of
AR appears, but the blocking condition of AR will drop out with a time delay [t_Broaden_BlkAR]
after blocking signal disappears

5. Active_AR

It means that the reclosing logic is triggered. When any protection element operates to trip, this
element [Active_AR] will operate until AR drop off (Reset Command)

6. Any trip

Any tripping signal from external protection device or internal protection element

7. EnableAR

AR function can be enabled by internal logic settings of AR mode or external inputs besides
internal logic setting [EN_AR].

When logic setting [ExtCtrl_AROn] set as “1”, AR enable are determined by external inputs and
logic settings.

When logic setting [ExtCtrl_AROn] set as “0”, AR enable are determined only by logic settings.

For one-shot reclosing, if 1-pole AR mode is selected, the automatic reclosure will discharge when
there is three-phase tripping signal or inputs of multi-phase open position.

3.16.3.2 AR Initiation

AR mode can be selected by external inputs or internal logic settings. If the logic setting
[En_SetOpt_AR] set as “1”, AR mode is determined by the internal logic settings. If the logic
settings [En_SetOpt_AR] set as “0”, AR mode is determined by the external inputs.

1. AR initiated by line protection trip

AR can be initiated by tripping signal of line protection, and the tripping signal may be from internal
trip signal or external trip signal.

When selecting 1-pole AR or 1/3-pole AR, line single-phase fault will trigger 1-pole AR. When AR
is ready to reclosing (“AR Ready”=1) and the single-phase tripping command is received, this
single-phase tripping command will be kept in the protection device, and 1-pole AR will be initiated
after the single-phase tripping command drops out. The single-phase tripping command kept in
the protection device will be cleared off after all protection elements of the protection device drop
out (Reset Command). Its logic scheme is shown in Figure 3.16-2.

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 75

Chapter 3 Protection Description

Figure 3.16-2 Single-phase tripping initiating AR

When selecting 3-pole AR or 1/3-pole AR, three-phase tripping will trigger 3-pole AR. When AR is
ready to reclosing (“AR Ready”=1) and the three-phase tripping command is received, this
three-phase tripping command will be kept in the protection device, and 3-pole AR will be initiated
after the three-phase tripping command drops out. The three-phase tripping command kept in the
protection device will be cleared off after all protection elements of the protection device drop out.
(Reset Command) Its logic scheme is shown in Figure 3.16-3.

Figure 3.16-3 Three-phase tripping initiating AR

2. AR initiated by CB state

According to actual requirements, it is selectable that AR is initiated by CB state by setting logic

setting [En_CBInitAR]. Under normal conditions, when AR is ready to reclosing (“AR Ready”=1),
AR will be initiated if circuit breaker is open and corresponding phase is no-current. CB state
initiating AR can be divided into initiating 1-pole AR and 3-pole AR, their logic schemes are shown
in Figure 3.16-4 and Figure 3.16-5 respectively. Usually using normally closed contact of circuit
breaker reflects CB state.

76 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 3 Protection Description

SIG Reset Command &

SIG Phase A open
&
>=1 &
SIG Phase B open & 1-pole AR Initiation

SIG Phase C open

&

EN [En_CBInitAR]

SIG Ready_AR

SIG 1PAR_Sel >=1

SIG 1/3PAR_Sel

Figure 3.16-4 1-pole AR initiation

Figure 3.16-5 3-pole AR initiation

3.16.3.3 AR Reclosing

After AR initiated, the protection device will output the initiating contact of AR. For 1-pole AR, in
order to prevent pole discrepancy protection from maloperation under pole discrepancy conditions,
the initiating contact of 1-pole AR can be used to block pole discrepancy protection.

When the time delay of AR expires after AR initiated, as for 1-pole AR, the result of synchronism
check will not be judged, and reclosing command will be output directly. As far as the 3-pole AR, if
the synchronism check is enabled, the reclosing command shall be determined whether is issued
or not based on the result of synchronism check. After the time delay of AR expires, if the
synchronism check is still unsuccessful within the time delay [t_Wait_SynChk_AR], the signal of
synchronism check failure (SYN_Fail) will be output and the AR will be blocked. If 3-pole AR with
no-check is enabled, the condition “SYNOk” will be established always. And here, SYNOk can be
the signal of synchronism check success from the synchronism check logic inside the protection
device or in the external protection device.

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 77

Chapter 3 Protection Description

Figure 3.16-6 One-shot AR

In case the system has fault, the circuit breaker will be tripped normally. After fault is cleared, the
tripping command will drop out immediately. In case the circuit breaker is in failure, etc., and the
continuous tripping time of the circuit breaker is over the time delay [t_PersistTrp], the AR will be
blocked, as shown in the following figure.

In case pilot protection adopting permissive scheme, when the communication channel is
abnormal, the main protection will disabled. In the process of channel abnormality, in case internal
fault happens to the transmission line, the backup protection at both ends of line will operate to trip
the circuit breaker of each end. Whereas the operation time of backup protection at both ends of
the line is possibly non-accordant when internal fault happens to the transmission line, whilst the
time delay of AR needs to consider the arc-extinguishing and insulation recovery ability for
transient fault, so the time delay of AR shall be considered comprehensively according to the
operation time of the protection device at both ends. When the communication channel of main
protection is abnormal (input [PLCLost] is energized), and the logic setting [En_ExtendDly_AR] is
set as “1”, then in case of internal fault, the time delay of AR shall be equal to the original time
delay of AR plus the extra time delay [t_ExtendDly_AR], so as to ensure the recovery of insulation
intensity of fault point when reclosing after transient fault. This extra time delay [t_ExtendDly] is
only valid for the first AR pulse.

SIG Single-phase Trip >=1

[t_PersistTrp] 0ms Block AR
SIG Three-phase Trip

>=1
& &
&
BI [PLCLost] Extend AR time

SIG Active_AR

EN [En_ExtendDly_AR]

Figure 3.16-7 Extra time delay control and blocking logic of long-time tripping

78 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 3 Protection Description

Reclosing pulse length may be set through the setting [t_PW_AR]. For the circuit breaker without
anti-pump, it is available to enable the adjustment function of reclosing pulse length by setting
logic setting [En_CutPulse_AR] as “1”. When this function is enabled, if the protection device
operates to trip during reclosing, the reclosing pulse will drop out immediately, so as to prevent
multi-shot reclosing into fault. However, the minimum reclosing pulse length is not below 50ms, so
as to ensure AR can operate. After the reclosing command is issued, AR will drop out with time
delay [t_Reclaim_AR], and can carry out next reclosing.

Figure 3.16-8 Reclosing output logic

3.16.3.4 Reclosing Unsuccessful

For transient fault, the fault will be cleared after protection device operates to trip. After the
reclosing command is issued, AR will drop out with time delay [t_Reclaim_AR], and can carry out
next reclosing. When the reclosing is unsuccessful or the reclosing condition is not met after AR
initiated, the reclosing will be considered as unsuccessful, including the following cases.

1. For one-shot AR, if the tripping command is received again after the reclosing pulse is
issued, the reclosing shall be considered as unsuccessful.

2. For multi-shot AR, if the reclosing times are equal to the setting value of AR number and
the tripping command is received again after the last reclosing pulse is issued, the
reclosing shall be considered as unsuccessful.

3. It is also available to judge whether the reclosing is successful by CB state, which can be
enabled by setting logic setting [En_UnsucChkByCB] as “1”. If CB is still in open state
with a time delay [t_Unsuc_AR] after the reclosing pulse is issued, the reclosing shall be
considered as unsuccessful. For this case, the protection device will issue signal
“Fail_AR” to indicate the reclosing is unsuccessful, and this signal will drop out after
“Reset Command”. AR will be blocked if the reclosing shall be considered as
unsuccessful.

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 79

Chapter 3 Protection Description

Figure 3.16-9 Reclosing unsuccessful

After AR unsuccess is confirmed, AR will be blocked. AR will not enter into the ready state unless
the circuit breaker position drops out, and can only begin to enter into the ready state again after
the circuit breaker is closed.

3.16.3.5 Reclosing Numbers Control

The protection device may be set up into one-shot or multiplex-shot AR. Through the setting
[N_AR], the maximum number of reclosing attempts may be set up to 4 times. Generally, only
one-shot AR is selected. Some corresponding settings may be hidden if one-shot AR is selected.

1. 1-pole AR

[N_AR]=1 means one-shot reclosing. For one-shot 1-pole AR mode, the 1-pole AR will be initiated
only for single-phase fault and the correct faulty phase selected, otherwise, AR will be blocked. For
single-phase transient fault on the line, the line protection device will operate to trip and 1-pole AR
is initiated. After the time delay for 1-pole AR is expired, the protection device will send reclosing
pulse, and then the automatic reclosure will drop off after the time delay [t_Reclaim_AR] to ready
for the next reclosing. For permanent fault, the protection device will operate to trip again after the
reclosing is performed, and the protection device will output the signal of reclosing failure
[Fail_AR].

[N_AR]>1 means multi-shot reclosing. For multi-shot reclosing in 1-pole AR mode, the first
reclosing is 1-pole AR, and the subsequent reclosing can only be 3-pole AR. For single-phase
transient fault on the line, the line protection device will operate to trip and then 1-pole AR is
initiated. After the time delay of the first reclosing is expired, the protection device will send
reclosing pulse, and then the automatic reclosure will drop off after the time delay [t_Reclaim_AR]
to ready for the next reclosing. For permanent fault, the protection device will operate to trip again
after the reclosing is performed, and then 3-pole AR is initiated. At this time, the time delay applies
the setting [t_3Ph-Shot2_AR]. After the time delay is expired, if the reclosing condition is met, the
protection device will send reclosing pulse. It does this again and again until the reclosing is
successful or the reclosing number is equal to the maximum permitted reclosing number. If the first
fault is multi-phase fault, the protection device operates to trip three-phase and initiate 3-pole AR.
At this time, the time delay applies the setting [t_3Ph-Shot1_AR]. For the possible reclosing times
of 3-pole AR in 1-pole AR mode, see Table 3.16-1.

80 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 3 Protection Description

2. 3-pole AR

[N_AR]=1 means one-shot reclosing. For one-shot 3-pole AR mode, the line protection device will
operate to trip when the transient fault occurs on the line and 3-pole AR will be initiated. After the
time delay for 3-pole AR is expired, the protection device will send reclosing pulse, and then the
automatic reclosure will drop off after the time delay [t_Reclaim_AR] to ready for the next reclosing.
For permanent fault, the protection device will operate to trip again after the reclosing is performed,
and the protection device will output the signal of reclosing failure [Fail_AR].

[N_AR]>1 means multi-shot reclosing. For multi-shot reclosing in 3-pole AR mode, the line
protection device will operate to trip when the transient fault occurs on the line and 3-pole AR will
be initiated. After the time delay of the first reclosing is expired, the protection device will send
reclosing pulse, and then the automatic reclosure will drop off after the time delay [t_Reclaim_AR]
to ready for the next reclosing. For permanent fault, the protection device will operate to trip again
after the reclosing is performed, and then 3-pole AR is initiated after the tripping contact drops off.
After the time delay for AR is expired, the protection device will send reclosing pulse. It does this
again and again until the reclosing is successful or the reclosing number is equal to the maximum
permitted reclosing number. For the possible reclosing times of 3-pole AR in 3-pole AR mode, see
Table 3.16-1.

3. 1/3-pole AR

[N_AR]=1 means one-shot reclosing. For one-shot 1/3-pole AR mode, the line protection device
will operate to trip when the transient fault occurs on the line and 1-pole AR will be initiated for
single-phase fault and 3-pole AR will be initiated for multi-phase fault. After the respective time
delay for AR is expired, the protection device will send reclosing pulse, and then the automatic
reclosure will drop off after the time delay [t_Reclaim_AR] to ready for the next reclosing. For
permanent fault, the protection device will operate to trip again after the reclosing is performed,
and the protection device will output the signal of reclosing failure [Fail_AR].

[N_AR]>1 means multi-shot reclosing. For multi-shot reclosing in 1/3-pole AR mode, the line
protection device will operate to trip when the transient fault occurs on the line and AR will be
initiated. After the time delay of the first reclosing is expired, the protection device will send
reclosing pulse, and then the automatic reclosure will drop off after the time delay [t_Reclaim_AR]
to ready for the next reclosing. For permanent fault, the protection device will operate to trip again
after the reclosing is performed, and then 3-pole AR is initiated after the tripping contact drops off.
After the time delay for AR is expired, the protection device will send reclosing pulse. It does this
again and again until the reclosing is successful or the reclosing number is equal to the maximum
permitted reclosing number. For the possible reclosing times of 3-pole AR in 3-pole AR mode, see
Table 3.16-1.

The table below shows the possible reclosing times in various AR modes during fault.

Table 3.16-1 Reclosing times

1-pole AR 3-pole AR 1/3-pole AR

Setting Value
N-1AR N-3AR N-1AR N-3AR N-1AR N-3AR

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 81

Chapter 3 Protection Description

1 1 0 0 1 1 1

2 1 1 0 2 1 2

3 1 2 0 3 1 3

4 1 3 0 4 1 4

N-1AR: the reclosing times of 1-pole AR

N-3AR: the reclosing times of 3-pole AR

4. Match between dual automatic reclosure

For UHV lines, it normally applies duplicated protection configurations. If it applies reclosing
function in the line protection, it can enable the reclosing function any line protection or enable the
reclosing functions of both line protections at the same time without need to consider the match
between them.

If both sets of reclosing functions are enabled, when one of them recloses firstly by permanent
fault, the other will block the reclosing pulse according to the current condition of the faulty phase.
For one-shot AR mode, if the current is detected in the faulty phase, AR will be blocked
immediately to prevent the circuit breaker from reclosing for several times. For multi-shot AR mode,
if the current is detected in the faulty phase, the current reclosing pulse will be blocked and go into
the next reclosing pulse logic automatically. If the reclosing times are equal to the maximum
permitted reclosing number, the automatic reclosure will drop off after the time delay
[t_Reclaim_AR].

For one-shot or multi-shot AR, there is a corresponding reclosing counter at each stage. After
reclosing pulse is sent, the corresponding reclosing counter will plus 1 and the reclosing counter
may be cleared by the submenu “LOCAL CTRL”. If the circuit breaker is reclosed by other devices
during AR initiation, the automatic reclosure will go into the next reclosing pulse logic.

3.16.3.6 AR Time Sequence Diagram

The following introduces several typical examples about the operating time sequence of AR, and
such examples respectively indicate the relationship of operating time sequence related to AR in
case of transient fault and permanent fault.

82 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 3 Protection Description

Figure 3.16-10 Single-phase transient fault

Fault

Trip

Open Open
52b

[t_Reclaim_AR]
Ready_AR

Active_AR

Inprog_AR

Inprog_1Ph-Shot1_AR
[t_1Ph-Shot1_AR]

Inprog_3Ph-Shot2_AR
[t_3Ph-Shot2_AR]

SYNOk

AR_Out
[t_PW_AR] [t_PW_AR]

Prep_Trp3P

Fail_AR
200ms

Time

Figure 3.16-11 Single-phase permanent fault (N_AR=2)

3.16.3.7 Multi-breaker Arrangement

As for the application occasions where each line is corresponding to two circuit breakers, such as
angle scheme or 3/2 breakers arrangement, it is necessary to configure different reclosing
priorities by the setting [Opt_Priority_AR] for the two circuit breakers.

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 83

Chapter 3 Protection Description

1. When [Opt_Priority_AR] is set as “0 ” [None], it will be normal single-breaker reclosing logic.

2. When [Opt_Priority_AR] is set as “1”[High], it will be master reclosing logic

3. When [Opt_Priority_AR] is set as “2” [Low], it will be slave reclosing logic.

When the reclosing with higher priority is reclosed into permanent fault or the circuit breaker
cannot be closed, it is necessary to block the reclosing of another circuit breaker, so as to avoid
the impact on circuit breaker due to that both circuit breakers are closed into permanent fault
simultaneously.

When the master AR is initiated, the protection device will issue the signal [WaitToSlave] to block
the slave AR.

If the master AR is successful, the signal [WaitToSlave] will drop out, and the slave AR will reclose
immediately. If the master AR fails, the master AR will send the signal “Fail_AR” and the signal
[WaitToSlave] will be kept until the “Reset Command”. If the slave AR receives the signal
“Fail_AR” or the signal [WaitToSlave] continuously for [t_WaitMaster], the slave AR will be blocked.

Note!

This protection device can also enable two sets of automatic reclosure logic at the same
time, which correspond to two circuit breakers respectively, but all the settings and singals
will be suffixed by CBn (n is the number of the CB and it can be 1 and 2).

3.16.4 I/O Signal

Table 3.16-2 Input signal

Signal Description
EnableAR Binary input for enabling AR of corresponding circuit breaker. If
the logic setting [ExtCtrl_AROn]=1, enabling AR will be
controlled by the external input
DisableAR Binary input for disabling AR of corresponding circuit breaker. If
the logic setting [ExtCtrl_AROn]=1, disabling AR will be
controlled by the external input
BI_ExTrp1P_L The external single-pole tripping binary input from line
protection
BI_ExTrp3P_L The external three-pole tripping binary input from line
protection
BI_ExTrp3P_GT The external tripping binary input from transformer, generator
or reactor protection
The external phase-A tripping signal for corresponding circuit
BI_ExTrpA
breaker
The external phase-B tripping signal for corresponding circuit
BI_ExTrpB
breaker
The external phase-C tripping signal for corresponding circuit
BI_ExTrpC
breaker

84 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 3 Protection Description

Binary input of blocking reclosing, usually it is connected with

EBI_Lockout the operating signals of definite-time protection, transformer
protection and busbar differential protection, etc.
Usually connect with the normally closed contact of the
52b phase-segregated or non-phase segregated circuit breaker
position (52b)
The binary output for indicating synchrocheck condition for AR
SYNOK
is met
The input of indicating the alarm signal that the carrier channel
PLCLost
is lost
Waiting for the reclosing permissive signal from master (when
WaitMaster
reclosing multiple circuit breakers)
The input for indicating whether circuit breaker has enough
Healthy_CB
energy to perform the function: open-close-open function

Table 3.16-3 Output signal

Signal Description Config

AR_On Automatic reclosure is enabled Yes
AR_Off Automatic reclosure is disabled Yes
Automatic reclosure have been ready for
Ready_AR Yes
reclosing cycle
Close_CB Output of reclosing signal Yes
Fail_AR Auto-reclosing fails Yes
Fail_SYN Synchronism check fails Yes
ARLocked Automatic reclosure is blocked Yes
Prep_Trp1P Single-phase circuit breaker will be tripped
Yes
once protection device operates
Prep_Trp3P Three-phase circuit breaker will be tripped
Yes
once protection device operates
Active_AR Automatic reclosing logic is actived Yes
Inprog_AR Automatic reclosing cycle is in progress Yes
Inprog_1Ph-Shot1_AR The first 1-pole AR cycle is in progress Yes
Inprog_3Ph-Shot1_AR The first 3-pole AR cycle is in progress Yes
Waiting signal of automatic reclosing which will
WaitToSlave be sent to slave (when reclosing multiple Yes
circuit breakers)
Mode_1PAR Output of 1-pole AR mode Yes
Mode_3PAR Output of 3-pole AR mode Yes
Mode_1/3PAR Output of 1/3-pole AR mode Yes

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 85

Chapter 3 Protection Description

3.17 Trip Scheme

1. Tripping logic 1

86 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 3 Protection Description

2. Tripping logic 2

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 87

Chapter 3 Protection Description

Trip phase A

Trip phase B ≥1 Trigger TJ relay

Trip phase C

& Trigger TJABC relay

& 150ms 0 Fail in single pole tripping

En_3PTrip

& Three-poles tripping

EBI_Lockout
≥1

AR is not ready for operating

&

Enable AR

&

3-Pole AR

3. Blocking AR logic

88 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 3 Protection Description

Op_DEF_PilotP
&
En_DEF_Blk_AR

Op_UV1
≥1
Op_UV2 ≥1

Op_OV1
≥1
≥1
Op_OV2

Op_OC_Stub
≥1
Op_InvROC

SOTF for reclosing manually

SOTF for auto-reclosing ≥1

Op_Z_Rev

Op_Perisist1P
≥1
Op_OC_VTS
& ≥1
Op_ROC_VTS

En_ZPP2_Blk_AR
&
Op_Z2 (Phase-to-phase)
≥1
En_ZPG2_Blk_AR
&
Op_Z2 (Phase-to-ground)

En_ROC1_Blk_AR
&
Op_ROC1

En_ROC2_Blk_AR
&
≥1
Op_ROC2

En_ROC3_Blk_AR
&
Op_ROC3

Op_Z3
≥1
Op_ROC4

PD and protection element operating

& ≥1 Initiating blocking relay for AR
En_EVFault_Blk_AR

En_PhSF_Blk_AR
&
Op_PhSelFail

EBI_Lockout ≥1 Blocking AR

VT circuit failure

Tripping Logic of PCS-902:

1. Minimal operating time of the contact is 40ms.

2. DPFC distance protection, zone 1 of distance element and pilot protection operate to
implement selective tripping by phase selection element.

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 89

Chapter 3 Protection Description

3. For zone 2 of distance protection, whether auto-reclosing blocked is adopted or not will be
decided by logic setting [En_ZPP2_Blk_AR] for phase-to-phase fault or [En_ZPG2_Blk_AR]
for phase-to-ground fault.

„ Zone 2 of distance element operates to to trip three-phase circuit breaker when logic setting
[En_ZPP2_Blk_AR] or [En_ZPG2_Blk_AR] is set as “1” for phase-to-phase fault or
phase-to-ground fault respectively.

4. For stage 1, stage 2 and stage 3 of directional zero-sequence overcurrent protection, whether
auto-reclosing blocked is adopted or not will be decided by logic setting [En_ROC1_Blk_AR],
[En_ROC2_Blk_AR] and [En_ROC3_Blk_AR] respectively.

„ Stage 1 of directional zero-sequence overcurrent element operats to trip three-phase circuit

breaker when logic setting [En_ROC1_Blk_AR] is set as “1”

„ Stage 2 of directional zero-sequence overcurrent element operats to trip three-phase circuit

breaker when logic setting [En_ROC2_Blk_AR] is set as “1”

„ Stage 3 of directional zero-sequence overcurrent element operats to trip three-phase circuit

breaker when logic setting [En_ROC3_Blk_AR] is set as “1”

5. If phase selection element fails and operation element can not drop off, three-pole tripping
command caused by phase selection failure will be sent after 200ms delay.

6. If any of the following conditions is matched, three-phase tripping signal will be sent directly.

„ Undervoltage protection operating

„ Overvoltage protection operating

„ Stub overcurrent protection operating

„ Inverse-time zero-sequence overcurrent protection operating

„ Zone 3 of distance element operating

„ Stage 4 of directional zero-sequence overcurrent element operating

„ Reverse distance element operating

„ Switching onto a faulty phase

„ A fault occurs under pole disagreement condition.

„ Overcurrent element operating during VT circuit failure

„ Phase selection failure after 200ms delay

„ Single phase tripping failure after 150ms delay

„ Single phase operation condition after 200ms delay

„ Breaker failure protection

„ Thermal overload protection

90 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 3 Protection Description

7. Three-phase tripping will be used if two or three phases are selected by the phase selection
element.

8. Any fault occurs under following conditions, three-pole trip element will operate

„ The logic settings [En_3PTrip] is set as “1” (for two circuit breaker configuration, the setting
maybe with the suffix of “_CB1” and “_CB2” what correspond to circuit breaker 1 and circuit
breaker 2 respectively)

„ The binary input [EBI_Lockout] is energized (for two circuit breaker configuration, the setting
maybe with the suffix of “_CB1” and “_CB2” what correspond to circuit breaker 1 and circuit
breaker 2 respectively)

„ Auto-reclosing is not ready for operating

„ 3-pole auto-reclosing is adopted

9. When a serious fault occurs, auto-reclosing will be blocked under following conditions:

„ Manual closing or auto-reclosing onto a fault phase

„ 1-pole tripping and not dropping off

„ 3-pole tripping during single phase operation

„ Tripping for VT circuit failure

„ Tripping for three-phase fault

„ Reverse distance element operating

„ Undervoltage protection operating

„ Overvoltage protection operating

„ Stub overcurrent protection operating

„ Inverse-time zero-sequence overcurrent protection operating

10. Three-pole trip with auto-reclosing blocked can be selected by logic setting
[En_PhSF_Blk_AR], [En_MPF_Blk_AR] and [En_EVFault_Blk_AR] (for two circuit breaker
configuration, the setting maybe with the suffix of “_CB1” and “_CB2” what correspond to
circuit breaker 1 and circuit breaker 2 respectively).

11. If only reverse distance protection, the relay will not select faulty phase and locate where the
fault occurs.

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 91

Chapter 3 Protection Description

92 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 4 Automatic Supervision

Chapter 4 Automatic Supervision

4.1 General Description

Though the protection system is in non-operating state under normal conditions, it is waiting for a
power system fault to occur at any time and must operate for the fault without fail. When
equipment is in energizing process before the LED “HEALTHY” is on, the equipment need to be
checked to ensure no errors. Therefore, the automatic supervision function, which checks the
health of the protection system when startup and during normal operation, plays an important role.

The numerical relay based on the microprocessor operations is suitable for implementing this
automatic supervision function of the protection system.

In case a fault is detected during initialization when DC power supply is provided to the equipment,
the equipment will be blocked out, which means relay is out of service. Therefore you must
re-energize the relays or reset CPU module by restarting equipment to make relay back into
service.

When a failure is detected by the automatic supervision, it is followed with an LCD message, LED
indication and alarm contact outputs. At the same time event recording will record the failure alarm
which can be viewed in event recording report and be printed.

4.2 Understand the Alarms

Hardware circuit and operation condition of the equipment are self-supervised continuously. If any
abnormal condition is detected, information or report will be displayed and a corresponding alarm
will be issued.

A common abnormality may block a certain number of protections functions while the other
functions can still work. However, if serious hardware failure or abnormality were detected, all
protection functions will be blocked and the LED “HEALTHY” will be extinguished and blocking
signal will be given by contacts output BO_FAIL. The protective device then can not work normally
and maintenance is required to eliminate the failure. All the commom alarm signal and the
corresponding repairmen suggestion have been listed below. Please refer to section 7.4.2 about
description about the alarm signal about each protective device.

Note!

If the protective device is blocked or alarm signal is sent during operation, please do find
out its reason with the help of self-diagnose record. If the reason can not be found at site,
please notice the factory NR. Please Do not simply press button “TARGET RESET” on the
protection panel or re-power on the protective device.

Table 4.2-1 Repairmen suggestion for alarms information

No. Item LED Status Handing suggestion

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 93

Chapter 4 Automatic Supervision

Device will be blocked due to serious

hardware failure or abnormality is
1 Fail HEALTHY: off
detected and the LED “HEALTHY” will
be extinguished.
A common abnormality is detected and
a certain number of protections
2 Alarm ALARM: on functions are blocked while the other
functions can still work. The LED
“ALARM” will be turned on.
AC current and voltage samplings of
fault detector DSP module are detected
3 Alm_Abnor_Smpl_MON HEALTHY: off to be wrong or inconsistent with that of
protection DSP module. Please inform
manufacture or agency to maintain it
AC current and voltage samplings of
protection DSP module are detected to
be wrong or inconsistent with that of
4 Alm_Abnor_Smpl_CPU HEALTHY: off
fault detector DSP module. Please
inform manufacture or agency to
maintain it
The control chip of binary output circuit
is damaged. Please put the protective
5 Alm_TrpOut HEALTHY: off device out of service at once and
inform the factory or agency to
maintain it.
Value of any setting is out of scope.
Please put the protective device out of
6 Alm_Setting_Out-of-Scope HEALTHY: off
service at once and inform the factory
or agency to maintain it.
Mismatch between the configuration of
plug-in boards and the designing
7 Alm_BrdConfig HEALTHY: off drawing of an applied-specific project.
Check the plug-in module or inform
manufacture or agency to maintain it.
Invalid settings in active setting group.
Please put the protective device out of
8 Alm_Setting HEALTHY: off
service at once and inform the factory
or agency to maintain it.
Any error is detected in flash memory.
Please put the protective device out of
9 Alm_FlashChkErr HEALTHY: off
service at once and inform the factory
or agency to maintain it.
If any chip on protection DSP module is
10 Alm_DSP_ProtBrd HEALTHY: off
detected damaged or having error.

94 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 4 Automatic Supervision

Please put the protective device out of

service at once and inform the factory
or agency to maintain it.
If any chip on fault detector DSP
module is detected damaged or having
11 Alm_DSP_FDBrd HEALTHY: off error. Please put the protective device
out of service at once and inform the
factory or agency to maintain it.
Loss of opto-coupler power supply.
12 Alm_Pwr_Opto ALARM: on Please check the input circuit of DC
power supply for the BI module.
General fault detector element
13 Alm_PersistFD ALARM: on operates for longer than 10s. Please
check CT secondary circuit.
Zero-sequence overcurrent element
14 Alm_PersistI0 ALARM: on operates for longer than 10s. Please
check CT secondary circuit.
Line VT circuit of corresponding circuit
15 Alm_VTS ALARM: on breaker fails. Please check VT
secondary circuit.
CT circuit of corresponding circuit
16 Alm_CTS ALARM: on breaker fails. Please check CT
secondary circuit.
The auxiliary normally closed contact
(52b) of corresponding circuit breaker
17 Alm_52b ALARM: on
is abnormal. Please check the auxiliary
contact of CB
Any of the binary inputs of single-phase
or three-phase tripping contact from
18 Alm_BI_ExTrp ALARM: on external protection is energized and
the duration is longer than 10s. Please
check all the relevant binary inputs
Binary input of auxiliary normally
closed contact [BI_DS_Line] is
energized then current can still be
19 Alm_BI_DS_Line ALARM: on
detected and the duration is longer
than 10s. Please check the binary input
[BI_DS_Line].
The protection device is under the state
HEALTHY: on of communication test. No special
20 Alarm_BO_Test
ALARM: off treatment is needed, and only wait for
the completion of testing

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 95

Chapter 4 Automatic Supervision

4.3 Relay Self-supervision

4.3.1 Relay hardware monitoring

All chips on each module are monitored to ensure whether they are damaged or have errors. If
any one of them is detected damaged or having error, the corresponding alarm signal
[Alm_DSP_ProtBrd] or [Alm_DSP_FDBrd] is issued with equipment being blocked.

4.3.2 Fault detection monitoring

When the zero-sequence general fault detector picks up and lasts for longer than 10 seconds, an
alarm [Alm_PersistI0] will be issued without the protective device blocked.

When any general fault detector picks up for longer than 10s, an alarm will be issued
[Alm_PersistFD] without the protective device blocked.

4.3.3 Check Output tripping circuit

Chips controlling the output relays in the output circuit are continually monitored. If any error or
damage is detected in these chips, alarm [Alm_TrpOut] will be given and the protective device will
be blocked.

4.3.4 Check setting

This relay has 10 setting groups, while only one is active at the same time. The settings of active
setting group are checked to ensure they are reasonable. If settings are checked to be
unreasonable or out of setting scopes, a corresponding alarm signal will be issued, and the
protective device is also blocked.

4.4 AC Input Monitoring

4.4.1 Voltage and current drift monitoring and auto adjustment
Zero point of voltage and current may drift influenced by variation of temperature or other
environment factors. The equipment continually automatically traces the drift and adjust it to
normal value.

4.4.2 Protection DSP sampling monitoring

AC current and voltage samplings of protection DSP module and fault detector DSP module are
monitored and if the samples of protection DSP module are detected to be wrong or inconsistent
with that of fault detector DSP module, the alarm signal [Alm_Abnor_Smpl_ProtBrd] will be issued
and the relay will be blocked.

4.4.3 Fault Detector DSP sampling monitoring

AC current and voltage samplings of protection DSP module and fault detector DSP module are
monitored and if the samples of fault detector DSP module are detected to be wrong or
inconsistent with that of protection DSP module, the alarm signal [Alm_Abnor_Smpl_FDBrd] will
be issued and the relay will be blocked.

96 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 4 Automatic Supervision

4.5 Secondary Circuit Monitoring

4.5.1 Opto-coupler power supervision
Positive power supply of opto-coupler is continually monitored. If an error or damage has occurred,
an alarm [Alm_Pwr_Opto] will be issued.

4.5.2 Circuit breaker supervision

If 52b of three phases are energized ,which indicates circuit breaker is open and there is no
current detected in the line, the line will be considered to be out of service. SOTF protection will be
enabled for 400ms.

If 52b of three phases are energized that indicates circuit breaker is open but there is still current
detected in the line or three-phase circuit breaker is in pole disagreement, an alarm signal
[Alm_52b] will be issued after 10 seconds.

4.5.3 VT circuit supervision

The purpose of the voltage transformer circuit failure supervision function is to indicate failure in
the measuring voltage from a voltage transformer. When a fault occurs in the secondary circuit of
the voltage transformer (VT), the voltage dependent measuring elements may operate incorrectly.
PCS-902 incorporates a VT failure supervision function (VTS) as a countmeasure against such
incorrect operation.

In normal operation program of the PCS-902, the phasor summation of bus three phase voltage is
checked frequently, if this phasor summation detected is higher than 0.08Unn (Unn is rated
secondary phase-to-phase voltage) and fault detection element does not operate, VTS will, after
1.25s, output an alarm [Alm_VTS].

If the phasor summation detected is lower than 0.08Unn but the bus positive voltage U1 is less
than one third of Unn (Unn is rated secondary phase-to-phase voltage), VTS will also issue an
alarm [Alm_VTS] after 1.25s when logic setting [En_LineVT] is set as “0”, otherwise, VTS will also
issue an alarm [Alm_VTS] after 1.25s when circuit breaker is closed (52b of three phases are
de-energized) or there is current existing on line.

VTS will issue an alarm [Alm_VTS] immediately when the binary input [BI_MCB_VT_Line] is
energized.

In this case VTS will also:

„ to disable distance protection

„ to enable phase overcurrent protection and zero-sequence overcurrent protection especially

for this case as a substitute

„ to release direction guard of stage 4 zero-sequence overcurrent element

„ to disable auto-reclosing element

„ to disable stage 1 and stage 2 zero-sequence overcurrent element

„ to disable stage 3 zero-sequence overcurrent element if logic setting [En_Dir_ROC3] is set as

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 97

Chapter 4 Automatic Supervision

“1”

„ to increase the threshold of DPFC distance element to 1.5UN

„ to disable undervoltage protection element

The alarm [Alm_VTS] will be reset automatically with a time delay of 10s after all three phases
voltage resume to normal condition.

4.5.4 Synchronism voltage circuit failure supervision

If the line voltage is used for auto-reclosing with synchronism or dead line check, the synchronism
voltage is monitored.

If the line circuit breaker is in closed state which is indicated by 52b of three phases, but the
synchronism voltage is lower than the setting [V_Live], it is concluded that “synchronism voltage
transformer circuit failure” has occurred and an alarm [Alm_VTS_UB] or [Alm_VTS_UL] will be
issued after 10s.

If auto-reclosing is disabled, or [En_NoChk_AR] are set as “1”, synchronism voltage is not needed
to be connected and synchronism voltage transformer circuit failure supervision will be disabled.

When synchronism voltage transformer circuit failure is detected, function of synchronism check
and dead check in auto-reclosing logic will be disabled.

After synchronism voltage reverting to normal condition, the alarm will be reset automatically after
10s.

4.5.5 CT circuit supervision

The main purpose of the current transformer (CT) circuit failure supervision function is to detect
faults in the secondary circuits of CT and avoid influence on the operation of corresponding
protection functions. This function will be processed all the time, whether general fault detection
picks up or not.

The equipment measures zero-sequence current from two sources, which is either calculated
depending on the summation of IA, IB and IC (3I0Cal=IA+IB+IC) or derived at the neutral current circuit
from three-phase currents (3I0).

If 3I0 is less than 0.75 times 3I0Cal or 3I0Cal is less than 0.75 times 3I0, after 200 ms, an alarm
[Alm_CTS] will be issued (only for one CB scheme).

If 3I0Cal exists (3I0>0.1In) but 3U0Cal derived is nearly zero (3U0Cal<3V) and at least one phase
whose current is zero, after 10s, an alarm [Alm_CTS] will be issued (for one or two CBs scheme).

When CT circuit failure is detected, CTFS will have the following influence on protection.

„ to disable zero-sequence current general fault detection

„ to disable stage 1, 2 and 4 of zero-sequence overcurrent element

„ to release direction guard of stage 3 of zero-sequence overcurrent element

3U0Cal: zero-sequence voltage calculated depending on the summation of UA, UB and UC. (i.e.,

98 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 4 Automatic Supervision

3U0Cal=UA+UB+UC)

4.5.6 Binary input supervision

If any of the binary inputs of single-phase or three-phase tripping contact from external protection
is energized and the duration is longer than 10s, an alarm [Alm_BI_ExTrp] will be issued.

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 99

Chapter 4 Automatic Supervision

100 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 5 Metering and Recording

Chapter 5 Metering and Recording

5.1 Metering
PCS-902 performs continuous measurement of the analogue input quantities. The relay samples
24 points per cycle and calculates the RMS value in each interval and updated the LCD display in
every 0.5 second. The measurement data can be displayed on the LCD of the relay front panel or
on the local via tool software or remote PC. Navigate the menu to view the sampling value through
LCD screen.

This device can be used for one circuit breaker configuration and two circuit breakers
configurantion. If it is used for two circuit breakers configuration, some corresponding metering will
be suffixed by CBn (n is the number of the CB and it can be 1 and 2).

1. RMS Values

„ Magnitude of phase voltage Ua, Ub, Uc (i.e. UL1)

„ Magnitude of synchronism voltage (UB1, UB2 and UL2)

Please refer to section 3.15.2 about the definitions of UL1, UB1, UL2 and UB2.

„ Manitude of zero-sequence voltage (3U0)

„ Magnitude of phase current Ia, Ib, Ic (it represents the current of line, for two circuit breakers
configuration, such as one and a half breakers arrangement, it is equal to the summation of
corresponding phase currents of two circuit breakers)

„ Magnitude of zero-sequence current 3I0 (For one circuit breaker configuration, it is directly
measured from CT circuit, but for two circuit breakers configuration, it is calculated according to
the three-phase current of line)

„ Magnitude of phase currents of two circuit breakers Ia1, Ib1, Ic1, Ia2, Ib2, Ic2 (displayed only
for two circuit breakers configuration, such as one and a half breakers arrangement)

„ Magnitude of zero-sequence currents of two circuit breakers 3I01, 3I02 (displayed only for
two circuit breakers configuration, such as one and a half breakers arrangement)

„ Line frequency (f_Line)

„ Bus frequency (f_Bus)

„ frequency difference (f_Diff)

„ voltage difference (u_Diff)

Access path: Press key “▲” to enter main menu firstly. Select the item “VALUES“ and press key
“ENT” to enter submenu “PROT_MEASUREMENT”, and then press key “ENT”. The
corresponding metering values mentioned above are displayed on the LCD.

2. Phase Angle

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 101

Chapter 5 Metering and Recording

„ Phase angle of (Ua, Ub, Uc)

„ Phase angle of (Ia, Ib, Ic)

„ Phase angle of (Ia1, Ib1, Ic1) (displayed only for two circuit breakers configuration, such as
one and a half breakers arrangement)

„ Phase angle of (Ia2, Ib2, Ic2) (displayed only for two circuit breakers configuration, such as
one and a half breakers arrangement)

„ Phase angle difference between two synchronism voltages (phi_Diff)

In “PHASE_ANGLE”, the phase angles displayed about three-phase current and three-phase
voltage are based on phase A voltage.

No. Symbol Definition

Phase angle difference for A-phase voltage (Ua) relative to the phase A
1 Ang(Ua)
voltage (Ua)
Phase angle difference for B-phase voltage (Ub) relative to the phase A
2 Ang(Ub)
voltage (Ua)
Phase angle difference for C-phase voltage (Uc) relative to the phase A
3 Ang(Uc)
voltage (Ua)
Phase angle difference for A-phase current (Ia) relative to the phase A
5 Ang(Ia)
voltage (Ua)
Phase angle difference for B-phase current (Ib) relative to the phase A
6 Ang(Ib)
voltage (Ua)
Phase angle difference for C-phase current (Ic) relative to the phase A
7 Ang(Ic)
voltage (Ua)
Phase angle difference for A-phase current (Ia of CB1) relative to the
8 Ang(Ia1)
phase A voltage (Ua)
Phase angle difference for B-phase current (Ib of CB1) relative to the
9 Ang(Ib1)
phase A voltage (Ua)
Phase angle difference for C-phase current (Ic of CB1) relative to the
10 Ang(Ic1)
phase A voltage (Ua)
Phase angle difference for A-phase current (Ia of CB2) relative to the
11 Ang(Ia2)
phase A voltage (Ua)
Phase angle difference for B-phase current (Ib of CB2) relative to the
12 Ang(Ib2)
phase A voltage (Ua)
Phase angle difference for C-phase current (Ic of CB2) relative to the
13 Ang(Ic2)
phase A voltage (Ua)
14 Ang(phi_Diff) Phase angle difference between two synchronism voltages

Access path: Press key “▲” to enter main menu firstly. Select the item “VALUES” and press key
“ENT” to enter submenu “PHASE_ANGLE”, and then press key “ENT”. The corresponding phase
angles mentioned above are displayed on the LCD.

102 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 5 Metering and Recording

3. Metering of the primary value

No. Symbol Definition Unit

1 LineBAY_Ua The primary value of phase A voltage (Ua) kV
2 LineBAY_Ub The primary value of phase B voltage (Ub) kV
3 LineBAY_Uc The primary value of phase C voltage (Uc) kV
4 LineBAY_Uab The primary value of phase to phase voltage (Uab) kV
5 LineBAY_Ubc The primary value of phase to phase voltage (Ubc) kV
6 LineBAY_Uca The primary value of phase to phase voltage (Uca) kV
7 LineBAY_3U0 The primary value of triple zero-sequence voltage (3U0) kV
8 LineBAY_Ia The primary value of phase A current of line (Ia) A
9 LineBAY_Ib The primary value of phase B current of line (Ib) A
10 LineBAY_Ic The primary value of phase C current of line (Ic) A
The primary value of phase A current of CB1 (displayed only
11 LineBAY_Ia1 A
for two circuit breakers configuration)
The primary value of phase B current of CB1 (displayed only
12 LineBAY_Ib1 A
for two circuit breakers configuration)
The primary value of phase C current of CB1 (displayed
13 LineBAY_Ic1 A
only for two circuit breakers configuration)
The primary value of phase A current of CB2 (displayed only
14 LineBAY_Ia2 A
for two circuit breakers configuration)
The primary value of phase B current of CB2 (displayed only
15 LineBAY_Ib2 A
for two circuit breakers configuration)
The primary value of phase C current of CB2 (displayed
16 LineBAY_Ic2 A
only for two circuit breakers configuration)
17 LineBAY_UB1 The primary value of synchronism voltage (UB1) kV
18 LineBAY_UL2 The primary value of synchronism voltage (UB1) kV
19 LineBAY_UB2 The primary value of synchronism voltage (UB1) kV
20 LineBAY_P The primary value of active power (P) MW
21 LineBAY_Q The primary value of reactive power (Q) MVar
22 LineBAY_S The primary value of apparent power (S) MVA
23 LineBAY_Cos The value of power factor (Cos) -

Access path: Press key “▲” to enter main menu firstly. Select the item “VALUES” and press key
“ENT” to enter submenu “TELE_MESUREMENT”, and then press key “ENT”. The corresponding
primary values mentioned above are displayed on the LCD.

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 103

Chapter 5 Metering and Recording

5.2 Recording
5.2.1 General description
The PCS-902 series provides the following recording functions:

„ Event recorder

„ Disturbance recorder

These records are displayed on the LCD of the relay front panel or on the local or remote PC.
Navigate the menu to view the report through LCD screen.

5.2.2 Event recorder

5.2.2.1 General description

Event recorder includes self-supervision report, status change report of binary input and operating
report. The protective device can store 1024 records of each kind for self-supervision report and
status change report of binary input, and 1024 records of operating report in non-volatile memory.

5.2.2.2 Self-supervision report

The protective device is under automatic supervision all the time. If there are any failure or
anbnormal condition detected, such as, chip damaged, VT circuit failure and so on, it will be
logged in event recorder.

5.2.2.3 Status change report of binary input

When there is binary input is energized or de-energized, i.e., its state has changed from “0” to “1”
or from “1” to “0”, it will be logged as an event recorder.

5.2.2.4 Operating report

If operator implements some operation, such as reboot protective device, modify setting, and so
on, they will be logged as an event recorder.

5.2.3 Disturbance recorder

5.2.3.1 Application

Use the disturbance recorder to achieve a better understanding of the behavior of the power
network and related primary and secondary equipment during and after a disturbance. An analysis
of the recorded data provides valuable information that can be used to improve existing equipment.
This information can also be used when planning for and designing new installations.

5.2.3.2 Design

Disturbance recorder is consisted of fault report and fault waveform. Disturbance recorder is
initiated by fault detector element.

Disturbance recorder have two types:

1. Fault detector element picks up without operation of protective element

104 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 5 Metering and Recording

2. Fault detector element picks up with operation of protective elements.

5.2.3.3 Capacity and information of fault report

The protective device can store up to 1024 records of fault report in non-volatile memory. If a new
fault occurs when 1024 faults have been stored, the first type of fault report will be overwritten, and
then the oldest fault report will overwritten by the latest one if another new fault report is generated
again.

For each fault report, the following items are included:

„ Sequence number

Each operation will be recorded with a sequence number in the report and displayed on LCD
screen.

„ Date and time of fault occurrence

The time resolution is 1ms using the relay internal clock synchronized via GPS if connected.
Initiating date and time is when a protective fault detection operates.

„ Operating time

An operating time (not including the operating time of output relays) is recorded in the report.

„ Faulty phase

„ Fault location

To get accurate result of fault location, the following settings shall be set correctly:

1) Positive sequence line reactance [X1L]

2) Positive sequence line resistance [R1L]

3) Zero-sequence line reactance [X0L]

4) Zero-sequence line resistance [R0L]

5) Line length in km [LineLength]

„ protective elements

For the details of designation of each protective element, please refer to section 7.4.2.

5.2.3.4 Fault waveform record capacity and information

The protective device can save 64 pieces of fault waveform. If a new fault occurs when 64 fault
waveform records have been stored, the waveform of the first type of fault report will be
overwritten, and then the latest waveform record will overwrite the oldest one if another new fault
waveform is generated again. The protective device stores actual samples that are taken at a rate
of 24 samples per cycle.

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 105

Chapter 5 Metering and Recording

106 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 6 Hardware Description

Chapter 6 Hardware Description

6.1 General Description

PCS-902 series is made of a 4U height 19” chassis for panel flush mounting. Components
mounted on its front include a 320×240 dot matrix LCD, a 9 button keypad, 20 LED indicators and
a 9 pin connector for communication with PC. A monolithic micro controller is installed in the
equipment for these functions. Shown as Figure 6.1-1 front view of PCS-902.

GR
P
ESC

Figure 6.1-1 Front view of PCS-902

The 20 LED indicators are, from top to bottom, operation (HEALTHY), self-supervision (ALARM),
others are configurable.

As to buttons of the keypad, “ENT” is “enter”, “GRP” is “group number” and “ESC” is “escape”.

Figure 6.1-2 Rear view of PCS-902

This device is developed on the basis of our latest software and hardware platform, and the major
characteristics of the new platform include high reliability, great capability in anti-interference,
intellectualization and networking. See Figure 6.1-3 for hardware diagram.

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 107

Chapter 6 Hardware Description

Figure 6.1-3 Hardware diagram

6.2 Typical Wiring

4U chassis has 16 slots, and the irremovable modules are power supply module, MON module
and DSP module.

Slot No.
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 00

Figure 6.2-1 Rear view of fixed module position of 4U equipment

z If the slots from slot No.08 to slot No.10 are not used up, the BI module can be configured
at the rest slots.

z If the slots from slot No.11 to slot No.15 are not used up, the BO module can be
configured at the rest slots.

108 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 6 Hardware Description

6.2.1 Typical wiring of PCS-902

A
*

52b
B
*

C
*

Voltage input Current input

Analog input module

1.PCS-902 (conventional CT, VT and binary output)

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 00

NR1102 NR1123 NR1123 NR1401 (4I,4U) NR1504 NR1504 NR1521 NR1521 NR1521 NR1521 NR1301

MON DSP DSP AI BI BI BO BO BO BO PWR

2.PCS-902 (conventional CT and VT/ GOOSE)

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 00

NR1102 NR1123 NR1123 NR1401 (4I,4U) NR1126 NR1504 NR1504 NR1301

MON DSP DSP AI GOOSE BI BI PWR

Figure 6.2-2 Typical wiring of PCS-902 (conventional CT/VT)

Figure 6.2-3 Typical wiring of PCS-902 (ECVT)

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 109

Chapter 6 Hardware Description

In the protection system adopting electronic current and voltage transformer (ECVT), the merging
unit will merge the sample data of ECVT, and then send it to the protection device through
multi-mode optical fibre. The DSP module 1 (NR1123) and DSP module 2 (NR1123) of protection
device receive the data from merging unit respectively through the optical-fibre interface to
complete the protection calculation and logic judgment.

The difference between the hardware platform based on ECVT and the hardware platform based
on conventional CT/VT lies in the receiving module of sample data only, and the protective device
receives the sampling data of merging unit through multi-mode optical fibre.

6.3 Terminal Definition

Equipment consists of power supply module, MON module, DSP module, Analog input module,
opto-coupler input module, tripping output module, and signal output module. The definition and
application of each module and its terminal is introduced as follows.

6.3.1 PWR Module (NR1301)

The power supply module is a DC/DC or AC/DC converter with electrical insulation between input
and output. The power supply module has an input voltage range as described in chapter 2
“Technical Data”. The standardized output voltages are +3.3V, +5V, ±12V and +24V DC. The
tolerances of the output voltages are continuously monitored.

The +3.3V DC output provides power supply for the microchip processors, and the +5V DC output
provides power supply for all the electrical elements that need +5V DC power supply in this device.
The ±12V DC output provides power supply for A/D conversion circuits in this device, and the
+24V DC output provides power supply for the static relays of this device.

The use of an external miniature circuit breaker is recommended. The miniature circuit breaker
must be in the on position when the device is in operation and in the off position when the device is
in cold reserve.

A 12-pin connector is fixed on the front of the power supply module. The pin definition of the
connector is described as below.

110 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 6 Hardware Description

Figure 6.3-1 Pin definition of DC power supply module NR1301A

Pin No. Symbol Description

01 BO_COM1 Common terminal 1.
01, 02 BO_Fail_1 Binary output 1 of equipment failure.
01, 03 BO_Alm_Abnor_1 Binary output 1 of equipment abnormality alarm.
04 BO_COM2 Common terminal 2.
01, 05 BO_Fail_2 Binary output 2 of equipment failure.
01, 06 BO_Alm_Abnor_2 Binary output 2 of equipment abnormality alarm.
07 OPTO+ Pins 07 and 08 are 24V power supply output for the
binary input module. Pin 07 is 24V+ and Pin 08 is 24V-,
08 OPTO-
the rated current of this power supply is 200mA.
09 Blank Not used
10 PWR+ Positive input of power supply for the equipment
11 PWR- Negative input of power supply for the equipment
12 GND Grounded connection of this equipment

Note!

The rated voltage of DC power supply module is self-adaptive to 220Vdc and 110Vdc, but
the power supply in other DC voltage level or power supply of AC voltage need to be

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 111

Chapter 6 Hardware Description

specially ordered, and check if the rated voltage of power supply module is the same as
the voltage of external control power supply before equipment being put into service.

Note!

The DC power supply module provides pin 12 and earth connector for grounding of
equipment. The pin 12 shall be connected to earth connector and the connected to the
earth copper bar of panel via dedicated grounding wire.

Note!

Efficient grounding is the most important measure for equipment to prevent EMI, so
efficient grounding must be ensured before the device is put into operation.

6.3.2 Pins definition of MON module (NR 1102)

The terminals of MON modules and its wiring method are shown in the following figure.

The MON module consists of high-performance built-in processor, FLASH, SRAM, SDRAM,
Ethernet controller and other peripherals. Its functions include management of the complete
device, human machine interface, communication and waveform recording etc.

The MON module uses the internal bus to receive the data from other modules of the device. It
communicates with the LCD module by RS-485 bus. This module is provided with 100BaseT
Ethernet interfaces, RS-485 communication interfaces, PPS/IRIG-B differential time
synchronization interface and RS-232 printing interface.

112 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 6 Hardware Description

NR1102A NR1102B NR1102C

ETHERNET 1 ETHERNET 1 ETHERNET 1

To SCADA To SCADA
ETHERNET 2 ETHERNET 2 ETHERNET 2
To SCADA
ETHERNET 3

ETHERNET 4

SYN+ 01 SYN+ 01 SYN+ 01

SYN- 02 SYN- 02 SYN- 02

To GPS To GPS To GPS
SHLD 03 SHLD 03 SHLD 03

GND 04 GND 04 GND 04

RXD 05 RXD 05 RXD 05

TXD 06 To PRINT TXD 06 To PRINT TXD 06 To PRINT

SGND 07 SGND 07 SGND 07

Figure 6.3-2 Rear view of MON modules

Module ID Memory Interface Physical Layer

NR1102A 64M DDR 2 RJ45 Ethernet Twisted pair wire
NR1102B 64M DDR 4 RJ45 Ethernet Twisted pair wire
NR1102C 128M DDR 2 RJ45 Ethernet Twisted pair wire
NR1102D 128M DDR 4 RJ45 Ethernet Twisted pair wire
2 RJ45 Ethernet Twisted pair wire
NR1102H 128M DDR
2 FO Ethernet Optical fibre SC
2 RJ45 Ethernet Twisted pair wire
NR1102I 128M DDR
2 FO Ethernet Optical fibre ST

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 113

Chapter 6 Hardware Description

COM
GPS
PRINT
Figure 6.3-3 Wiring of communication interface

The correct method of connection is shown in Figure 6.3-3. Generally, the shielded cables with two
pairs of twisted pairs inside shall be applied. One pair of the twisted pairs are respectively used to
connect the “+” and “–” terminals of difference signal; the other pair of twisted pairs are used to
connect the signal ground of the interface, i.e. connect the signal groundings of all the devices
connected with the bus to the twisted pair. The module reserves a free terminal for all the
communication ports; the free terminal has no connection with any signal of the device; it is used
to connect the external shields of the two cables when connecting multiple devices in series. The
external shield of cable shall be grounded at one of the ends.

6.3.3 DSP Module 1 (Protection Calculation)

The module consists of high-performance digital signal processor, optical-fibre interface, 16-digit
high-accuracy ADC that can perform synchronous sampling and other peripherals. The functions
of this module include analog data acquisition, sample data exchanging with the opposite side,
calculation of protection logic and tripping output etc.

When the module is connected to conventional CT/VT, it can perform the synchronous data
acquisition through the AC input board; when the module is connected to ECVT, it can receive the
real-time synchronous sample data from merging unit through the multi-mode optical-fibre
interface.

The module can provide 2,048 kbit/s or 64 kbit/s single-mode optical-fibre to exchange data and
signal with the opposite-side protection device.

6.3.4 DSP Module 2 (Fault Detector Calculation)

The module consists of high-performance digital signal processor, optical-fibre interface, 16-digit
high-accuracy ADC that can perform synchronous sampling and other peripherals. The functions
of this module include analog data acquisition, calculation of general fault detector elements and
providing positive power supply to output relay.

When the module is connected to conventional CT/VT, it can perform the synchronous data
acquisition through the AC input board; when the module is connected to ECVT, it can receive the

114 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 6 Hardware Description

real-time synchronous sample data from merging unit through the multi-mode optical-fibre
interface.

The indicators on DSP module are for researcher reference only.

The following figure is the type definition for DSP module; corresponding module shall be adopted
in accordance with concrete situation.

Figure 6.3-4 DSP module

Where:

Type D: it is used to convential CT/VT, and the device is provided with no optical-fibre channel;

Type E: it is used to convential CT/VT, and the device is provided with optical-fibre channel;

Type F: it is used to ECVT, and the device is provided with no optical-fibre channel;

Type G type module is used to ECVT; and the device is provided with optical-fibre channel;

Type K: it is used to double ECVT (multi-breaker cases), and the device is provided with
optical-fibre channel.

6.3.5 AI Module
The protection device which supports ECVT should not be equipped with this module. The slot
numbers of the module are 04 and 05. The AI module (NR1401) is applicable for the plant or
station with analog VT and CT.

There are tow types of AI module with rating 5 A or 1 A. Please declare which kind of AI module is
needed before ordering.

1) One circuit breaker configuration

For one circuit breaker configuration, IA, IB, IC and 3I0 are phase current and zero-sequence
current input to AI module separately. Terminal 0401, 0403, 0405 are polarity marks. It is assumed

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 115

Chapter 6 Hardware Description

that polarity mark of CT installed on line is at line side.

3I0 derived is used for calculation of zero-sequence directional element and zero-sequence
overcurrent element, but 3I0 measured is used for zero-sequence current fault detector element.
Therefore, 3I0 measured shall be connected to the equipment, otherwise all relevant
zero-sequence current protection will be disabled. Maximum linear range of the current converter
is 30In. Table 6.3-1 lists the pin number and its definition of AI module.

Table 6.3-1 Terminal definition of AI module

Terminal No. Definition Definition

01 Ia The current of phase A (IA Polarity mark)
02 Ian The current of phase A (IA')
03 Ib The current of phase B (IB Polarity mark)
04 Ibn The current of phase B (IB')
05 Ic The current of phase C (IC Polarity mark)
06 Icn The current of phase C (IC')
07 I0 Zero-sequence current (3I0 Polarity mark)
08 I0n Zero-sequence current (3I0')
09 Reserve
10 Reserve
11 Reserve
12 Reserve
13 Ua The voltage of phase A (UA Polarity mark)
14 Uan The voltage of phase A (UA’)
15 Ub The voltage of phase B (UB Polarity mark)
16 Ubn The voltage of phase B (UB’)
17 Uc The voltage of phase C (UC Polarity mark)
18 Ucn The voltage of phase C (UC’)
19 UB1 The voltage of bus 1 (UB1 Polarity mark)
20 UB1n The voltage of bus 1 (UB1’)
21 UL2 The voltage of line 2 (UL2 Polarity mark)
22 UL2n The voltage of line 2 (UL2’)
23 UB2 The voltage of bus 2 (UB2 Polarity mark)
24 UB2n The voltage of bus 2 (UB2’)
25 GND Ground

2) Two circuit breakers configuration

For two circuit breakers configuration, IA1, IB1, IC1 and IA2, IB2, IC2 are phase current input to AI
module corresponding to CB1 and CB2 respectively. Terminal 0401, 0403, 0405, 0407, 0409 and
0411 are polarity marks. It is assumed that polarity mark of CT installed on line is at line side.
Maximum linear range of the current converter is 30In. Table 6.3-1 lists the pin number and its
definition of AI module.

Table 6.3-2 Terminal definition of AI module

116 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 6 Hardware Description

Terminal No. Definition Definition

01 Ia1 The current of phase A (IA Polarity mark)
02 Ia1n The current of phase A (IA')
03 Ib1 The current of phase B (IB Polarity mark)
04 Ib1n The current of phase B (IB')
05 Ic1 The current of phase C (IC Polarity mark)
06 Ic1n The current of phase C (IC')
07 Ia2 The current of phase A (IA2 Polarity mark)
08 Ia2n The current of phase A (IA2')
09 Ib2 The current of phase B (IB2 Polarity mark)
10 Ib2n The current of phase B (IB2')
11 Ic2 The current of phase C (IC2 Polarity mark)
12 Ic2n The current of phase C (IC2')
13 Ua The voltage of phase A (UA Polarity mark)
14 Uan The voltage of phase A (UA’)
15 Ub The voltage of phase B (UB Polarity mark)
16 Ubn The voltage of phase B (UB’)
17 Uc The voltage of phase C (UC Polarity mark)
18 Ucn The voltage of phase C (UC’)
19 UB1 The voltage of bus 1 (UB1 Polarity mark)
20 UB1n The voltage of bus 1 (UB1’)
21 UL2 The voltage of line 2 (UL2 Polarity mark)
22 UL2n The voltage of line 2 (UL2’)
23 UB2 The voltage of bus 2 (UB2 Polarity mark)
24 UB2n The voltage of bus 2 (UB2’)
25 GND Ground

UA, UB, and UC are phase voltage input to AI module. UB1, UL2, UB2 are the bus or line voltage
used for synchrocheck, it could be any phase-to-ground voltage or phase-to-phase voltage. If the
auto-reclosing is disabled or enabled but without any check, the synchronism check voltage
should be disconnected.

Terminal 0425 is ground point. It shall be connected to ground bus.

6.3.6 GOOSE Module (Optional)

This module consists of high-performance digital signal processor, two 100M optical-fibre Ethernet,
two 100M RJ-45 Ethernet and other peripherals. The module supports GOOSE function and IEC
61850-9-2 Protocols. Its functions include that the protective device receives data from the
merging unit and sending GOOSE command to the intelligent control device etc. This module is
not required when the GOOSE function is not applied.

The sending and receiving functions of GOOSE should be completed through configuring the
sending module and receiving module.

Optional types of GOOSE module are listed in the following.

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 117

Chapter 6 Hardware Description

Module ID Interface Physical Layer Description

NR1126A 2 Ethernet SC multi-mode optical fibre
2 Ethernet SC multi-mode optical fibre
NR1126B Support IEC61850, GOOSE and
IRIGB ST
IEC61850-9-2, receiving and
NR1126C 2 Ethernet ST multi-mode optical fibre
sending data
2 Ethernet ST multi-mode optical fibre
NR1126D
IRIGB ST

6.3.7 Binary Input Module (NR1504)

The NR1504 module is a standard binary input module and three binary input modules at most
can be equipped with one device. The inputted voltage can be selected to be 24V, 48V, 110V,
220V, 125V and 250V and the module has opto-coupler power monitor circuit.

A 22-pin connector is fixed on the front of the binary input module, which can provide 18 binary
inputs. Except for terminal 0802~0805, other binary inputs are configurable. The pin definition of
the connector of binary input module located in slot 08 is described as below. [BI_n](n=1,2,…,14
can be configured as a specified binary input by PCS-PC software.

118 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 6 Hardware Description

Opto+ 01

BI_Pulse_GPS 02
BI_Print 03

BI_BlkComm 04

BI_RstTarg 05

BI_1 06

BI_2 07

08

BI_3 09

BI_4 10

BI_5 11

BI_6 12

BI_7 13

BI_8 14

15

BI_9 16

BI_10 17

BI_11 18

BI_12 19

BI_13 20

BI_14 21

Opto- 22

Figure 6.3-5 Pin definition of binary input module NR1504

Pin No. Symbol Description

01 Opto+ Positive pole of power supply of the module
02 BI_Pulse_GPS Binary input of time synchronization pulse
03 BI_Print Binary input of triggering printing
Binary input of blocking communication between equipment
04 BI_BlkComm and substation automatic system (SAS) or remote terminal unit
(RTU).
05 BI_RstTarg Binary input of resetting signal of protective equipment.
06 BI_1 Configurable binary input 1.
07 BI_2 Configurable binary input 2.
08 Blank
09 BI_3 Configurable binary input 3.
10 BI_4 Configurable binary input 4.
11 BI_5 Configurable binary input 5.
12 BI_6 Configurable binary input 6.
13 BI_7 Configurable binary input 7.

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 119

Chapter 6 Hardware Description

Pin No. Symbol Description

14 BI_8 Configurable binary input 8.
15 Blank
16 BI_9 Configurable binary input 9.
17 BI_10 Configurable binary input 10.
18 BI_11 Configurable binary input 11.
19 BI_12 Configurable binary input 12.
20 BI_13 Configurable binary input 13.
21 BI_14 Configurable binary input 14.
22 Opto+ Negative pole of power supply of the module

1. Terminal 02

Binary input: [BI_Pulse_GPS]

It is used to receive clock synchronism signal from GPS or other equipment used clock
synchronism, the binary input [BI_Pulse_GPS] will change from “0” to “1” once per second or per
minute depended on the setting [GPS_Pulse]. When setting [GPS_Pulse] is set to “1”, the
equipment receives PPM (pulse per minute), otherwise, receives PPS (pulse per second). Clock
synchronism via RS-485 bus is recommended. Only one of them can be selected.

2. Terminal 03

Binary input: [BI_Print]

It is used to manually to trigger printing latest report when the equipment is configured as manual
printing mode by logic setting [En_Auto_Print]=0. The printer button is located on the panel usually.
If the equipment is configured as automatic printing mode ([En_Auto_Print]=1), report will be
printed automatically as soon as it is formed.

3. Terminal 04

Binary input: [BI_BlkComm]

It is used to block monitoring direction communication when the protective device is maintained. A
link located on the panel is used for that. When the equipment is in maintenance or commissioning
status, this link should be closed. All of the reports will not be sent via communication port then,
but local displaying and printing are still working. This link should be open during normal operation
condition.

4. Terminal 05

Binary input: [BI_RstTarg]

It is used to manually reset latching signal relay and LCD displaying. The reset is done by pressing
a button on the panel or by remote command via communication channel.

Note!

120 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 6 Hardware Description

The rated voltage of binary input is optional: 24V, 46V, 110V , 220V, 125V or 250V, which
must be definitely declared in the technical scheme and the contract. It is necessary to
check whether the rated voltage of BI module meets the demand of the engineering before
putting the relay into operation.

The application of the binary input [BI_BlkComm] for digital substation communication adopting
IEC61850 protocol is given as follows.

A. Processing mechanism for MMS (Manufacturing Message Specification) message

1) The protection device should send the state of this binary input to client.

2) When this binary input is energized, the bit “Test” of quality (Q) in the message sent should
be set as “1”.

3) When this binary input is energized, the client cannot remote control the isolator link and
circuit breaker, modify settings and switch setting group.

4) According to the value of the bit “Test” of quality (Q) in the message sent, the client
discriminate whether this message is maintenance message, and then deal with it correspondingly.
If the message is the maintenance message, the content of the message will be not displayed
real-time message window, not issue audio alarm, but should refresh the picture so as to ensure
that the state of the picture is in step with the actual state. The maintenance message should be
stored, and can be inquired by independent window.

B. Processing mechanism for GOOSE message

1) When this binary input is energized, the bit “Test” in the GOOSE message sent by the
protection device should be set as “1”.

2) For the receiving end of GOOSE message, it will compare the value of the bit “Test” in the
GOOSE message received by it with the state of its own binary input (i..e [BI_BlkComm]),
the message will be thought as invalid unless they are conformable.

C. Processing mechanism for SV (Sampling Value) message

1) When this binary input of merging unit is energized, the bit “Test” of quality (Q) of sampling
data in the SV message sent should be set as “1”.

2) For the receiving end of SV message, if the value of bit “Test” of quality (Q) of sampling data
in the SV message received by it is “1”, the relevant protection functions will be disabled, but
under maintenance state, the protection device should calculate and display the magnitude
of sampling data.

3) For duplicated protection function configurations, all merging units of control module
configured to receive sampling should be also duplicated. Both dual protection devices and
dual merging units should be fully independent each other, and one of them is in
maintenance state will not affect the normal operation of the other.

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 121

Chapter 6 Hardware Description

6.3.8 Binary Output Module

6.3.8.1 Tripping Output Module (NR1521)

NR1521A, NR1521B and NR1521C modules are three standard binary output modules. NR1521A
can provide 11 tripping output contacts, and each output contact will be controlled by the fault
detector. NR1521B can provide 9 tripping output contacts and two signal output contacts, and
each output contact can be controlled separately by positive power supply of fault detector.
NR1521C can provide 11 tripping output contacts without being controlled by positive power
supply of fault detector. The contacts provided by NR1521A, NR1521B and NR1521C are all
normally open (NO) contacts.

Output contact can be configured as a specified tripping output contact and a signal output contact
respectively by PCS-PC software according to user requirement.

A 22-pin connector is fixed on the front of this module. The pin definition of the connector is
described as below.

Figure 6.3-6 Pin definition of tripping output module

6.3.9 Display Panel

The display panel consists of liquid crystal display module, keyboard, indicator lamp and ARM
processor. The functions of ARM processor include display control of the liquid crystal display
module, keyboard processing, and exchanging data with the CPU through serial port etc. The
liquid crystal display module is a high-performance grand liquid crystal panel with soft back lighting,
which has a user-friendly interface and an extensive display range.

122 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 7 Configurable Function

Chapter 7 Configurable Function

7.1 General Description

By adoption of PCS-PC software, it is able to make system configuration, function configuration,

binary input and binary output configuration, LED indicator configuration and programming logic
for PCS-902.

7.2 Introduction on PCS-PC software

PCS-PC software, assorted with UAPC platform device, is developed in order to meet customer’s
demand on functions of device such as device configuration and programmable design. It selects
substation as the core of data management and the device as fundamental unit, supporting one
substation joint to govern many ones of the devices. The software provides on-line and off-line
functions: on-line mode: Ethernet connected with the device to support IEC 60870-5-103 protocol
and downloading of binary files through Ethernet net; off-line mode: off-line setting configuration.
In addition, it also supports programmable logic to meet customer’s corresponding demand. For
any detail, please refer to Instruction Manual of PCS-PC Auxiliary Software.

Overall functions:

z Protective equipment Configuration (off-line function)

z Programmable logic (off-line function)

z Setting configuration (off-line & on-line function)

z Real-time display of analogue and digital quantity of device (on-line function)

z Display of sequence of report (SOE) (on-line function)

z Analysis of waveform (on-line function)

z File downloading/uploading (on-line function)

7.3 Protective Device Configuration

7.3.1 System Configuration

Warning: The system configuration shall only be operated by professionals who are

familiar with protection object and protection device. Or else, any incorrect configuration
may cause serious damage to the device during its operation. In general, these
configuration works have been completed before equipment leaving factory.

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 123

Chapter 7 Configurable Function

Warning: If the system configuration is really need, user must select “Run the whole

script” item in the right click menu before other configuration operations.

7.3.1.1 Configuration of CB configuration

One CB configuration or two CB configuration can be selected by the menu of

“CB_Number_Config”.

7.3.2 Function Configuration

Whether some protection is enabled or disabled shall be configured. In case of “Disable” is
selected, the protective function in protective equipment will be hidden.

7.3.3 Configuration of LED Indicators

1. This protection device provides 20 LED indicators, besides 2 defined LED indicators, such as,
“HEALTHY” LED and “ALARM“ LED, the rest 18 LEDs can be configured by users as
required.

2. The right tree structure of the column “ ” in the software provides

elements for lighting up, including protection elements, alarm elements and binary input
elements.

3. Use the column “ ” to choose whether hold LED or not. In case of the check box is
selected, resetting must be performed by the resetting button once it is lit. In case of the check
box is blank, the signals will reset automatically once the input signal returns.

4. If users hope the “Y_LED_5” is lit when the device is ready for AR of CB1, configure it as the
following picture.

5. The label of the “Y_LED_5” can be edited by double-click it.

124 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 7 Configurable Function

6. The signal in the column of “Signal” can be deleted by right-click, and then left-click to execute
delete command.

7. If the original “Led Label” that starts with a “Y” means it is a yellow LED and starts with a “R”
means it is a red LED.

7.3.4 Configuration of Binary Input

1. Pin number of user-defined binary input on module is provided by the column

“ ” on the left of the interface.

2. The next step is to set time delay “ ” and broadening time “ ”

(unit: ms) of the corresponding binary inputs, which can be set separately.

3. The column “ ” at the right is the corresponding binary

inputs provided, which needs the user to configure. User can draw it from the right list.

4. The signal in the column of “Int. Signal” can be deleted by right-click, and then left-click to
execute delete command.

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 125

Chapter 7 Configurable Function

7.3.5 Configuration of Binary Output

1. The function is applied for configuration of binary output terminals of BO module (NR1521) of
the protective device. There are total 44 binary output contacts.

2. Users can draw the elements from the column “ ” at the right to
point to a or several binary output contact. The optional signals include: Trip Elements, Alarm,
Binary Change and Other Type (Reserved).

3. In the event that user want to use the contact “ ” as output

contacts of closing CB1, find the corresponding output signal in the right tree structure and
draw it to the corresponding position as below.

4. The signal added in the column of “Int. Signal” can be deleted by right-click, and then left-click
to execute delete command.

126 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 7 Configurable Function

7.3.6 Setting configuration

After function configuration is finished, disabled protective function is hidden in equipment and in
setting configuration list of PCS-PC software.

Users can configure the equipment parameters, system settings and etc.

Users can select to show or hide some setting, and modify typical setting values

7.4 Configurable Signal List

7.4.1 Configurable Binary Input

All the configurable binary input signal for this device have been listed in the following table (If any
signal is not configured, the default value will be adopted as the current value).

For the specific project, some signals relevant to synchrocheck module, auto-reclosing module
and breaker failure protection module maybe with the suffix of “_CB1” and “_CB2” what represent
the signals correspond to synchrocheck module, auto-reclosing module and breaker failure
protection module for circuit breaker 1 and circuit breaker 2 respectively.

Table 7.4-1 Configurable binary input signal

No. Item Default Description

Value
Binary input which can initiate sending permissive signal to
1. BI_ExTrp_PilotP 0 remote end due to external protection (such as busbar
protection) operating
2. BI_52b_Pha 0 Normally closed auxiliary contact of phase A of

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 127

Chapter 7 Configurable Function

corresponding circuit breaker

Normally closed auxiliary contact of phase B of
3. BI_52b_Phb 0
corresponding circuit breaker
Normally closed auxiliary contact of phase C of
4. BI_52b_Phc 0
corresponding circuit breaker
5. BI_MCB_VT_Line 0 Protection used VT is out of service
6. BI_TrigOscillog 0 Binary input for initiating recording waveform manually
Binary input for receiving permissive signal, in the case of
7. BI_Recv1 0 phase-segregated command mode, it is the binary input for
receiving signal of phase A
Binary input for receiving permissive signal of phase B in the
8. BI_RecvB 0
case of phase-segregated command mode
Binary input for receiving permissive signal of phase C in the
9. BI_RecvC 0
case of phase-segregated command mode
Binary input for receiving permissive signal (only for pilot
10. BI_Recv2 0 zero-sequence overcurrent protection that independent
channel is used)
11. BI_En_Z1 1 Binary input for enabling zone 1 of distance element
Binary input of transfer tripping command from the remote
12. BI_RMT_TT 0
end
Binary input of auxiliary normally closed contact of line
13. BI_DS_Line 0
disconnector
14. BI_Abnor_Ch1 0 Binary input for indicating pilot channel 1 is abnormal
15. BI_Abnor_Ch2 0 Binary input for indicating pilot channel 2 is abnormal
16. UL1D_Clsd 0 Normally closed (NC) contacts of the disconnector for line 1
17. UL1D_Open 0 Normally open (NO) contacts of the disconnector for line 1
18. MCB_VT_UL1 0 Normally closed (NC) contacts of the MCB for line 1 voltage
19. UL2D_Clsd 0 Normally closed (NC) contacts of the disconnector for line 2
20. UL2D_Open 0 Normally open (NO) contacts of the disconnector for line 2
21. MCB_VT_UL2 0 Normally closed (NC) contacts of the MCB for line 2 voltage
22. UB1D_Clsd 0 Normally closed (NC) contacts of the disconnector for bus 1
23. UB1D_Open 0 Normally open (NO) contacts of the disconnector for bus 1
24. MCB_VT_UB1 0 Normally closed (NC) contacts of the MCB for bus 1 voltage
25. UB2D_Clsd 0 Normally closed (NC) contacts of the disconnector for bus 2
26. UB2D_Open 0 Normally open (NO) contacts of the disconnector for bus 2
27. MCB_VT_UB2 0 Normally closed (NC) contacts of the MCB for bus 2 voltage
Total blocking signal of synchrocheck function for AR of
28. Blk_SYN 0
corresponding circuit breaker
The binary input of blocking synchronism check for AR of
29. Blk_SynChk 0
corresponding circuit breaker
The binary input of blocking dead check for AR of
30. Blk_DeadChk 0
corresponding circuit breaker
31. BI_ManCls 0 Triggering signal: manually closing the corresponding circuit

128 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 7 Configurable Function

breaker if the value is “1”

Total blocking signal of synchrocheck function for manual
32. Blk_SYN_M 0
closing of corresponding circuit breaker
The binary input of blocking synchronism check for manual
33. Blk_SynChk_M 0
closing of corresponding circuit breaker
The binary input of blocking dead check for manual closing of
34. Blk_DeadChk_M 0
corresponding circuit breaker
Binary input for enabling AR of corresponding circuit breaker.
35. EnableAR 1 If the logic setting [ExtCtrl_AROn]=1, enabling AR will be
controlled by the external input
Binary input for disabling AR of corresponding circuit breaker.
36. DisableAR 0 If the logic setting [ExtCtrl_AROn]=1, disabling AR will be
controlled by the external input
37. EBI_Opt1_AR 0 The option 1 of AR mode for corresponding circuit breaker
38. EBI_Opt2_AR 0 The option 2 of AR mode for corresponding circuit breaker
The external single-pole tripping binary input from line
39. BI_ExTrp1P_L 0
protection
The external three-pole tripping binary input from line
40. BI_ExTrp3P_L 0
protection
The external three-pole tripping binary input from
41. BI_ExTrp3P_GT 0
transformer, generator or reactor protection

Once the binary input is energized, breaker failure protection

42. BI_BF_Start_WOI 0 can be chose to be initiated by normally closed contact of
circuit breaker.

The external phase-A tripping signal for corresponding circuit

43. BI_ExTrpA 0
breaker
The external phase-B tripping signal for corresponding circuit
44. BI_ExTrpB 0
breaker
The external phase-C tripping signal for corresponding circuit
45. BI_ExTrpC 0
breaker
Binary input of blocking reclosing, usually it is connected with
46. EBI_Lockout 0 the operating signals of definite-time protection, transformer
protection and busbar differential protection, etc.
The input of indicating the alarm signal that the carrier
47. PLCLost 0
channel is lost
Waiting for the reclosing permissive signal from master
48. WaitMaster 0
(when reclosing multiple circuit breakers)
The input for indicating whether circuit breaker has enough
49. Healthy_CB 1
energy to perform the function: open-close-open function
AR blocking signal of the corresponding circuit breaker which
50. Blk_AROn 0 will be latched and only can be released by the signal
[Blk_AROff]
51. Blk_AROff 0 Releasing command for the AR blocking signal [Blk_AROn]

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 129

Chapter 7 Configurable Function

of the corresponding circuit breaker

Input signal for adopting 3-pole tripping mode for
52. CMD_3pTrip 0
corresponding circuit breaker.

7.4.2 Configurable Binary Output

All the configurable binary output signal for this device have been listed in the following table.

Table 7.4-2 Configurable binary output signal

No. Signal Description

Pilot protection output signal
1. Op_Z_PilotP Operation signal of pilot distance protection
Operation signal of pilot protection under weak infeed
2. Op_WE_POTT
condition
Operation signal of pilot zero sequence overcurrent
3. Op_ROC_POTT protection (it will share channel with pilot distance
protection)
Operation signal of pilot zero sequence overcurrent
4. Op_DEF_PilotP
protection that independent channel is used
Permissive signal
The binary output of sending permissive signal 1, in the
5. Send1 case of phase-segregated command mode, it is the binary
output of sending permissive signal of phase A
The binary output of sending permissive signal of phase B
6. SendB
in the case of phase-segregated command mode
The binary output of sending permissive signal of phase C
7. SendC
in the case of phase-segregated command mode
The binary output of sending permissive signal 2 (only for
8. Send2 pilot zero-sequence overcurrent protection that
independent channel is used)
9. Op_TT Transfer trip element operates
Binary input [BI_RMT_TT] is energized and duration is
10. Alm_TT
longer than 10s
Distance protection
11. Op_Z_DPFC DPFC distance protection operates to trip
12. Op_Z1 Zone 1 of distance protection operates to trip
13. Op_Z2 Zone 2 of distance protection operates to trip
14. Op_Z3 Zone 3 of distance protection operates to trip
15. Op_Z_Rev Reverse distance protection operates to trip
Accelerate distance protection to trip when manual closing
16. Op_Z_SOTF
or auto-reclosing onto an existing fault
Zero sequence overcurrent protection
Stage 1 of zero-sequence overcurrent protection operates
17. Op_ROC1
to trip

130 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 7 Configurable Function

Stage 2 of zero-sequence overcurrent protection operates

18. Op_ROC2
to trip
Stage 3 of zero-sequence overcurrent protection operates
19. Op_ROC3
to trip
Stage 4 of zero-sequence overcurrent protection operates
20. Op_ROC4
to trip
Inverse-time zero-sequence overcurrent protection
21. Op_InvROC
operates to trip
22. Op_ROC_SOTF Zero-sequence SOTF protection operates to trip
Thermal overload element
23. Op_Ovld2_Trp Stage 2 of thermal overload element operates to trip
Stage 1 of thermal overload element operates to issue
24. Alm_OvLd1
alarm signal
Stage 2 of thermal overload element operates to issue
25. Alm_OvLd2
alarm signal
Overcurrent protection for VT circuit failure
Phase overcurrent protection for VT circuit failure operates
26. Op_OC_VTS
to trip
Zero-sequence overcurrent protection for VT circuit failure
27. Op_ROC_VTS
operates to trip
Stub protection
28. Op_OC_Stub Stub overcurrent protection operates to trip
Overvoltage protection
29. Op_OV1 Stage 1 of over voltage protection operates to trip
30. Op_OV2 Stage 2 of over voltage protection operates to trip
31. BO_OV_Init_TT Over voltage protection operates to initiate transfer tripping
Undervoltage protection
32. Op_UV1 Stage 1 of under voltage protection operates to trip
33. Op_UV2 Stage 2 of under voltage protection operates to trip
34. Alm_UV1 Under voltage protection operates to issue an alarm signal
Breaker failure protection
Breaker failure protection operates to re-trip phase-A of
35. Op_ReTrpA
circuit breaker
Breaker failure protection operates to re-trip phase-B of
36. Op_ReTrpB
circuit breaker
Breaker failure protection operates to re-trip phase-C of
37. Op_ReTrpC
circuit breaker
Breaker failure protection operates to re-trip three phases
38. Op_ReTrp3P
of circuit breaker
39. Op_BFP1 Stage 1 of breaker failure protection operates
Stage 2 of breaker failure protection operates to trip(It will
40. Op_BFP2
reset once the operating condition is not met)
41. BFP_OC_Ia Phase current criterion of phase-A for breaker failure

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 131

Chapter 7 Configurable Function

protection is met
Phase current criterion of phase-B for breaker failure
42. BFP_OC_Ib
protection is met
Phase current criterion of phase-C for breaker failure
43. BFP_OC_Ic
protection is met
Zero-sequence current criterion for breaker failure
44. BFP_OC_I0
protection is met
Negative-sequence current criterion for breaker failure
45. BFP_OC_I2
protection is met
Synchronism check
46. UL1_Sel Voltage of line 1 is selected
47. UL2_Sel Voltage of line 2 is selected
48. UB1_Sel Voltage of bus 1 is selected
49. UB2_Sel Voltage of bus 2 is selected
50. Invalid_Sel Voltage selection is invalid
The binary output for indicating frequency difference
51. fDiffOk
condition for synchronism check for AR is met
The binary output for indicating voltage difference condition
52. UDiffOk
for synchronism check for AR is met
The binary output for indicating phase difference condition
53. phiDiffOk
for synchronism check for AR is met
54. DLDBOk Dead line and dead bus condition is met
55. DLLBOk Dead line and live bus condition is met
56. LLDBOk Live line and dead bus condition is met
57. ULLive The line voltage is greater than the voltage setting [V_Live]
58. ULDead The line voltage is smaller than the voltage setting [V_Live]
59. UBLive The bus voltage is greater than the voltage setting [V_Live]
60. UBDead The bus voltage is smaller than the voltage setting [V_Live]
The binary output for indicating dead check condition for
61. DeadChkOk
AR is met
The binary output for indicating synchronism check
62. SynChkOk
condition for AR is met
The binary output for indicating synchrocheck condition for
63. SYNOk
AR is met
64. Alm_VTS_UB Synchronous voltage circuit of bus voltage is abnormal
65. Alm_VTS_UL Synchronous voltage circuit of line voltage is abnormal
66. ManCls_Out Output of manual closing signal
The binary output for indicating synchrocheck condition for
67. SYNOk_M
manual closing is met
The binary output for indicating synchronism check
68. SynChkOk_M
condition for manual closing is met
The binary output for indicating dead check condition for
69. DeadChkOk_M
manual closing is met

132 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 7 Configurable Function

The binary output for indicating voltage difference condition

70. UDiffOk_M
for synchronism check for manual closing is met
The binary output for indicating phase difference condition
71. phiDiffOk_M
for synchronism check for manual closing is met
The binary output for indicating change rate of frequency
72. fDiffDtOk_M difference condition for synchronism check for manual
closing is met
Bus frequency must not deviate from the rated frequency
73. fBus_Ok_M
more than ±5Hz
Line frequency must not deviate from the rated frequency
74. fLine_Ok_M
more than ±5Hz
The binary output for indicating frequency difference
75. fDiffOk_M
condition for synchronism check for manual closing is met
76. SYN_Fail_M Synchrocheck for manual closing fails
77. SYN_InProg_M Synchrocheck for manual closing is in progress
Auto-reclosure
78. AR_On Automatic reclosure is enabled
79. AR_Off Automatic reclosure is disabled
80. Ready_AR Automatic reclosure have been ready for reclosing cycle
81. AR_Locked Automatic reclosure is blocked
82. Active_AR Automatic reclosing logic is actived
83. Inprog_AR Automatic reclosing cycle is in progress
84. Inprog_1Ph-Shot1_AR The first 1-pole AR cycle is in progress
85. Inprog_3Ph-Shot1_AR The first 3-pole AR cycle is in progress
Waiting signal of automatic reclosing which will be sent to
86. WaitToSlave
slave (when reclosing multiple circuit breakers)
87. AR_Out Output of auto-reclosing signal
Single-phase circuit breaker will be tripped once protection
88. Prep_Trp1P
device operates
Three-phase circuit breaker will be tripped once protection
89. Prep_Trp3P
device operates
90. Fail_AR Auto-reclosing fails
91. SYN_Fail Synchrocheck for AR fails
92. Mode_1PAR Output of 1-pole AR mode
93. Mode_3PAR Output of 3-pole AR mode
94. Mode_1/3PAR Output of 1/3-pole AR mode
95. BO_BlkAR Output of blocking AR signal
Tripping logic
96. Op_GFD Fault detector on fault detector calculation module picks up
97. TripA Tripping command of phase A
98. TripB Tripping command of phase B
99. TripC Tripping command of phase C
100. LockAR AR blocking command

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 133

Chapter 7 Configurable Function

101. Trp3Pole Three phases tripping command

102. Trp1Pole Any phase tripping command
Output of stage 2 of breaker failure protection (It will not
103. BFP2_Out
reset until CB have been tripped)
Common logic signal
Device will be blocked due to serious hardware failure or
104. Fail abnormality is detected and the LED “HEALTHY” will be
extinguished.
A common abnormality is detected and a certain number of
105. Alarm protections functions are blocked while the other functions
can still work. The LED “ALARM” will be turned on.
The protection device is under the state of communication
106. Alarm_BO_Test test. No special treatment is needed, and only wait for the
completion of testing
Value of any setting is out of scope. The device will be
107. Alm_Setting_Out-of-Scope blocked. Please put the protective device out of service at
once and inform the factory or agency to maintain it.
Mismatch between the configuration of plug-in boards and
the designing drawing of an applied-specific project. The
108. Alm_BrdConfig
device will be blocked. Check the plug-in module or inform
manufacture or agency to maintain it.
The control chip of binary output circuit is damaged. The
device will be blocked with the LED “HEALTHY” be
109. Alm_TrpOut extinguished. Please put the protective device out of
service at once and inform the factory or agency to
maintain it.
110. Alm_Setting Invalid settings in active setting group
Any error is detected in flash memory. The device will be
blocked with the LED “HEALTHY” be extinguished. Please
111. Alm_FlashChkErr
put the protective device out of service at once and inform
the factory or agency to maintain it.
If any chip on protection DSP module is detected damaged
or having error. Please put the protective device out of
112. Alm_DSP_ProtBrd
service at once and inform the factory or agency to
maintain it.
If any chip on fault detector DSP module is detected
damaged or having error. Please put the protective device
113. Alm_DSP_FDBrd
out of service at once and inform the factory or agency to
maintain it.
Loss of opto-coupler power supply. Please check the input
114. Alm_Pwr_Opto
circuit of DC power supply in the BI module
AC current and voltage samplings of fault detector DSP
115. Alm_Abnor_Smpl_CPU module are detected to be wrong or inconsistent with that of
protection DSP module. Please inform manufacture or

134 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 7 Configurable Function

agency to maintain it
AC current and voltage samplings of protection DSP
module are detected to be wrong or inconsistent with that of
116. Alm_Abnor_Smpl_MON
fault detector DSP module. Please inform manufacture or
agency to maintain it
General fault detector element operates for longer than
117. Alm_PersistFD
10s. Please check CT secondary circuit.
Zero-sequence overcurrent element operates for longer
118. Alm_PersistI0
than 10s. Please check CT secondary circuit.
119. Alm_VTS Line VT circuit failure. Please check VT secondary circuit.
CT circuit of corresponding circuit breaker fails. Please
120. Alm_CTS
check CT secondary circuit.
The auxiliary normally closed contact (52b) of
121. Alm_52b corresponding circuit breaker is abnormal. Please check
the auxiliary contact of CB
Any of the binary inputs of single-phase or three-phase
tripping contact from external protection is energized and
122. Alm_BI_ExTrP
the duration is longer than 10s. Please check all the
relevant binary inputs
Binary input of auxiliary normally closed contact
[BI_DS_Line] is energized then current can still be detected
123. Alm_BI_DS_Line
and the duration is longer than 10s. Please check the
binary input [BI_DS_Line].
Stage 2 of distance protection operates with 150ms delay
124. Op_Prot_PDF when fault occurs on healthy phase under pole discrepancy
situation
125. Op_PhSelFail Three-pole tripping for failure in fault phase selection
126. Op_1PTrpFail Three-pole tripping for failure in single-pole tripping
127. Op_Persist1P Three-pole tripping for single-phase operation
128. La Current amplitude of phase A is greater than 0.06In
129. Lb Current amplitude of phase B is greater than 0.06In
130. Lc Current amplitude of phase C is greater than 0.06In
Current amplitude of phase A flowed through CB1 is
131. La_CT1 greater than 0.06In (only equipped for two circuit breakers
configuration)
Current amplitude of phase B flowed through CB1 is
132. Lb_CT1 greater than 0.06In (only equipped for two circuit breakers
configuration)
Current amplitude of phase C flowed through CB1 is
133. Lc_CT1 greater than 0.06In (only equipped for two circuit breakers
configuration)
Current amplitude of phase A flowed through CB2 is
134. La_CT2 greater than 0.06In (only equipped for two circuit breakers
configuration)

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 135

Chapter 7 Configurable Function

Current amplitude of phase B flowed through CB2 is

135. Lb_CT2 greater than 0.06In (only equipped for two circuit breakers
configuration)
Current amplitude of phase C flowed through CB2 is
136. Lc_CT2 greater than 0.06In (only equipped for two circuit breakers
configuration)

7.5 Default configurations

In order to convenient for users to configure, the default configurations of LED, binary input and
binary output are provided. The definitions are as below.

7.5.1 Default LED configuration

Table 7.5-1 Default LED configuration

LED No. LED Label Corresponding signal

LED1 (Green) HEALTHY
LED2 (Yellow) ALARM
LED3 (Yellow) VT ALARM Alm_VTS
LED4 (Yellow) CT ALARM Alm_CTS
LED5 (Yellow) AR READY Ready_AR
LED6 (Yellow) AR INPROG Inprog_AR
LED7 (Red) TRIP A (Latched) TripA
LED8 (Red) TRIP B (Latched) TripB
LED9 (Red) TRIP C (Latched) TripC
LED10 (Red) RECLOSE (Latched) AR_Out

136 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 7 Configurable Function

7.5.2 Default binary inputs configuration

Opto+ 01

BI_Print 02

BI_Pulse_GPS 03

BI_RstTarg 04

BI_BlkComm 05

BI_52b_Pha 06

BI_52b_Phb 07

Reserved 08

BI_52b_Phc 09

BI_Opt1_AR 10
BI_Opt2_AR 11

BI_Lockout 12

BI_Healthy_CB 13

Bl_ExTrp_PilotP 14

Reserved 15

BI_RMT_DTT 16

BI_Recv1 17

BI_RecvB 18

BI_RecvC 19

BI_Recv2 20

Reserved 21

COM- 22

Table 7.5-2 Default binary inputs configuration

Pin No. Symbol Description

0801 Opto+ Positive pole of power supply of the module
0802 BI_Pulse_GPS Binary input of time synchronization pulse
0803 BI_Print Binary input of triggering printing
Binary input of blocking communication between
0804 BI_BlkComm equipment and substation automatic system (SAS) or
remote terminal unit (RTU).
0805 BI_RstTarg Binary input of resetting signal of protective equipment.
Normally closed auxiliary contact of phase A of circuit
0806 BI_52b_Pha
breaker
Normally closed auxiliary contact of phase B of circuit
0807 BI_52b_Phb
breaker
0808 Reserved Reserved binary input
0809 BI_52b_Phc Normally closed auxiliary contact of phase C of circuit

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 137

Chapter 7 Configurable Function

Pin No. Symbol Description

breaker
0810 BI_Opt1_AR The option 1 of AR mode Please refer to the section
0811 BI_Opt2_AR The option 2 of AR mode 3.16.3.1
The input of blocking reclosing, usually connecting with the
0812 BI_Lockout operating signals for definite-time protection, transformer
protection and busbar differential protection, etc.
The input for indicating whether circuit breaker has enough
0813 BI_Healthy_CB
energy to perform the function: open-close-open function
Binary input which can initiate sending permissive signal to
0814 Bl_ExTrp_PilotP remote end due to external protection (such as busbar
protection) operating
0815 Reserved Reserved binary input
0816 BI_RMT_TT Remote direct transfer tripping command
Binary input for receiving permissive signal, in the case of
0817 BI_Recv1 phase-segregated command mode, it is the binary input for
receiving signal of phase A
Binary input for receiving permissive signal of phase B in
0818 BI_RecvB
the case of phase-segregated command mode
Binary input for receiving permissive signal of phase C in
0819 BI_RecvC
the case of phase-segregated command mode
Binary input for receiving permissive signal (only for pilot
0820 BI_Recv2 zero-sequence overcurrent protection that independent
channel is used)
0821 Reserved Reserved binary input
0822 Opto- Negative pole of power supply of the module

138 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 7 Configurable Function

7.5.3 Default binary outputs configuration

}
}
}
}
}

}
}
}
}
}

}
}
}
}
Figure 7.5-1 Pin definition of binary output module located in slot No. 11

}
}
}
}
}
}
}
}
}
}
}
Figure 7.5-2 Pin definition of binary output module located in slot No. 12

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 139

Chapter 7 Configurable Function

}
}
}
}
}
}
}
}
}
}
}
Figure 7.5-3 Pin definition of binary output module located in slot No. 13

The following table is the explanation of the ouput signal mentioned above.

Table 7.5-3 Default binary outputs configuration

TripA Tripping command of phase A

TripB Tripping command of phase B
TripC Tripping command of phase C
AR_Out Output of auto-reclosing signal
Trp3Pole Three phases tripping command
Trp1Pole Any phase tripping command
LockAR AR blocking command
The binary output of sending permissive signal 1, in the case of
Send1 phase-segregated command mode, it is the binary output of sending
permissive signal of phase A
The binary output of sending permissive signal of phase B in the case of
SendB
phase-segregated command mode
The binary output of sending permissive signal of phase C in the case of
SendC
phase-segregated command mode
The binary output of sending permissive signal 2 (only for pilot
Send2
zero-sequence overcurrent protection that independent channel is used)
Prep_Trp3P Three-phase circuit breaker will be tripped once protection device operates
Fail_AR Auto-reclosing fails
SYN_Fail Synchrocheck for AR fails

140 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 8 Settings

Chapter 8 Settings
The equipment has 10 setting groups for protection to coordinate with the mode of power system
operation, one of which is assigned to be active. However, equipment parameters are common for
all protection setting groups.

Note!

All current settings in this chapter are secondary current converted from primary current by
CT ratio. Zero-sequence current or voltage setting is configured according to 3I0 or 3U0
and negative sequence current setting according to I2 or U2.

8.1 Equipment Parameters

— Overview

Table 8.1-1 Equipment parameters

No. Item Range

1 IP_Addr_NetA
2 Subnet_Mask_A
3 En_NetA
4 IP_Addr_NetB
5 Subnet_Mask_B
6 En_NetB
7 IP_Addr_NetC
8 Subnet_Mask_C
9 En_NetC
10 IP_Addr_NetD
11 Subnet_Mask_D
12 En_NetD
13 SNTP_Server_IP
14 Comm_Addr 0~255
15 COM1_Baud 4800,9600,19200,38400,57600,115200
16 COM2_Baud 4800,9600,19200,38400,57600,115200
17 COM1_Protocol 0, 1 or 2
18 COM2_Protocol 0, 1 or 2
19 En_BlkComm 0 or 1
20 Printer_Baud 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400
21 En_Auto_Print 0 or 1
22 En_HiSpeed_Print 0 or 1
23 Opt_TimeSync 0-6

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 141

Chapter 8 Settings

No. Item Range

24 61850_TimeZone -12~12
25 Un_BinaryInput_B08 0~3
26 Un_BinaryInput_B09 0~3

— Setting Description

1. IP_Addr_NetA, IP_Addr_NetB, IP_Addr_NetC, IP_Addr_NetD

IP address of Ethernet A, Ethernet B, Ethernet C and Ethernet D

2. Subnet_Mask_A, Subnet_Mask_B, Subnet_Mask_C, Subnet_Mask_D

Subnet mask of Ethernet A, Ethernet B, Ethernet C and Ethernet D

3. En_NetA, En_NetA, En_NetA, En_NetA

Put Ethernet A, Ethernet B, Ethernet C and Ethernet D in service

They are used for Ethernet communication based on the 103 protocol. When the IEC 61850
protocol is applied, the IP address of Ethernet A will be GOOSE source MAC address.

4. Comm_Addr

Communication address between the protective device with the SCADA or RTU via RS-485

5. COM1_Baud

Baud rate of rear RS-485 communication port 1

6. COM2_Baud

Baud rate of rear RS-485 communication port 2

7. COM1_Protocol

Communication protocol of rear RS-485 serial port 1

0: IEC 60870-5-103 protocol

2: Modbus Protocol

8. COM2_Protocol

Communication protocol of rear RS-485 serial port 2

0: IEC 60870-5-103 protocol

2: Modbus Protocol

9. En_BlkComm

It is set as “1” when the device is in maintainence. During such period, the fault report due to test
will not be sent upstream through communication ports, while local display and printing will not be
affected.

142 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 8 Settings

It is set as “0” when the device is in service. The relation between this setting and binary input
[BI_BlkComm] is “OR”, i.e. as long as one of them is set as “1”, such information as fault report
and waveform will not be sent upstream.

10. Printer_Baud

Baud rate of printer port

11. En_Auto_Print

If automatic print is required for fault report after protection operating, it is set as “1”. Otherwise, it
should be set to “0”.

12. En_HiSpeed_Print

It is set as “0” for common printing with high definition, while it is set as “1” for high-speed printing.

13. Opt_TimeSync

It is set as "0"~“6” for different external clock source.

0: PPS (pulse per second) differential

1: IRIG-B differential

2: PPM (Pulse via external contact)

3: SNTP(PTP)

4: IEEE1588

5: SNTP(BC)

6: DCF77

14. Un_BinaryInput_B08

DC voltage of power supply of the first binary input module (located on slot No.8)

0: 24V

1: 48V

2: 110V

3: 220V

15. Un_BinaryInput_B09

DC voltage of power supply of the second binary input module (located on slot No.9)

8.2 System Parameters

— Overview

Table 8.2-1 System parameters

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 143

Chapter 8 Settings

No. Item Range

1 Active_Grp 1~10
2 Equip_ID
3 I1n 0~9999 A
4 I2n 1~5 A
5 U1n 0~1200 kV
6 U2n 100~130V

1. Active_Grp

It is current active setting group. 10 setting groups are provided for selecting, group number from 0
to 9. Equipment parameter is shared for 10 setting groups.

2. Equip_ID

It is intended to set Chinese character field codes (12 bits) or ASCII codes (last 6 bits), which can
be recognized by the device automatically. Such settings is used for printing messages.

3. I1n

Primary rated current of CT;

4. I2n

Secondary rated current of CT;

5. U1n

Primary rated phase-to-phase voltage of VT;

6. U2n

Secondary rated phase-to-phase voltage;

8.3 Protection Settings

All settings of protection are based on secondary ratings of VT and CT. For the specific project,
some settings relevant to synchrocheck module, auto-reclosing module and breaker failure
protection module maybe with the suffix of “_CB1” and “_CB2” what represent the settings
correspond to synchrocheck module, auto-reclosing module and breaker failure protection module
for circuit breaker 1 and circuit breaker 2 respectively.

Unn: rated secondary phase-to-phase voltage.

Un: rated secondary phase-to-ground voltage.

In: rated secondary current.

— Overview

Table 8.3-1 Protection settings

No. Item Remark Range

144 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 8 Settings

Line parameter
1. Line_ID number of the line 0-65535
2. X1L positive sequence reactance of the line 0.00~5Unn/In (Ω)
3. R1L positive sequence resistance of the line 0.00~5Unn/In (Ω)
4. X0L zero-sequence reactance of the line 0.00~5Unn/In (Ω)
5. R0L zero-sequence resistance of the line 0.00~5Unn/In (Ω)
phase angle of line positive sequence
6. phi1_Reach 30~89 (deg)
impedance
phase angle of line zero-sequence
7. phi0_Reach 30~89 (deg)
impedance
8. K0 zero-sequence compensation coefficient 0~2
9. LineLength total length of the line 0~655.35 (km)
primary voltage of VT deriving from line
10. En_LineVT 0-1
voltage
Settings of tripping logic
current setting of DPFC current fault detector
11. I_DPFC_OC_FD 0.02~10 A×IN
element
current setting of zero-sequence current fault
12. I_ROC_FD 0.02~10 A×IN
detector element
enable auto-reclosing being blocked when
13. En_PhSF_Blk_AR 0-1
selection of faulty phase fails
enable auto-reclosing being blocked when
14. En_MPF_Blk_AR 0-1
multi-phase fault happens
enable auto-reclosing being blocked when
15. En_3PF_Blk_AR 0-1
three-phase fault happens
enable three-phase tripping mode for circuit
16. En_3Ptrip 0-1
breaker
Settings of main and distance protection functions
17. Z_DPFC impedance setting of DPFC distance element 0.00~2Unn/In (Ω)
18. En_Z_DPFC enable DPFC distance protection 0-1
impedance setting of pilot distance protection
19. Z_POTT 0.00~2Unn/In (Ω)
for forward direction element
impedance setting of pilot distance protection
20. Z_POTT_Quad for forward direction element (with 0.00~2Unn/In (Ω)
quadrilateral characteristic)
current setting of directional earth-fault
21. I_ROC_PilotP 0.02~40 A×IN
protection
22. t_Dly_CurRev time delay for fault current reversal 0~1.00s
time of pulse expanding after fault current
23. t_Ext_CurRev 0~1.00s
reversal
24. t_DEF time delay of DEF 0~1.00s

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 145

 Chapter 8 Settings

enable permissive overreach transfer trip

25. En_POTT_PilotP 0-1
element
enable permissive underreach transfer trip
26. En_PUTT_PilotP 0-1
element
enable pilot distance element with POTT
27. En_Z_POTT 0-1
scheme
enable pilot distance element (with
28. En_Z_POTT_Quad 0-1
quadrilateral characteristic) with POTT scheme
enable pilot zero-sequence element with POTT
29. En_ROC_POTT 0-1
scheme
enable pilot zero-sequence overcurrent
30. En_DEF_PilotP 0-1
element
enable auto-relcosing blocked when directional
31. En_DEF_BlK_AR 0-1
earth fault protection operating
Whether transfer trip signal will be controlled
32. En_FD_Ctrl_TT 0-1
by local fault detector element
33. En_WE_POTT enable POTT for weak infeed end 0-1
impedance setting of zone 1 of
34. Z_PG1 0.00~2Unn/In (Ω)
phase-to-ground distance element
resistance setting of zone 1 of distance
35. R1_Quad 0.00~2Unn/In (Ω)
element with quadrilateral characteristic
impedance setting of zone 1 of
36. Z_PP1 0.00~2Unn/In (Ω)
phase-to-phase distance element
enable zone 1 of phase-to-ground distance
37. En_ZPG1 0-1
element
enable zone 1 of quadrilateral phase-to-ground
38. En_ZPG1_Quad 0-1
distance protection
enable zone 1 of phase-to-phase distance
39. En_ZPP1 0-1
element
enable the function of binary input for
40. En_BI_Z1_Vld enabling/disabling zone 1 of distance 0-1
protection
impedance setting of zone 2 of
41. Z_PG2 0.00~2Unn/In (Ω)
phase-to-ground distance element
resistance setting of zone 2 of distance
42. R2_Quad 0.00~2Unn/In (Ω)
element with quadrilateral characteristic
time delay of zone 2 of phase-to-ground
43. t_PG2 0~10.00 (s)
distance element
impedance setting of zone 2 of
44. Z_PP2 0.00~2Unn/In (Ω)
phase-to-phase distance element
time delay of zone 2 of phase-to-phase
45. t_PP2 0~10.00 (s)
distance element

146 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 8 Settings

enable zone 2 of phase-to-ground distance

46. En_ZPG2 0-1
element
enable zone 2 of quadrilateral phase-to-ground
47. En_ZPG2_Quad 0-1
distance protection
enable zone 2 of phase-to-phase distance
48. En_ZPP2 0-1
element
enable auto-reclosing blocked when
49. En_ZPG2_Blk_AR phase-to-ground zone 2 of distance element 0-1
operating
enable auto-reclosing blocked when
50. En_ZPP2_Blk_AR phase-to-phase zone 2 of distance element 0-1
operating
enable zone 2 of distance element for SOTF
51. En_Z2SOTF_AR3P 0-1
when 3-pole AR
impedance setting of zone 3 of
52. Z_PG3 0.00~2Unn/In (Ω)
phase-to-ground distance element
resistance setting of zone 3 of quadrilateral
53. R3_Quad 0.00~2Unn/In (Ω)
characteristic distance element
time delay of zone 3 of phase-to-ground
54. t_PG3 0~10.00 (s)
distance element
impedance setting of zone 3 of
55. Z_PP3 0.00~2Unn/In (Ω)
phase-to-phase distance element
time delay of zone 3 of phase-to-phase
56. t_PP3 0~10.00 (s)
distance element
enable zone 3 of phase-to-ground distance
57. En_ZPG3 0-1
element
enable zone 3 of quadrilateral
58. En_ZPG3_Quad 0-1
phase-to-ground distance protection
enable zone 3 of phase-to-phase distance
59. En_ZPP3 0-1
element
enable zone 3 of distance element for SOTF
60. En_Z3SOTF_AR3P 0-1
when 3-pole AR
Impedance setting of reverse distance
61. Z_Rev 0.00~2Unn/In (Ω)
element
62. t_Rev time delay of reverse distance element 0~10.00 (s)
enable phase-to-ground reverse distance
63. En_ZPG_Rev 0-1
element
enable phase-to-phase reverse distance
64. En_ZPP_Rev 0-1
element
restrict impedance of the reach of distance
65. R_Blinder 0.00~2Unn/In (Ω)
element
enable restrict impedance measured of line
66. En_Blinder 0-1
load

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 147

 Chapter 8 Settings

phase shift of zone 1, 2 of phase-to-ground

67. phi_Shift_ZPG 0, 15, 30 (deg)
distance element
phase shift of zone 1, 2 of phase-to-phase
68. phi_Shift_ZPP 0, 15, 30 (deg)
distance element
69. I_OC_PSBR current setting for power swing blocking 0.02~40 A×IN
enable PSBR for directional distance element
70. En_PSBR_PilotP 0-1
of pilot protection
71. En_PSBR_Z1 enable PSBR for zone 1 of distance element 0-1
72. En_PSBR_Z2 enable PSBR for zone 2 of distance element 0-1
73. En_PSBR_Z3 enable PSBR for zone 3 of distance element 0-1
Settings of current protecton
current setting of stage 1 of zero-sequence
74. I_ROC1 0.02~40 A×IN
overcurrent element
time delay of stage 1 of zero-sequence
75. t_ROC1 0~10.00 (s)
overcurrent element
enable stage 1 of directional zero-sequence
76. En_ROC1 0-1
overcurrent element
enable direction blocking to stage 1 of
77. En_Dir_ROC1 0-1
directional zero-sequence overcurrent element
enable auto-reclosing blocked when stage 1 of
78. En_ROC1_Blk_AR directional zero-sequence overcurrent element 0-1
operating
current setting of stage 2 of zero-sequence
79. I_ROC2 0.02~40 A×IN
overcurrent element
time delay of stage 2 of zero-sequence
80. t_ROC2 0~10.00 (s)
overcurrent element
enable stage 2 of directional zero -sequence
81. En_ROC2 0-1
overcurrent element
enable direction blocking to stage 2 of
82. En_Dir_ROC2 0-1
directional zero-sequence overcurrent element
enable auto-reclosing blocked when stage 2 of
83. En_ROC2_Blk_AR directional zero-sequence overcurrent element 0-1
operating
current setting of stage 3 of zero-sequence
84. I_ROC3 0.02~40 A×IN
overcurrent element
time delay of stage 3 of zero-sequence
85. t_ROC3 0~10.00 (s)
overcurrent element
enable stage 3 of directional zero-sequence
86. En_ROC3 0-1
overcurrent element
enable direction blocking to stage 3 of
87. En_Dir_ROC3 0-1
directional zero-sequence overcurrent element

148 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 8 Settings

enable auto-reclosing blocked when stage 3 of

88. En_ROC3_Blk_AR directional zero-sequence overcurrent element 0-1
operating
current setting of stage 4 of zero-sequence
89. I_ROC4 0.02~40 A×IN
overcurrent element
time delay of stage 4 of zero-sequence
90. t_ROC4 0~10.00 (s)
overcurrent element
enable stage 4 of directional zero-sequence
91. En_ROC4 0-1
overcurrent element
enable direction blocking to stage 4 of
92. En_Dir_ROC4 0-1
directional zero-sequence overcurrent element
Current setting of inverse-time zero-sequence
93. I_InvROC 0.02~40 A×IN
overcurrent protection
Time delay of inverse-time zero-sequence
94. t_InvROC 0~10.00 (s)
overcurrent protection
0: Standard
Operating characteristic selection for Inverse
95. Opt_Characteristic_ROC inverse-time zero-sequence overcurrent 1: Very Inverse
protection 2: Extremely
Inverse
Logic setting for enabling inverse-time
96. En_InvROC 0-1
zero-sequence overcurrent protection
Logic setting for enabling inverse-time
97. En_Dir_InvROC zero-sequence overcurrent protection 0-1
controlled by direction element
Logic setting for enabling inverse-time
98. En_FixDly_InvROC zero-sequence overcurrent protection operate 0-1
with an additional time delay (100ms)
current setting of accelerated stage of
99. I_ROC_SOTF 0.02~40 A×IN
zero-sequence overcurrent element
phase current setting of overcurrent element
100. I_OC_VTS 0.02~40 A×IN
for VTS
zero-sequence current setting of overcurrent
101. I_ROC_VTS 0.02~40 A×IN
element for VTS
time setting of phase or zero-sequence
102. t_OC/ROC_VTS 0~10.00 (s)
overcurrent element for VTS
current setting of stage 1 of phase overcurrent
103. I_OC1 0.02~40 A×IN
element
time delay of stage 1 of phase overcurrent
104. t_OC1 0~10.00 (s)
element
enable stage 1 of directional phase overcurrent
105. En_OC1 0-1
element

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 149

 Chapter 8 Settings

enable direction blocking to stage 1 of

106. En_Dir_OC1 0-1
directional phase overcurrent element
auto-reclosing blocking and three-phase
107. En_3PTrpOC1_Blk_AR tripping when stage 1 of directional phase 0-1
overcurrent element operating
current setting of stage 2 of phase overcurrent
108. I_OC2 0.02~40 A×IN
element
time delay of stage 2 of phase overcurrent
109. t_OC2 0~10.00 (s)
element
enable stage 2 of directional phase overcurrent
110. En_OC2 0-1
element
enable direction blocking to stage 2 of
111. En_Dir_OC2 0-1
directional phase overcurrent element
auto-reclosing blocking and three-phase
112. En_3PTrpOC2_Blk_AR tripping when stage 2 of directional phase 0-1
overcurrent element operating
the characteristic angle of phase overcurrent
113. Phi_RCA_OC 30°~89°
element
114. I_OC_Stub Current setting of stub overcurrent protection 0.02~40 A×IN
Logic setting of enabling stub overcurrent
115. En_OC_Stub 0-1
protection
threshold multiple of stage 1 of overload
116. ThM_OvLd1 0.00~3.00
protection (only for alarm purpose)
threshold multiple of stage 2 of overload
117. ThM_OvLd2 0.00~3.00
protection (for alarm and trip purpose)
118. Ib_OvLd basic current of overload protection (0.02~10) ×In
dissipate constant time of the line for
119. t_Disspt_OvLd 0~25.00 (s)
overload protection (either alarm or trip)
Stage 1 of overload protection operating to
alarm
120. En_OvLd1_Alm 0-1
1: enable
0: disable
Stage 2 of overload protection operating to
alarm
121. En_OvLd2_Alm 0-1
1: enable
0: disable
Stage 2 of overload protection operating to trip
122. En_OvLd2_Trp 1: enable 0-1
0: disable
Settings of voltage protection
voltage setting of stage 1 of over voltage
123. V_OV1 (Un-2Unn)
protection
124. t_OV1 time delay of stage 1 of over voltage protection 0~10.00 (s)

150 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 8 Settings

0: Definite
1: Inverse
2: Standard
Inverse
Operating characteristic selection for stage 1
125. Opt_Characteristic_OV1 3: Very Inverse
of overvoltage protection
4: Extremely
Inverse
5: Long Time
Inverse
voltage setting of stage 2 of over voltage
126. V_OV2 (Un-2Unn)
protection
127. t_OV2 time delay of stage 2 of over voltage protection 0~10.00 (s)
0: Definite
1: Inverse
2: Standard
Inverse
Operating characteristic selection for stage 2
128. Opt_Characteristic_OV2 3: Very Inverse
of overvoltage protection
4: Extremely
Inverse
5: Long Time
Inverse
Logic setting of enabling stage 1 of over
129. En_OV1 0-1
voltage protection
Logic setting of enabling stage 2 of over
130. En_OV2 0-1
voltage protection
enable 1-out-of-3 mode or 3-out-of-3 mode for
131. Opt_1P/3P_OV 0-1
over voltage protection
Logic setting of enabling phase-to-phase over
132. En_Vpp_OV 0-1
voltage protection
Stage 1 of over voltage protection operating to
initiate transfer trip
133. En_OV1_Init_TT 0-1
1: enable
0: disable
Stage 2 of over voltage protection operating to
initiate transfer trip
134. En_OV2_Init_TT 0-1
1: enable
0: disable
The binary input of 52b will be used to initiate
transfer trip
135. En_52b_Ctrl_TT 0-1
1: enable
0: disable
voltage setting of stage 1 of under-voltage load
136. V_UV1 (0-Unn)
shedding protection
time delay of stage 1 of under-voltage load
137. t_UV1 0~10.00 (s)
shedding protection

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 151

 Chapter 8 Settings

0: Definite
1: Inverse
2: Standard
Inverse
Operating characteristic selection for stage 1
138. Opt_Characteristic_UV1 3: Very Inverse
of undervoltage protection
4: Extremely
Inverse
5: Long Time
Inverse
voltage setting of stage 2 of under-voltage load
139. V_UV2 (0-Unn)
shedding protection
time delay of stage 2 of under-voltage load
140. t_UV2 0~10.00 (s)
shedding protection
0: Definite
1: Inverse
2: Standard
Inverse
Operating characteristic selection for stage 2
141. Opt_Characteristic_UV2 3: Very Inverse
of undervoltage protection
4: Extremely
Inverse
5: Long Time
Inverse
Logic setting of enabling stage 1 of under
142. En_UV1 0-1
voltage protection
Logic setting of enabling stage 2 of under
143. En_UV2 0-1
voltage protection
enable 1-out-of-3 mode or 3-out-of-3 mode for
144. Opt_1P/3P_UV 0-1
under voltage protection
Logic setting of enabling phase-to-phase under
145. En_Vpp_UV 0-1
voltage protection
Stage 1 of under voltage protection operating
to alarm
146. En_Alm_UV1 0-1
1: enable
0: disable
Settings of BFP for CB1
current setting of phase current criterion of
147. I_OC_BFP (0.02~40 )×In
BFP
current setting of zero-sequence current
148. I_ROC_BFP (0.02~40 )×In
criterion of BFP
current setting of negative-sequence current
149. I_NegOC_BFP (0.02~40 )×In
criterion of BFP
150. t_BFP1 time delay of stage 1 of BFP 0~10.00 (s)
151. t_BFP2 time delay of stage 2 of BFP 0~10.00 (s)

152 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 8 Settings

breaker failure protection

152. En_BFP 1: enable 0-1
0: disable
re-trip function
153. En_Retrip 1: enable 0-1
0: disable
zero-sequence current criterion for BFP
initiated by single-phase tripping contact
154. En_ROC_1P_BFP 0-1
1: enable
0: disable
zero-sequence current criterion for BFP
initiated by three-phase tripping contact
155. En_ROC_3P_BFP 0-1
1: enable
0: disable
negative-sequence current criterion for BFP
initiated by three-phase tripping contact
156. En_NegOC_3P_BFP 0-1
1: enable
0: disable
breaker failure protection can be initiated by
normally closed contact of circuit breaker.
157. En_CB_3P_BFP 0-1
1: enable
0: disable
Settings of control functions for CB1 and CB2
158. UL1_Phase_Sel Voltage selecting mode of line 1. 0~5
159. UB1_Phase_Sel Voltage selecting mode of bus 1. 0~5
160. UL2_Phase_Sel Voltage selecting mode of line 2. 0~5
161. UB2_Phase_Sel Voltage selecting mode of bus 2. 0~5
162. V_Dead Voltage threshold of dead check condition 0.05Un~0.8Un

163. V_Live Voltage threshold of live check condition 0.5Un~Un

Configuration mode of breaker.
0 -- No voltage selection function;
1 -- Double busbar connection;
164. ConfigMode 2 – Bus breaker for one and a half breakers 0~3
connection;
3 -- Tie breaker for one and a half breakers
connection.
Compensation coefficient for synchronous
165. K_USyn 0.20-5.00
voltage
Phase difference limit of synchronism check
166. phi_Diff_SynChk 0°~ 89°
for AR
The fixed phase difference between two
167. phi_Fix_Diff 0°~359°
synchronous voltages
Frequency difference limit of synchronism
168. f_Diff_SynChk 0.02~1.00Hz
check for AR
Voltage difference limit of synchronism check
169. V_Diff_SynChk 0.02Un~0.8Un
for AR

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 153

 Chapter 8 Settings

170. t_DeadChk time delay of voltage and dead check condition 0.01~25.00 (s)

171. t_SynChk time delay of synchronism check condition 0.01~25.00 (s)

Whether frequency difference check is
enabled
172. En_fDiffChk_AR 0-1
1: enable
0: disable
Whether synchronism check is enabled
173. En_SynChk_AR 1: enable 0-1
0: disable
Dead line and dead bus (DLDB) check
174. En_DdB_DdL_AR 1: enable 0-1
0: disable
Dead line and live bus (DLLB) check
175. En_LvB_DdL_AR 1: enable 0-1
0: disable
Live line and dead bus (LLDB) check
176. En_DdB_LvL_AR 1: enable 0-1
0: disable
AR without dead check and synchronism
check
177. En_NoChk_AR 0-1
1: enable
0: disable
Phase difference limit of synchronism check
178. phi_Diff_SynChk_M 0°~89°
for manual closing
Frequency difference limit of synchronism
179. f_Diff_SynChk_M 0.02~1.00Hz
check for manual closing
Acceleration of frequency difference limit of
180. Df/dt_SynChk_M 0.02~3.00 Hz
synchronism check for manual closing
Voltage difference limit of synchronism check
181. V_Diff_SynChk_M 0.02Un~0.8Un
for manual closing
182. t_close Closing time of the circuit breaker 0.01~10.00S
183. t_Wait_SynChk_M Maximum wait time for synchronism check 0.01~400.00S
184. t_PW_M The length of output pulse of closing.signal 0.01~10.00S
185. En_SynChk_M Synchronism check is enabled. 0-1
Dead bus and dead line check for dead check
186. En_DdB_DdL_M 0-1
is enabled
Live bus and dead line check for dead check
187. En_LvB_DdL_M 0-1
is enabled
Dead bus and live line check for dead check
188. En_DdB_LvL_M 0-1
is enabled

154 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 8 Settings

Manual closing without dead check and

189. En_NoChk_M synchronism check is enabled. Manual losing 0-1
command will output directly.
190. t_1Ph-Shot1_AR dead time of first 1-pole reclosing shot 0.01~400.00S
191. t_3Ph-Shot1_AR dead time of first 3-pole reclosing shot 0.01~400.00S
time delay of circuit breaker in closed state
192. t_CBClsd_AR 0.01~400.00S
before reclosing
begin to time after the input [Healthy_CB]
drops out, if the input [Healthy_CB] is not yet
193. t_Wait_CBHealthy 0.01~400.00S
energized with this time delay, AR will be
blocked
194. t_Wait_SynChk_AR maximum wait time for synchronism check 0.01~400.00S
195. t_Reclaim_AR reclaim time of AR 0.01~400.00S
reset time of blocking signal of AR
When blocking signal for AR disappears,
196. t_Broaden_BlkAR 0.01~400.00S
blocking condition of AR drops out with this
time delay
Automatic reclosing with an additional time
197. t_ExtendDly_AR 0.01~400.00S
delay
198. t_WaitMaster Maximum wait time for master 0.01~400.00S
Begin to counter after initiating 1-pole AR,
3-pole AR will be initiated if another fault
199. t_DiscrimSecFault 0.01~400.00S
happens during this time delay. AR will be
blocked if another fault happens after that
detection time for long trip duration to block
200. t_PersistTrp 0.01~400.00S
automatic reclosing
201. t_Unsuc_AR CB check time before reclosing unsuccessful 0.01~400.00S
202. t_PW_AR The length of output pulse of AR signal 0.01~10.00S
automatic reclosing with an additional time
delay
203. En_ExtendDly_AR 0-1
1: enable
0: disable
check state of CB for AR unsuccessful
204. En_UnsucChkByCB 1: enable 0-1
0: disable
To enable automatic reclosing blocked when
205. En_EVFault_Blk_AR 0-1
evolving fault occur
adjust length of reclosing pulse
206. En_CutPulse_AR 1: enable 0-1
0: disable
207. En_AR enable auto-reclosing 0-1
Automatic reclosure enabled by external
208. ExtCtrl_AROn 0-1
control besides logic setting “En_AR_CB1”

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 155

 Chapter 8 Settings

automatic reclosing initiated by open state of

circuit breaker
209. En_CBInitAR 0-1
1: enable
0: disable
0：None (single-breaker arrangement)
1 ： High (master AR of multi-breaker
210. Opt_Priority_AR arrangement) 0-1
2 ： Low (slave AR of multi-breaker
arrangement)
control option of AR mode
211. En_SetOpt_AR 1: select AR mode by internal logic setting 0-1
0: select AR mode by external input
212. En_1PAR enable 1-pole auto-reclosing mode 0-1
213. En_3PAR enable 3-pole auto-reclosing mode 0-1
214. En_1/3P_AR enable 1/3-pole auto-reclosing mode 0-1

— Setting Description

1. Line_ID

Number of the line. The actual identification number of the transmission line in site, only used for
printing report.

2. X1L, R1L, X0L and R0L

Setting step: 0.01Ω

Positive sequence and zero-sequence reactance and resistance of the line. Parameter of the
transmission line, used for calculation of fault location.

3. phi1_Reach and phi0_Reach

Setting step: 1°

Phase angle of positive and zero-sequence impedance of the line. Set as they should be.

4. K0

Setting step: 0.01

Setting principle: K0 = (Z0L–Z1L)/3Z1L, where Z0L and Z1L are zero and positive sequence
impedance of the line respectively. Actual measurement value is suggested adopted, but
calculated value with 0.05 subtracted from can also be used if there is not actual measurement
value.

5. LineLength

Total length of the line. The actual total length of the line km, used for calculation of fault location.

6. En_LineVT

If three-phase voltage used for protection measurement comes from line side (for example, 3/2

156 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 8 Settings

breaker), it should be set as “1”. If three-phase voltage comes from busbar side, it should be set as
“0”.

1: Three phase voltage is from line voltage, synchronism voltage is single-phase voltage from bus
voltage

0: Three phase voltage is from bus voltage, synchronism voltage is single-phase voltage from line
voltage

Note!

The setting must be set carefully. The no-voltage check and the synchronous check will
determine the locations of line voltage and busbar voltage on the basis of the setting. If the
setting is mistaken, the mistaken judgment may be made.

7. I_DPFC_OC_FD

Setting step: 0.01A

Setting principle: This value should be greater than maximum variation of load current and
typically 0.2 In. For line with wide variation of load current like those for electric railway, heavy
rolling mill or aluminum-smelting, the setting should be increased properly so that frequent starting
of the equipment could be avoided.

8. I_ROC_FD

Setting step: 0.01A

Setting principle: It shall be greater than maximum zero-sequence unbalance current. Setting it
based on same primary current on both ends.

9. En_PhSF_Blk_AR

If the settings is set as “1”, auto-reclosing will be blocked when selection of faulty phase fails.

10. En_MPF_Blk_AR

If the setting is set as “1”, auto-reclosing will be blocked when multi-phase fault happens.

11. En_3PF_Blk_AR

If the setting is set as “1”, auto-reclosing will be blocked when three-phase fault happens.

12. En_3Ptrip

If it is set as “1”, three-pole tripping will be implemented for any fault but auto-reclosing is not
blocked.

13. Z_DPFC

Setting step: 0.01Ω

Setting principle: it shall be 80~85% impedance of whole line. For double-circuit lines, 70% of the
line impedance is recommended. However, for short line, it is recommended that DPFC distance

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 157

Chapter 8 Settings

protection should be disabled if the set value is smaller than 1/In.

14. En_Z_DPFC

The DPFC distance element

1: enable

0: disable

For short transmission line, if the secondary value of line impedance is less than 1/IN, DPFC
distance protection should be disabled.

15. Z_POTT

Setting step: 0.01Ω

Setting principle: It shall be greater than 1.3 times impendence of whole line.

16. I_ROC_PilotP

Setting step: 0.01A

Setting principle: It should ensure that directional earth-fault protection is sensitive enough when
an earth fault happens in the remote end of line. Usually, it should be set on the basis of that
primary fault current is not smaller than 240A.

17. t_Dly_CurRev

Setting step: 0.01s

Time delay for dodging out of fault current reversal; It is used to avoid protective device undesired
trip when fault current reversal occurs.

18. t_Ext_CurRev

Setting step: 0.01s

Time of pulse expanding after fault current reversal;It is used to expand the operation signal of
pilot protection after fault current reversal occurs.

19. t_DEF

Setting step: 0.01s

Time delay of directional earth-fault protection;

20. En_POTT_PilotP

The permissive overreach transfer trip element;

1: enable

0: disable

When POTT is used, besides setting logic setting [En_POTT_PilotP] as “1”, any of logic settings
[En_Z_POTT] and [En_ROC_POTT] must be set as “1”, otherwise, POTT is invalid.

158 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 8 Settings

21. En_PUTT_PilotP

The permissive underreach transfer trip element;

1: enable

0: disable

Note!

For POTT, permissive signal is sent when distance element of POTT operates. If receiving
permissive signal from opposite end of line and local distance element of POTT operating,
tripping command is sent. For PUTT, permissive signal is sent when zone 1 distance
element operates. If receiving permissive signal from opposite end of line and local zone 2
distance element operating, trip command is sent.

Note!

If logic settings [En_POTT_PilotP] and [En_PUTT_PilotP] are both set as “0”, pilot
distance element is disabled. If logic settings [En_POTT_PilotP] and [En_PUTT_PilotP]
are both set as ‘”1”, an alarm [Alm_Setting] will be issued and protective device will be
blocked.

22. En_Z_POTT

The pilot distance element with POTT scheme;

1: enable

0: disable

23. En_ROC_POTT

The directional earth-fault element with POTT scheme;

1: enable

0: disable

24. En_DEF_PilotP

The pilot zero-sequence overcurrent element with directional characteristic;

1: enable

0: disable

25. En_DEF_Blk_AR

The function of auto-reclosing blocked when directional earth fault protection operating; at the
same time, output three-phase tripping and lockout contacts BO_Trp3P_Lockout_1 (F09~F10)
and BO_Trp3P_Lockout_2 (F11~F12)

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 159

Chapter 8 Settings

1: enable;

0: disable;

26. En_FD_Ctrl_TT

Whether transfer trip signal will be controlled by local fault detector element. If the setting is set as
“1”, received transfer tripping signal can not operate to trip local breaker unless local fault detector
element picks up.

27. En_WE_POTT

The function of POTT for weak infeed end;

“1”: enable

“0”: disable

Note!

For heavy power source, logic setting [En_WE_POTT] is set as “0”, and for weak power
source or load, logic setting [En_WE_POTT] is set as “1”. It can ensure internal fault is
cleared quickly.

Note!

If logic setting [En_POTT_PilotP] is set as “0”, the logic setting [En_WE_POTT] is invalid.

28. Z_PG1

Setting step: 0.01Ω

Setting principle: Setting of this zone should be 0.8~0.85 times the impedance of the line and
should be decreased properly for line with mutual inductance. The recommended value is 0.7
times the impedance of the line. The setting should avoid zone 1 of distance element maloperation
when a fault occurs in the remote bus of line.

29. R1_Quad、R2_Quad、R3_Quad

Resistance setting of zone 1, 2 and 3 of quadrilateral characteristic distance element.

Setting principle: The proposed limitation of Z/R ratio is 1/4, in another word, it is recommended
that Z/R ratio is not smaller than 1/4.

Besides R1_Quad, R2_Quad and R3_Quad should be in the range of 0.05~200Ω/IN and ward load
impedance, these settings are recommended to satisfy the following condition:
R1_Quad≤4×Z_PG1, R2_Quad≤4×Z_PG2, R3_Quad≤4×Z_PG3. But this limitation is not
imperative. So during the calculation of the settings R1_Quad, R2_Quad and R3_Quad, the
consideration includes: the setting range of 0.05~200Ω/IN, the load impedance and the proposed
limitation of Z/R ratio.

30. Z_PP1

160 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 8 Settings

Setting step: 0.01Ω

Setting principle: Setting of this zone should be 0.8~0.85 times the impedance of the line. The
setting should avoid zone 1 of distance element maloperation when a fault occurs in the remote
bus of line.

31. Z_PG2, Z_PG3, Z_PP2, Z_PP3, t_PG2, t_PG3, t_PP2 and t_PP3

Setting principle: Setting of the impedance and time delay of these zones should meet
requirements between various zones and operation should be ensured even for fault at end of the
line.

Note!

For impedance setting, even if some zones of distance element are disabled, these
settings must meet the following relation:

[Z_PP3]≥[Z_PP2]≥[Z_PP1];

[Z_PG3]≥[Z_PG2]≥[Z_PG1];

Impedance setting of zone 3 of distance element should be sensitive to fault at end of the
line.

32. En_ZPG1, En_ZPG2, En_ZPG3, En_ZPP1, En_ZPP2 and En_ZPP3

The zone 1(2, 3) of phase-to-ground distance element enabled and zone 1(2, 3) of
phase-to-phase distance relay enabled, if these setting are set to “1”, in the same time, virtual
binary input [VEBI_DistP] should be set as “1”. If none of them is met, the distance protection shall
be disabled.

33. En_ZPG1_Quad、En_ZPG2_Quad、En_ZPG3_Quad

The function of zone 1, 2 and 3 of quadrilateral distance protection

1: enable

0: disable

34. En_BI_Z1_Vld

The validity of the binary input [BI_En_Z1] for enabling/disabling zone 1 of distance protection

1: enable the validity of binary input [BI_En_Z1]

0: disable the validity of binary input [BI_En_Z1]

35. En_ZPG2_Blk_AR

The function of auto-reclosing blocked when phase-to-ground zone 2 of distance element

operating;

1: enable;

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 161

Chapter 8 Settings

0: disable;

36. En_ZPP2_Blk_AR

The function of auto-reclosing blocked when phase-to-phase zone 2 of distance element

operating;

1: enable;

0: disable;

37. En_Z2SOTF_AR3P, En_Z3SOTF_AR3P

If the setting is set as “1”, zone2, 3 of distance element for auto-reclosing SOTF is enabled. If the
power swing does not occur after reclosing, the corresponding zone of distance protection which is
not controlled by power swing block will trip after a shorter time delay than [t_PG2] or [t_PP2] and
[t_PG3] or [t_PP3].

38. Z_Rev

Setting step: 0.01Ω

Setting principle: When logic setting [En_WE_POTT] is as “1”,

[Z_Rev]=(1.5~2)×([Z_POTT]Remote-ZL) which should be met. When logic setting [En_WE_POTT] is
set as “0”, it can be set as the on-site specific requirement.

ZL: the impedance of the whole line

[Z_POTT] Remote: it is the impedance setting of POTT in the remote end

39. t_Rev

Setting step: 0.01s

Setting principle: it should meet requirement between zone 3 distance element and busbar
protection.

40. En_ZPG_Rev

The phase-to-ground reverse distance element;

1: enable;

0: disable;

41. En_ZPP_Rev

The phase-to-phase reverse distance element;

1: enable

0: disable

42. R_Blinder

Setting step: 0.01Ω

162 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 8 Settings

Setting principle: It should be less than the minimum impedance measured during heavy load
conditions and it should meet the requirement of sensitivity, usually take 0.7 as sensitive
coefficient.

43. En_Blinder

The function of restrict impedance measured of line load

1: enable

0: disable

Please refer to section 3.7.5.

44. phi_Shift_ZPG

Setting step: 1°

Phase shift of zone 1 and 2 phase-to-ground distance element. Recommended value: 30°for
length of the line < 10 km, 15°for length ≥10 km and 0°for length ≥40 km.

45. phi_Shift_ZPP

Setting step: 1°

Phase shift of zone 1 and 2 phase-to-phase distance element. Recommended value: 30°for length
of the line < 2 km, 15°for length ≥2 km and 0°for length ≥10 km.

46. I_OC_PSBR

Setting step: 0.01A

Setting principle: This current setting should be greater than maximum load current of the line. The
sensitivity coefficient take 1.1.

47. En_PSBR_PilotP

The function of power swing blocking for directional distance element of pilot protection;

1: enable; directional distance element of pilot protection is controlled by PSB element.

0: disable; directional distance element of pilot protection is not controlled by PSBR element, and
power swing blocking for zone 1,2 of distance element is released all along.

48. En_PSBR_Zx

The function of power swing blocking for zone x of distance element, x can be 1, 2 or 3;

1: enable; zone x of distance element is controlled by PSB element.

0: disable; zone x of distance element is not controlled by PSBR element, and power swing
blocking for zone x of distance element is released all along.

49. I_ROC1, t_ROC1, I_ROC2, t_ROC2, I_ROC3, t_ROC3, I_ROC4 and t_ROC4

Current settings and time delay of zero-sequence overcurrent elements.

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 163

Chapter 8 Settings

Note!

All zero-sequence current settings should be greater than that of zero-sequence current
fault detector element. These settings must meet the following relation:

[I_ROC1]≥[I_ROC2]≥[I_ROC3]≥[I_ROC4];

50. En_ROC1, En_ROC2, En_ROC3 and En_ROC4

If these settings are set as “1”, stage 1, 2, 3 and 4 of directional zero-sequence overcurrent
protection will be enabled.

51. En_ROC1_Blk_AR, En_ROC2_Blk_AR and En_ROC3_Blk_AR

The function of auto-reclosing blocked when corresponding stage of directional zero-sequence

overcurrent element operating, auto-reclosing will be blocked fixedly if stage 4 of directional
zero-sequence overcurrent element operating.

1: enable;

0: disable;

52. En_Dir_ROC1, En_Dir_ROC2, En_Dir_ROC3 and En_Dir_ROC4

If the setting is set as “1”, the direction blocking to corresponding stage of directional
zero-sequence overcurrent element is enabled.

53. I_InvROC

It is set according to the fault condition via maximum fault resistance (i.e. maximum fault
resistance takes 100Ω for 220kV transmission line and 300Ω for 500kV transmission line), and it
shall be greater than the maximum unbalanced current during the normal operation condition,
usually not greater than 300A.

54. t_InvROC

It is the time constant of normal IDMT equation and the following criterion shall be met:

⎧t 0ZDinv ≥ TS + Δt
⎨
⎩t 0ZDinv ≥ t 0ZD2XL + Δt

Where:

t 0ZDinv : The time delay of the inverse-time zero-sequence overcurrent protection

t 0ZD2XL : The time delay of zone 2 of directional zero-sequence overcurrent protection in the

adjacent line

Δt : The extra time delay

164 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 8 Settings

TS : The time delay for 1-pole reclosing

55. Opt_Characteristic_ROC

The parameters of each characteristics are listed in the following table.

Inverse Delay Curve Tp τ [Opt_Characteristic_ROC]

Standard Inverse 0.02 0.14 0

Very Inverse 1 13.5 1
Extremely Inverse 2 80 2

56. En_Dir_InvROC

Logic setting for enabling inverse-time zero-sequece overcurrent protection controlled by direction
element

1: enable;

0: disable;

57. En_FixDly_InvROC

Logic setting for enabling inverse-time zero-sequence overcurrent protection operate with an
additional time delay (100ms)

1: enable;

0: disable;

58. I_ROC_SOTF

Setting step: 0.01A

Setting principle: This setting should ensure sufficient sensitivity to ground fault at end of the line.

59. I_OC_VTS

Setting step: 0.01A

Current setting of phase overcurrent element for VTS.

60. I_ROC_VTS

Setting step: 0.01A

Current setting of zero-sequence overcurrent element for VTS.

61. t_OC/ROC_VTS

Setting step: 0.01s

Time setting of phase and zero-sequence overcurrent elements for VTS.

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 165

Chapter 8 Settings

62. Opt_Characteristic_OV1, Opt_Characteristic_OV2

For stage 1 and stage 2 of overvoltage protection, definite-time characteristic and five kinds of
inverse-time characteristics can be choose from by setting the logic setting
[Opt_Characteristic_OVn] (n=1 or 2). The parameters of each characteristics are listed in the
following table.

[Opt_Characteristic_OV1],
Inverse Delay Curve Tp τ
[Opt_Characteristic_OV2]
Definite time delay 0 0 DT
Inverse 1 1 InvT
Standard Inverse 0.02 0.14 IEC-NI
Very Inverse 1 13.5 IEC-VI
Extremely Inverse 2 80 IEC-EI
Long Time Inverse 1 120 IEC-LTI

63. En_OV1

Stage 1 of overvoltage protection

1: enable

0: disable

64. En_OV2

Stage 2 of overvoltage protection

1: enable

0: disable

65. Opt_1P/3P_OV

The 1-out-of-3 mode or 3-out-of-3 mode for overvoltage protection

1: 1-out-of-3 mode was enabled

0: 3-out-of-3 mode was enabled

66. En_VPP_OV

The phase–to-phase overvoltage protection

1: enable

0: disable

67. En_OV1_Init_TT

The transfer trip initiated by stage 1 of overvoltage protection

1: enable

166 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 8 Settings

0: disable

68. En_OV2_Init_TT

The transfer trip initiated by stage 2 of overvoltage protection

1: enable

0: disable

69. En_52b_Ctrl_TT

Overvoltage protection operates to initiate transfer trip is controlled by normally closed auxiliary
contact of circuit breaker.

1: enable

0: disable

70. Opt_Characteristic_UV1, Opt_Characteristic_UV2

For stage 1 and stage 2 of undervoltage protection, definite-time characteristic and five kinds of
inverse-time characteristics can be choose from by setting the logic setting
[Opt_Characteristic_UVn] (n=1 or 2). The parameters of each characteristics are listed in the
following table.

[Opt_Characteristic_UV1],
Inverse Delay Curve Tp τ
[Opt_Characteristic_UV2]
Definite time delay 0 0 DT
Inverse 1 1 InvT
Standard Inverse 0.02 0.14 IEC-NI
Very Inverse 1 13.5 IEC-VI
Extremely Inverse 2 80 IEC-EI
Long Time Inverse 1 120 IEC-LTI

71. En_UV1

Stage 1 of undervoltage protection

1: enable

0: disable

72. En_UV2

Stage 2 of undervoltage protection

1: enable

0: disable

73. Opt_1P/3P_UV

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 167

Chapter 8 Settings

The 1-out-of-3 mode or 3-out-of-3 mode for undervoltage protection

1: 1-out-of-3 mode was enabled

0: 3-out-of-3 mode was enabled

74. En_VPP_UV

The phase–to-phase undervoltage protection

1: enable

0: disable

75. En_Alm_UV1

Stage 1 of undervoltage protection operating to alarm

1: enable

0: disable

76. UL1_Phase_Sel, UB1_Phase_Sel, UB2_Phase_Sel, UL2_Phase_Sel

Voltage selecting mode of line 1, bus 1, bus 2, line 2. 0~5 corresponds to UA, UB, UC, UAB, UBC
and UCA respectively.

77. ConfigMode

Configuration mode of breaker.

0 -- No voltage selection function;

1 -- Double busbar connection;
2 – Bus breaker for one and a half breakers connection;

3 -- Tie breaker for one and a half breakers connection.

78. K_USyn

Compensation coefficient for synchronous voltage, KSyn= UB／UL.

79. phi_Diff_SynChk

Phase difference limit of synchronism check for AR.

80. phi_Fix_Diff

The fixed phase difference between two synchronous voltages: Normally it was not used. It was
only used when synchronous voltage adopts the voltage from the other side of transformer.

Calculation formula is: phi_Fix_Diff =

φUL − φUB .

81. f_Diff_SynChk

Frequency difference limit of synchronism check for AR.

82. V_Diff_SynChk

168 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 8 Settings

Voltage difference limit of synchronism check for AR.

83. V_Dead

Voltage threshold of dead check condition: The setting must exceed the coupling voltage
incurred by the coupling of adjacent lines, normally it was set as 30％Un.

84. V_Live

Voltage threshold of live check condition: It should be set according to the actual situation,
normally it was set as 80％Un.

85. phi_Diff_SynChk_M

Phase difference limit of synchronism check for manual closing.

86. f_Diff_SynChk_M

Frequency difference limit of synchronism check for manual closing.

87. Df/dt_SynChk

Acceleration of frequency difference limit of synchronism check for manual closing.

88. V_Diff_SynChk_M

Voltage difference limit of synchronism check for manual closing.

89. t_close

Closing time of the circuit breaker.

90. t_PW_M

The length of output pulse of closing.signal for circuit breaker.

91. t_Wait_SynChk_M

Maximum wait time for synchronism check. If synchronism check condition can not be met during
this time, the device will directly output synchronism check fails.

92. t_1Ph-Shot1_AR

The time delay of 1-pole AR

It should be considered according to the requirement of system stability, meanwhile,

arc-extinguishing of instantaneous fault and insulation recovery ability should also be considered.
Generally, this setting is greater than 0.5s, 1.0s is recommended.

93. t_3Ph-Shot1_AR

The time delay of 3-pole AR, actually it is the time delay of 3-pole AR with dead check.

The setting should be set according to system stability requirement, arc-extinguishing of

instantaneous fault and insulation recovery ability should also be considered. In addition,
possibility for two-side protection (double power supply) to cut off fault with different time limit

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 169

Chapter 8 Settings

should be taken into consideration. This setting for power plant outlets or intensive network is
generally set as 10s.

94. t_Wait_CBHealthy

When AR has been ready to operate, begin to time after the input [Healthy_CB] drops off. The
input [Healthy_CB] is not still energized after the time delay [t_Wait_CBHealthy], AR will be
blocked.

95. t_Wait_SynChk_AR

The setting is the maximum allowable time used for synchronism check. In case the synchronism
check is unsuccessful after exceeding this setting, the auto-reclosing will be blocked.

96. t_Reclaim_AR

The reset time of circuit breaker after auto-reclosing operation

After resetting, the auto-reclosing can implement the next reclosing.

97. t_Broaden_BlkAR

Most circuit breakers can perform one time process: open-close-open action. Before reclosing, the
circuit breaker must have enough energy. The input [Healthy_CB] is used to indicate whether
circuit breakers can provide enough reclose energy. When it’s time to reclosing, and after the time
delay [t_Broaden_BlkAR], the input [Healthy_CB] is still not energized, AR will be blocked. When
this function is not needed, this input will not be configured, in which case, its default logic is that it
is always valid.

98. t_ExtendDly_AR

When the channel used for main protection is abnormal, and the logic setting
[En_ExtendDly_AR]=1, the time delay of AR will add an extra time delay [t_ExtendDly_AR] on the
basis of original time delay during fault, so as to ensure insulation recovery at fault point for
transient fault when AR operates. This setting shall consider the maximum inconsistent operating
time between the protection devices on both ends.

99. t_WaitMaster

When master AR is initiated, the protection device will output signal to block slave AR. If master
AR is succeeded to reclosing, the blocking signal will drop off and slave AR will reclosing
immediately. If master AR is failure to reclosing, the blocking signal will be kept until AR drops off.
Slave AR always receives the blocking signal for longer than the time delay [t_WaitMaster], AR will
be blocked.

100. t_PersistTrp

In case the tripping signal persist longer than this setting, the auto-reclosing will be blocked.

101. t_Unsuc_AR

The setting is the time delay from reclosing command sent to unsuccessful reclosing, which shall
be greater than the reclosing operation time of circuit breaker.

170 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 8 Settings

102. t_PW_AR

The setting must be greater than the reclosing time of circuit breaker.

103. En_SynChk_AR

Synchronism check is enabled for AR or not.

1: enable

0: disable

104. En_DdB_DdL_AR, En_LvB_DdL_AR, En_DdB_LvL_AR

Dead check mode for AR. When more than one of these three parameters are enabled, the logic
relation among these three parameters is “OR”.

105. En_NoChk_AR

AR without dead check and synchronism check is enabled or not. Reclosing command will output
directly.

106. En_SynChk_M

Synchronism check is enabled for manual closing or not.

1: enable

0: disable

107. En_DdB_DdL_M, En_LvB_DdL_M, En_DdB_LvL_M

Dead check mode for manual closing. When more than one of these three parameters are
enabled, the logic relation among these three parameters is “OR”.

108. En_NoChk_M

Manual closing without dead check and synchronism check is enabled or not. Reclosing command
will output directly.

109. En_AR

It is used to enable or disable AR, which should coordinate with selection setting of AR mode and
control switch of AR to perform the function.

110. ExtCtrl_AROn

It is used to determine that AR enable can be controlled by external input.

[ExtCtrl_AROn]=1, AR mode is controlled by external input besides internal logic setting

[ExtCtrl_AROn]=0, AR mode is only controlled by internal logic setting

111. Opt_Priority_AR

For this case that a line is corresponding to dual circuit breakers, for instance, angle scheme or 3/2
breakers, it is necessary to configure different priority for dual circuit breakers.

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 171

Chapter 8 Settings

[Opt_Priority]=0, normal reclosing logic

[Opt_Priority]=1, master reclosing logic

[Opt_Priority]=2, slave reclosing logic

112. En_SetOpt_AR

AR mode: 1-pole AR, 3-pole AR and 1/3-pole AR, which are controlled by internal logic setting. It
can also be controlled by external input.

[En_SetOpt_AR]=0, it will select AR mode by external input, refer to the table below

Input 1-pole AR 1-pole AR 1/3-pole AR

EBI_Opt1_AR 0 1 0
EBI_Opt2_AR 0 0 1

113. En_1PAR, En_3PAR and En_1/3P_AR

If these setting are set as “1”, corresponding auto-reclosing mode is selected.

8.4 VEBI Settings

Virtual enable binary input (VEBI) is a kind of special logic setting to enable protection functions.
These virtual binary inputs can be configured through local HMI or remote PC.

Table 8.4-1 Virtual binary input

No. VEBI setting Remark

1 VEBI_PilotP enable pilot protection
2 VEBI_DistP enable distance protection
3 VEBI_ROC enable directional zero-sequence overcurrent protection
4 VEBI_Lockout enable auto-reclosing blocking for circuit breaker 1
5 VEBI_OV Enable over voltage protection
6 VEBI_UV Enable under voltage protection

Each VEBI setting is one of the conditions that decide whether the relevant protection is in service,
when this relay is energized. Through SAS or RTU, the VEBI settings can be set as “1” or “0”;
and it means that the relevant protection can be in service or out of service through remote
command. It provides convenience for operation management.

These virtual binary inputs provide a convenient way for the operator to put the function in service
or out of service remotely away from an unattended substation.

Except for [VEBI_Lockout], logic relation between these virtual enable binary inputs mentioned in
the table and corresponding logic setting is AND. If it is set as “1”, auto-reclosing will be locked out.
It should be set as “0” generally.

172 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 9 Human Machine Interface

Chapter 9 Human Machine Interface

The operator can access the protective device from the front panel. Local communication with the
protective device is possible using a computer via an RS232 port on the front panel. Furthermore,
remote communication is also possible using a PC with the substation automation system via an
RS485 port. The operator is able to check the protective device status at any time.

This chapter describes human machine interface (HMI), and give operator a instruction about how
to display or print event report, setting and so on through HMI menu tree and display metering
value, including mean current, voltage and frequency etc. through LCD. In the same time, how to
change active setting group or a settable parameter value through keypad is also described in
details.

9.1 Overview
The human-machine interface consists of a human-machine interface (HMI) module which allows
a communication to be as simple as possible for the user. The HMI module helps to draw your
attention to something that has occurred which may activate a LED or a report displayed on the
LCD. Operator can locate the data of interest by navigating the keypad.
GR
P
ESC

Figure 9.1-1 The front panel

The function of HMI module:

No. Item Description

A 320×240 dot matrix backlight LCD display is visible in dim
1 LCD lighting conditions. The corresponding messages are displayed
when there is operation implemented.
20 status indication LEDs, 1 green LED, 11 yellow LEDs and 8
2 LED red LEDs, 2 LEDs are fixed as the signals of “HEALTHY” and
“ALARM”, others are configurable.
3 Keypad Numeric keypad and command keys for full access to the relay
DB9 RS232 port for communication with a PC for local
4 Communication port
communication

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 173

Chapter 9 Human Machine Interface

5 Logo Type and designation and manufacturer of protection device

The items can be flexibly configured depending on the situations like sampling method of
protection device (conventional CT/VT and ECVT), the mode of binary output (conventional binary
output and GOOSE binary output), and whether it needs independent binary output for pole
discrepancy protection. The configurations for PCS-900 series protective device of power network
based on microcomputer are classified into standard and optional modules.

No. ID Description Remark

MON module provides functions like
1 NR1102 management function, completed event standard
record, setting management, and etc
To carry out filtering, sampling and protection
2 NR1123 calculation and fault detector calculation standard
respectively.
To carry out filtering, sampling and fault
3 NR1123 standard
detector calculation respectively.
4 NR1401 Analog input module optional
GOOSE Module is applied for realization of
GOOSE level interlocking, and for connection
5 NR1126 optional
to ECVT with supporting IEC61850-9-1and
IEC61850-9-2 protocols
BI module,provides binary input, and the
6 NR1504 binary is inputted via standard
24V/36V/110V/125V/220V/250V opto-coupler
7 NR1504 BI module optional
8 NR1521 BO trip module provides all tripping outputs optional
9 NR1521 BO trip module provides all tripping outputs optional
10 NR1521 BO trip module provides all tripping outputs optional
11 NR1521 BO trip module provides all tripping outputs optional
12 NR1301 PWR module standard

9.1.1 Keypad Operation

Figure 9.1-2 Keypad buttons

1. “ESC”:

„ Cancel the operation

„ Quit the current menu

174 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 9 Human Machine Interface

2. “ENT”:

„ Execute the operation

„ Confirm the interface

3. “GRP”

„ Activate the switching interface of setting group

4. leftward and rightward direction keys (“◄” and “►”):

„ Move the cursor horizontally

„ Enter the next menu or return to the previous menu

5. upward and downward direction keys (“▲” and “▼”)

„ Move the cursor vertically

„ Select command menu within the same level of menu

6. plus and minus sign keys (“＋” and “－”)

„ Modify the value

„ Modify and display the message number

„ Page up/down

9.1.2 LED Indications

Figure 9.1-3 the figure shows the LED indications

A brief explanation has been made as bellow.

LED Display Description

When the equipment is out of service or any hardware
Off
error is defected during self-check.
HEALTHY
Lit when the equipment is in service and ready for
Steady Green
operation.
ALARM Off When equipment in normal operating condition.

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 175

Chapter 9 Human Machine Interface

LED Display Description

Lit when VT circuit failure, CT circuit failure or other
Steady Yellow
abnormal alarm is issued.

Note!

„ The “HEALTHY” LED can only be turned on by energizing the equipment again to restart
the relay.

„ “ALARM” LED is turned on when abnormalities of equipment occurs like above

mentioned and can be turned off after abnormalities are removed except alarm report
[Alm_CTS] which can only be reset only when the failure is removed and the equipment
is rebooted or re-energized.

„ Other LED indicators with no labels are configurable and user can configure them to be lit
by signals of operation element, alarm element and binary output contact according to
requirement through PCS-PC software, but as drawed in figure, there are 8 red LEDs and
10 yellow LEDs which are configurable.

9.1.3 Communication Port

Figure 9.1-4 Communication ports

It is used to access the hardware of the protection device via HyperTerminal. This port is only used
to monitor the communication state by engineering debugging personnel and debug the program
by developers.

9.1.4 Communication
The MON module is comprised by embedded processor of high performance, FLASH, SRAM,
SDRAM, Ethernet controller and other peripheral equipments. It can realize the management,
human machine interface, communication and waveform recording of the whole device. The MON
module uses the data of other modules in the receiver device of internal bus, and communicates
with LCD panel via RS-485 bus.

176 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 9 Human Machine Interface

Figure 9.1-5 Rear view and terminal definition of NR1102C

Take NR1102C as an example, its rear view and the definition of terminals are shown as Figure
9.1-5. This module is equipped with two 100BaseT Ethernet interface, PPS/IRIG-B differential
synchronization interface and RS-232 printer interface.

The Ethernet interface can be used to communication with PC via auxiliary software (PCS-PC) by
connecting the protection device with PC, so as to fulfill on-line function (please refer to the
instruction manual of PCS-PC). At first, the connection between the protection device and PC
must be established. Through setting the IP address and subnet mask of corresponding Ethernet
interface in the menu “SETTINGS→EQUIP_SETTINS”, it should be ensured that the protection
device and PC are in the same network segment. For example, setting the IP address and subnet
mask of network A (using network A to connect with PC).

PC: IP address is set as “198.87.96.102”, subnet mask is set as “255.255.255.0”

The IP address and subnet mask of protection device should be [IP_Addr_NetA]= 198.87.96.XXX,
[Subnet_Mask_A]=255.255.255.0, [En_NetA]=1. (XXX can be any value from 0 to 255 except
102).

9.2 Understand the HMI Menu Tree

9.2.1 Overview
Press “▲” of any running interface and enter the main menu. Select different submenu by “▲” and
“▼”. Enter the selected submenu by pressing “ENT” or “►”. Press “◄” and return to the previous
menu. Press “ESC” and exit the main menu directly. For sake of executing the command menu
again, one command menu will be recorded in the quick menu after its first execution. Five latest

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 177

Chapter 9 Human Machine Interface

menu commands can be recorded in the quick menu. When the five menu commands are
recorded, the latest menu command will cover the earliest one, adopting the “first in first out”
principle. It’s arranged from top to bottom and in accordance with the execution order of command
menus. Press “▲” to enter the main menu with the interface as shown in the following diagram:

For the first powered protective device, there is no recorded shortcut menu. Press “▲” to enter the
main menu with the interface as shown in the following diagram:

178 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 9 Human Machine Interface

MainMenu

INTERFACE LANGUAGE

BOARD_INFO

COMM_TEST

ITEM_TRP_REPORT

TEST_MODE TRP_REPORT

ALM_REPORT
VERSION
BI_CHG_REPORT

CH_REPORT
CLOCK

RESET_TARGET
LOCAL_CTRL
TRIG_OSCILLOG

CLR_STATE

CLR_AR_COUNTER

DOWNLOAD

COPY_SETTINGS
SETTINGS
PROT_SETTINGS

SYS_SETTINGS

VEBI_SETTINGS

EQUIP_SETTINGS

CANCEL_PRINT
PRINT
IEC103_PROTOCOL

WAVEFORM SMPL_WAVE

PRESENT_VALUES

BI_CHG_REPORT

ALM_REPORT

TRP_REPORT
LATEST_MODIFIED
SETTINGS
ALL_SETTINGS
EQUIP_DESCRON
PROT_SETTINGS

SYS_SETTINGS
CTRL_REPORT
REPORT VEBI_SETTINGS
BI_CHG_REPORT
EQUIP_SETTING
ALM_REPORT

TRP_REPORT

AR_COUNTER
VALUES
ALM_STATE

BI_STATE

TELE_MEASUREMENT

PHASE_ANGLE

FD_MEASUREMENT

PROT_MEASUREMENT

Figure 9.2-1 Menu tree

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 179

Chapter 9 Human Machine Interface

Under the main interface, press “▲” to enter the main menu, and select submenu by pressing “▲”,
“▼” and “ENT”. The command menu adopts a tree shaped content structure. The above diagram
provides the integral structure and all the submenus under menu tree of the protection device.

9.2.2 VALUES
This menu is mainly used to display the real time sampling value of current and voltage and the
input state of the protection device, which fully reflects the running environment of the protection
device. As long as the displayed values of the two items consist with the actual running situation,
basically, the protection device can work normally. This menu is set to greatly facilitate the
debugging and maintenance of people on site.

This menu includes the following command menus.

No. Item Function description

1 AR_COUNTER Counter for automatic-reclosing
2 ALM_STATE Display the alarm signal state.
3 BI_STATE Display the input signal state.
4 TELE_MEASUREMENT Display the measured primary values
Display the measured value of phase angle of current and
5 PHASE_ANGLE
voltage.
6 FD_MEASUREMENT Display the measured value of current of initiating panel.
Display the measured value of current and voltage of
7 PROT_MEASUREMENT
protection panel.

9.2.3 REPORT
This menu is used for displaying the fault report, abnormal record, binary signal and running
reports , so that the operator can load to view and use as the reference of analyzing accidents and
maintaining the device. All the reports are stored in non-volatile memory, it can still record the
reports even if it losses its power. Each type of report can be saved for 1024 times.

This menu includes the following command menus.

No. Item Function description

1 CTRL_REPORT Running and operation reports of protection device.
2 BI_CHG_REPORT Status change of binary signal.
3 ALM_REPORT Self-check and alarm information of protection device.
4 TRP_REPORT Fault report of protective device.

9.2.4 PRINT
This menu is used for printing device description, setting, fault report, abnormal record report,
binary signal, waveform and information related with 103 Protocol.

This menu includes the following command menus and submenus.

No. Item Function description

180 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 9 Human Machine Interface

1 CANCEL_PRINT Cancel the printing command

Print 103 Protocol information, including function type (FUN),
2 IEC103_PROTOCOL information serial number (INF), general classification service
group number, and channel number (ACC).
3 WAVEFORM Print waveform report.
Print the current state of the protection device, including voltage,
4 PRESENT_VALUES
current sampling value, binary signal, setting, and etc.
5 BI_CHG_REPORT Print the input displacement information.
6 ALM_REPORT Print the self-check alarm information.
7 TRP_REPORT Print the fault report.
Print the protection device setting, including communication
parameter, protection setting, virtual binary input setting, and
8 SETTINGS equipment parameter. It can print by different classifications as
well as printing all settings of the device. Besides, it can also
print out the latest modified setting item.
9 EQUIP_DESCRON Print the description information of protection device.

The submenu “WAVEFORM” includes the following command menus.

No. Item Function description

Includes waveform triggered by fault detector and manually waveform
1 SMPL_WAVE
recording

The submenu “SETTINGS” includes the following command menus.

No. Item Function description

1 LATEST_MODIFIED Print the content of the latest modified setting.
Print the content of all settings including equipment parameters,
2 ALL_SETTINGS
system parameters, protection settings and virtual EBI settings.
3 PROT_SETTINGS Print the protection settings.
4 SYS_SETTINGS Print the system settings.
5 VEBI_SETTINGS Print the virtual binary input settings.
6 EQUIP_SETTINGS Print the equipment parameters.

9.2.5 SETTINGS
This menu is used for checking the setting of device equipment parameter, vitual binary input
setting, protection setting, logic setting and system parameter, as well as modifying any of the
above setting items. Morever, it can also execute the setting copy between different setting
groups.

This menu includes the following command menus.

No. Item Function description

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 181

Chapter 9 Human Machine Interface

1 COPY_SETTINGS Copy setting between different setting group.

2 PROT_SETTINGS Check or modify the protection setting and logic setting.
3 SYS_SETTINGS Check or modify the equipment parameter setting.
4 VEBI_SETTINGS Check or modify the setting of the virtual binary input setting.
5 EQUIP_SETTINGS Check or modify the communication parameter.

9.2.6 LOCAL_CTRL
This menu is used for resetting the tripping relay with latch, protection device signal lamp, LCD
display, as the same as the resetting function of binary input. Record the currently acquired
waveform data of the protection device under normal condition for printing and uploading SAS.
Besides, it can send out the request of program download.

This menu includes the following command menus.

No. Item Function description

Reset the local signal, the signal indicator lamp and the LCD
1 RESET_TARGET
display.
2 TRIG_OSCILLOG Trigger waveform recording.
3 CLR_STATE Eliminate the state statistics of pilot channel of the device state.
4 DOWNLOAD Send out the download request.
5 CLR_AR_Counter Clear the counter for auto-reclosing

9.2.7 CLOCK
It’s used to display and modify the current date and time of the protection device.

9.2.8 VERSION
It’s used to check the information like the program version of each intelligent module in the
protection device and the program generating time.

9.2.9 TEST_MODE
This menu is mainly used for developers to debug the program and for engineers to maintain
device. It can be used to check module information and item fault message, and fulfill the
communication test function. It’s also used to generate all kinds of report or event to transmit to the
SAS without any external input, so as to debug the communication on site.

This menu includes the following command menus.

No. Item Function description

1 BOARD_INFO Monitor the current working state of each intelligent module.
Automatically generate all kinds of message to transmit to the
backstage, including tripping, self-check and binary signal
2 COMM_TEST
transmission. It can realize the transmission of messages of
different classification, as well as the transmission of all types of

182 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 9 Human Machine Interface

messages.
3 ITEM_TRP_REPORT Check the fault report one by one.
4 TRP_REPORT Check the fault reports.
5 ALM_REPORT Check the self-supervision reports
6 BI_CHG_REPORT Check the binary signals.
7 CH_REPORT Check the reports of channel status.

9.2.10 INTERFACE
This menu is mainly used for set LCD display language. This menu includes the following
command menus.

No. Item Function description

1 LANGUAGE Set LCD display language

9.3 Understand the LCD Display

9.3.1 Normal Status Display
After the protection device is powered and turns into the initiating interface, it takes 30 seconds to
complete the initialization of protection device. During the initialization of protection device, the
“HEALTHY” indicator lamp of the protection device goes out.

Under normal condition, the LCD will display the following interface. The LCD adopts white color
as its backlight that is activated if once there is any keyboard operation, and is extinguished
automatically after 60 seconds of no operation.

The displayed content of the interface contains: the current date and time of the protection device
(with a format of yy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss:), the currently valid setting group number, the three-phase
current sampling value, the zero-sequence current sampling value, the three-phase voltage
sampling value, the zero-sequence voltage sampling value, the synchronism voltage sampling

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 183

Chapter 9 Human Machine Interface

value, line frequency and the address relevant to IP address of Ethernet A. If all the sampling
values of the voltage and the current can’t be fully displayed within one screen, they will be
scrolling-displayed automatically from the top to the bottom.

If IP address of Ethernet A is “xxx.xxx.a.b”, the displayed address equals to (a*256+b). For

example, If IP address of Ethernet A is “198.087.095.023”, the displayed address will be
“95*256+23=24343”.

If the device has detected any abnormal state, it’ll display the self-check alarm information.

9.3.2 Display Fault Report

This protection device can store 1024 times of fault reports and 64 times of fault waveforms. When
there is protection element operating, the LCD will automatically display the latest fault report, and
two kinds of LCD display interfaces will be available depending on whether there is self-check
report at present.

For the situation that the fault report and the self-check report coexist, the upper half part is fault
report, and the lower half part is self-check report. As to the upper half part, it displays separately
the record number of fault report, fault name, generating time of fault report (with a format of
yy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss:), protection element and tripping element. If there is protection element,
there are relative time on the basis of fault detector element and fault phase. At the same time, if
the total lines of protection element and tripping element are more than 3, a scroll bar will appear
at the right. The height of the black part of the scroll bar basically indicates the total lines of
protection element and tripping element, and its position suggests the position of the currently
displayed line in the total lines. The scroll bar of protection element and tripping element will roll up
at the speed of one line per time. When it rolls to the last three lines, it’ll roll from the earliest
protection element and tripping element again. The displayed content of the lower half part is
similar to that of the upper half part.

If the device has no self-check report, the display interface will only show the fault report.

Please refer to section 7.4.2 about all the possibly displayed fault report.

9.3.3 Display Self-supervision Report

This protection device can store self-check report for 1024 times. During the running of protection
device, the self-check report of hardware self-check errors or system running abnormity will be
displayed immediately.

Please refer to section 7.4.2 about all the possibly displayed self-supervision report.

9.3.4 Display Binary Input Change Report

This protection device can store 1024 times of binary input change reports. During the running of
the protection device, the report will be displayed once any binary input state changes or VEBI
setting is modified.

Please refer to section 7.4.1 about all the binary input.

184 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 9 Human Machine Interface

9.3.5 Display Control Report

This protection device can store control report (i.e. user operating reports) for 1024 times. During
the running of the protection device, the control report will be displayed after any operation is
conducted.

It will be displayed on the LCD before the fault report and self-check report are confirmed. Only
pressing the restore button on the protection screen or pressing both “ENT” and “ESC” at the
same time can switch among the fault report, the self-check report and the normal running state of
protection device to display it. The binary input change report will be displayed for 5s and then it
will return to the previous display interface automatically.

9.4 Keypad Operation

9.4.1 View Device Status
The operation is as follows:

1. Press the “▲” to enter the main menu;

2. Press the “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “VALUES” menu, and then press the
“ENT” or “►” to enter the menu;

3. Press the “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to any command menu, and then press the
“ENT” to enter the menu;

4. Press the “▲” or “▼” to page up/down (if all information cannot be displayed in one
display screen, one screen can display 14 lines of information at most);

5. Press the “◄” or “►” to select pervious or next command menu;

6. Press the “ENT” or “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the “VALUES” menu);

9.4.2 View Device Report

The operation is as follows:

1. Press the “▲” to enter the main menu;

2. Press the “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “REPORT” menu, and then press the
“ENT” or “►” to enter the menu;

3. Press the “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to any command menu, and then press the
“ENT” to enter the menu;

4. Press the “▲” or “▼” to page up/down;

5. Press the “＋” or “－” to select pervious or next record;

6. Press the “◄” or “►” to select pervious or next command menu;

7. Press the “ENT” or “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the “REPORT” menu);

For the fault report, view the single item fault report by the command menu

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 185

Chapter 9 Human Machine Interface

“ITEM_TRP_REPORT”, and the item fault report produces with change of any item of fault report.
The item fault report can save for 1024 times at most.

The operation is as follows:

1. Press the “▲” to enter the main menu;

2. Press the “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “TEST_MODE” menu, and then press the
“ENT” or “►” to enter the menu;

3. Press the “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the command menu “ITEM_TRP_REPORT”,
and then press the “ENT” to enter the menu;

4. Press the “＋” or “－” to select pervious or next record;

5. Press the “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the “TEST_MODE” menu).

9.4.3 View Module Information

The operation is as follows:

1. Press the “▲” to enter the main menu;

2. Press the “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “TEST_MODE” menu, and then press the
“ENT” or “►” to enter the menu;

3. Press the “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the command menu “BOARD_INFO”, and
then press the “ENT” to enter the menu;

4. Press the “▲” or “▼” to move the scroll bar;

5. Press the “ENT” or “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the “TEST_MODE” menu).

9.4.4 Print Device Report

The operation is as follows:

1. Press the “▲” to enter the main menu;

2. Press the “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “PRINT” menu, and then press the “ENT”
or “►” to enter the menu;

3. Press the “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to any command menu, and then press the
“ENT” to enter the menu;

— Selecting the “TRP_REPORT”, and then

Press the “＋” or “－” to select pervious or next record. After pressing the “ENT”, the LCD will
display “Start Printer Now”, and then automatically exit this menu (returning to the menu “PRINT”).
If the printer doesn’t complete its current print task and re-start it for printing, and the LCD will
display “Printer Busy Now…”. Press the “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the menu “PRINT”).

— Selecting the command menu “ALM_REPORT” or “BI_CHG_REPORT”, and then

Press the “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor. Press the “＋” or “－” to select the starting and ending

186 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 9 Human Machine Interface

numbers of printing message. After pressing the “ENT”, the LCD will display “Start Printer Now…”,
and then automatically exit this menu (returning to the menu “PRINT”). Press the “ESC” to exit this
menu (returning to the menu “PRINT”).

4. If selecting the command menu “IEC103_PROTOCOL”, “PRESENT_VALUES” or

“EQUIP_DESCRON”, press the “ENT”, the LCD will display “Start printer Now..”, and
then automatically exit this menu (returning to the menu “PRINT”);

5. If selecting the “WAVEFORM” or “SETTINGS”, press the “ENT” or “►” to enter the next
level of menu;

6. After entering the submenu “SETTINGS”, press “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor, and then
press the “ENT” to print the corresponding default value. If selecting the
“PROT_SETTINGS” or “ALL_SETTINGS”:

Press the “＋” or “－” to select the setting zone to be printed. After pressing the “ENT”, the LCD will
display “Start Printer Now…”, and then automatically exit this menu (returning to the menu
“SETTINGS”). Press the “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the menu “SETTINGS”).

7. After entering the submenu “WAVEFORM”, press the “ENT” to enter the “SMPL_WAVE”.
Without waveform data, the LCD will display “No Wave Form Data!” (Before executing
the command menu “SMPL_WAVE”, it’s necessary to execute the command menu
“TRIG_OSCILLOG” in the menu “LOCAL_CTRL”, otherwise the LCD will display “No
Wave Form Data!”). With waveform data existing:

Press the “＋” or “－” to select pervious or next record. After pressing the “ENT”, the LCD will
display “Start Printer Now…”, and then automatically exit this menu (returning to the menu
“WAVEFORM”). If the printer doesn’t complete its current print task and re-start it for printing, and
the LCD will display “Printer Busy Now…”. Press the “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the
menu “WAVEFORM”).

9.4.5 View Device Setting

The operation is as follows:

1. Press the “▲” to enter the main menu;

2. Press the “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “SETTINGS” menu, and then press the
“ENT” or “►” to enter the menu;

3. Press the “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to any command menu, and then press the
“ENT” to enter the menu;

4. Press the “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor;

5. Press the “+” or “-” to page up/down;

6. Press the “◄” or “►” to select pervious or next command menu;

7. Press the “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the menu “SETTINGS”).

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 187

Chapter 9 Human Machine Interface

Note!

If the displayed information exceeds 14 lines, the scroll bar will appear on the right side of
the LCD to indicate the quantity of all displayed information of the command menu and the
relative location of information where the current cursor points at.

9.4.6 Modify Device Setting

The operation is as follows:

1. Press the “▲” to enter the main menu;

2. Press the “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “SETTINGS” menu, and then press
the “ENT” or “►” to enter the menu;

3. Press the “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to any command menu, and then press the
“ENT” to enter the menu;

4. Press the “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor;

5. Press the “+” or “-” to page up/down;

6. Press the “◄” or “►” to select pervious or next command menu;

7. Press the “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the menu “SETTINGS” );

8. If selecting the command menu “EQUIP_SETTINGS”, move the cursor to the setting
item to be modified, and then press the “ENT”;

Press the “＋” or “－” to modify the value (if the modified value is of multi-bit, press the “◄” or “►”
to move the cursor to the digit bit, and then press the “＋” or “－” to modify the value), press the
“ESC” to cancel the modification and return to the displayed interface of the command menu
“EQUIP_SETTINGS”. Press the “ENT” to automatically exit this menu (returning to the displayed
interface of the command menu “EQUIP_SETTINGS”).

Move the cursor to continue modifying other setting items. After all setting values are modified,
press the “◄”, “►” or “ESC”, and the LCD will display “Save or Not?”. Directly press the “ESC” or
press the “◄” or “►” to move the cursor. Select the “Cancle”, and then press the “ENT” to
automatically exit this menu (returning to the displayed interface of the command menu
“EQUIP_SETTINGS”).

Press the “◄” or “►” to move the cursor. Select “No” and press the “ENT”, all modified setting item
will restore to its original value, exit this menu (returning to the menu “SETTINGS”).

Press the “◄” or “►” to move the cursor to select “Yes”, and then press the “ENT”, the LCD will
display password input interface.

188 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 9 Human Machine Interface

Input a 4-bit password (“＋”, “◄”, “▲” or “－”). If the password is incorrect, continue inputting it,
and then press the “ESC” to exit the password input interface and return to the displayed interface
of the command menu “EQUIP_SETTINGS”. If the password is correct, LCD will display “Save
Setting Now…”, and then exit this menu (returning to the displayed interface of the command
menu “EQUIP_SETTINGS”), with all modified setting items as modified values.

Note!

For different setting items, their displayed interfaces are different but their modification
methods are the same. The following is ditto.

9. If selecting the command menu “VEBI_SETTINGS”, move the cursor to the setting to
be modified, and then press the “ENT”;

10. If selecting the command menu “EQUIP_SETTINGS”, move the cursor to the default
item to be modified, press the “ENT”

Note!

After modifying the parameter settings of the device, the “HEALTHY” indicator lamp of the
protection device will go out, and the protection device will automatically restart and
re-check the protection setting. If the check doesn’t pass, the protection device will be
blocked.

11. If selecting the command menu “PROT_SETTING”, the LCD will display the following
interface:

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 189

Chapter 9 Human Machine Interface

4. PROT_SETTINGS

Group NO select

Current Group NO 01

Group NO To be Edited 02

Press the “＋” or “－” to modify the value, and then press the “ENT” to enter it. Move the cursor to
the setting item to be modified, press the “ENT” to enter.

Note!

After modifying the equipement parameter of the device, the “HEALTHY” indicator lamp of
the protection device will go out, and the protection device will automatically restart and
re-check the protection setting. If the check doesn’t pass, the protection device will be
blocked.

9.4.7 Copy Device Setting

The operation is as follows:

1. Press the “▲” to enter the main menu;

2. Press the “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “SETTINGS” menu, and then press the
“ENT” or “►” to enter the menu;

3. Press the “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the command menu “COPY_SETTINGS”,
and then press the “ENT” to enter the menu.

Press the “＋” or “－” to modify the value. Press the “ESC”, and return to the menu “SETTINGS”.
Press the “ENT”, the LCD will display the interface for password input, if the password is incorrect,
continue inputting it, press the “ESC” to exit the password input interface and return to the menu
“SETTINGS”. If the password is correct, the LCD will display “copy setting OK!”, and exit this menu
(returning to the menu “SETTINGS”).

9.4.8 Switch Setting Group

The operation is as follows:

1. Exit the main menu;

2. Press the “GRP”

190 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 9 Human Machine Interface

Press the “＋” or “－” to modify the value, and then press the “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to
the main menu). After pressing the “ENT”, the LCD will display the password input interface. If the
password is incorrect, continue inputting it, and then press the “ESC” to exit the password input
interface and return to its original state. If the password is correct, the “HEALTHY” indicator lamp
of the protection device will go out, and the protection device will re-check the protection setting. If
the check doesn’t pass, the protection device will be blocked. If the check is successful, the LCD
will return to its original state.

9.4.9 Delete Device Message

The operation is as follows:

1. Exit the main menu;

2. Press the “＋”, “－”, “＋”, “－” and “ENT”; Press the “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to
the original state). Press the “ENT” to carry out the deletion.

Note!

The operation of deleting device message will delete all messages saved by the protection
device, including fault report, self-check report, binary signal and run report. Furthermore,
the message is irrecoverable after deletion, so the application of the function shall be
cautious.

9.4.10 Modify Device Clock

The operation is as follows:

1. Press the “▲” to enter the main menu;

2. Press the “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “CLOCK” menu, and then press the
“ENT” to enter clock display

3. Press the “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the date or time to be modified;

4. Press the “+” or “-” to modify value, and then press the “ENT” to save the modification
and return to the main menu;

5. Press the “ESC” to cancel the modification and return to the main menu.

9.4.11 Check Software Version

The operation is as follows:

1. Press the “▲” to enter the main menu;

2. Press the “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “VERSION” menu, and then press the
“ENT” to display the software version;

3. Press the “ESC” to return to the main menu.

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 191

Chapter 9 Human Machine Interface

9.4.12 Communication Test

The operation is as follows:

1. Press the “▲” to enter the main menu;

2. Press the “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the “TEST_MODE” menu, and then press the
“ENT” or “►” to enter the menu;

3. Press the “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to the command menu “COMM_TEST”, and
then press the “ENT” to enter the menu, at this moment, the LCD will display “Enter
Communication Test Now…”;

4. Press the “▲” or “▼” to move the cursor to select the corresponding command menu “All
Test”, “Trip Test”, “Alarm Test” and “BI Test”.

Note!

If no input operation is carried out within 60s, exit the communication tes and return to the
“TEST_MODE” menu, at this moment, the LCD will display “Communication Test Exit
Now…”.

5. If selecting the “All Test”, press the “ENT”, and the device will successively carry out the
“Trip Test”, “Alarm Test” and “BI Test”..

6. If selecting the “Trip Test”, “Alarm Test” or “BI Test”, press the “ENT”.

7. Press the “+” or “-” to page up/down, and then press the “▲” or “▼” to move the scroll bar.
(taking the “Trip Test” as an example):

Move the cursor to select the corresponding protection elements. Press the “ENT” to execute the
communication test one by one, the SAS will receive the corresponding fault report, and view the
fault report produced by communication test in the command menu “ITEM_TRP_REPORT”.

Note!

If no input operation is carried out within 60s, exit the communication transmission and
return to the “TEST_MODE” menu, at this moment, the LCD will display “Communication
Test Overtime Exit”.

If selecting the “Alarm Test” or “BI Test”, not only the SAS can receive the corresponding
self-check report or binary signals, but also the self-check report or binary signals
produced by communication test can be respectively viewed by the two command menus
of “ALM_REPORT” and “BI_CHG_REPORT” in the menu “REPORT”.

8. Press the “ESC” to exit this menu (returning to the menu “TEST_MODE”, at this moment,
the LCD will display “Communication Test Exit Now…”.

Note!

192 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 9 Human Machine Interface

The LCD interface provided in this chapter is a mere reference and available for explaining
specific definition of LCD. The displayed interface of the actual protection device may be
different from it, so you shall be subject to the actual protection device.

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 193

Chapter 9 Human Machine Interface

194 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 10 Communications

Chapter 10 Communications

10.1 General Description

This section outlines the remote communications interfaces of NR Relays. The protective device
supports a choice of three protocols via the rear communication interface (RS-485 or Ethernet),
selected via the model number by setting. The protocol provided by the protective device is
indicated in the submenu “EQUIP_SETTINGS”.

The rear EIA RS-485 interface is isolated and is suitable for permanent connection of whichever
protocol is selected. The advantage of this type of connection is that up to 32 protective devices
can be “daisy chained” together using a simple twisted pair electrical connection.

It should be noted that the descriptions contained within this section do not aim to fully detail the
protocol itself. The relevant documentation for the protocol should be referred to for this
information. This section serves to describe the specific implementation of the protocol in the relay.

10.2 Rear Communication Port Information

10.2.1 RS-485 Interface

This protective device provides two rear RS-485 communication ports, and each port has three
terminals in the 12-terminal screw connector located on the back of the relay and each port has a
ground terminal for the earth shield of the communication cable. The rear ports provide RS-485
serial data communication and are intended for use with a permanently wired connection to a
remote control center.

10.2.1.1 EIA RS-485 Standardized Bus

The EIA RS-485 two-wire connection provides a half-duplex fully isolated serial connection to the
product. The connection is polarized and whilst the product’s connection diagrams indicate the
polarization of the connection terminals it should be borne in mind that there is no agreed
definition of which terminal is which. If the master is unable to communicate with the product, and
the communication parameters match, then it is possible that the two-wire connection is reversed.

10.2.1.2 Bus Termination

The EIA RS-485 bus must have 120Ω (Ohm) ½ Watt terminating resistors fitted at either end
across the signal wires (refer to Figure 10.2-1). Some devices may be able to provide the bus
terminating resistors by different connection or configuration arrangements, in which case
separate external components will not be required. However, this product does not provide such a
facility, so if it is located at the bus terminus then an external termination resistor will be required.

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 195

Chapter 10 Communications

Figure 10.2-1 EIA RS-485 bus connection arrangements

10.2.1.3 Bus Connections & Topologies

The EIA RS-485 standard requires that each device is directly connected to the physical cable that
is the communications bus. Stubs and tees are expressly forbidden, such as star topologies. Loop
bus topologies are not part of the EIA RS-485 standard and are forbidden by it also.

Two-core screened cable is recommended. The specification of the cable will be dependent on the
application, although a multi-strand 0.5mm2 per core is normally adequate. Total cable length must
not exceed 500m. The screen must be continuous and connected to ground at one end, normally
at the master connection point; it is important to avoid circulating currents, especially when the
cable runs between buildings, for both safety and noise reasons.

This product does not provide a signal ground connection. If a signal ground connection is present
in the bus cable then it must be ignored, although it must have continuity for the benefit of other
devices connected to the bus. At no stage must the signal ground be connected to the cables
screen or to the product’s chassis. This is for both safety and noise reasons.

10.2.1.4 Biasing

It may also be necessary to bias the signal wires to prevent jabber. Jabber occurs when the signal
level has an indeterminate state because the bus is not being actively driven. This can occur when
all the slaves are in receive mode and the master is slow to turn from receive mode to transmit
mode. This may be because the master purposefully waits in receive mode, or even in a high
impedance state, until it has something to transmit. Jabber causes the receiving device(s) to miss
the first bits of the first character in the packet, which results in the slave rejecting the message
and consequentially not responding. Symptoms of these are poor response times (due to retries),
increasing message error counters, erratic communications, and even a complete failure to
communicate.

Biasing requires that the signal lines be weakly pulled to a defined voltage level of about 1V. There
should only be one bias point on the bus, which is best situated at the master connection point.
The DC source used for the bias must be clean; otherwise noise will be injected. Note that some
devices may (optionally) be able to provide the bus bias, in which case external components will
not be required.

Note!

196 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 10 Communications

It is extremely important that the 120Ω termination resistors are fitted. Failure to do so will
result in an excessive bias voltage that may damage the devices connected to the bus.

As the field voltage is much higher than that required, NR cannot assume responsibility for
any damage that may occur to a device connected to the network as a result of incorrect
application of this voltage.

Ensure that the field voltage is not being used for other purposes (i.e. powering logic inputs)
as this may cause noise to be passed to the communication network.

10.2.2 Ethernet Interface

This protective device can provide four rear Ethernet interfaces (optional) and they are unattached
each other. Parameters of each Ethernet port can be configured in the submenu
“EQUIP_SETTINGS”.

10.2.2.1 Ethernet Standardized Communication Cable

It is recommended to use twisted screened eight-core cable as the communication cable. A picture
is shown bellow.

Figure 10.2-2 Ethernet communication cable

10.2.2.2 Connections and Topologies

Each equipment is connected with an exchanger via communication cable, and thereby it forms a
star structure network. Dual-network is recommended in order to increase reliability. SCADA is
also connected to the exchanger and will play a role of master station, so the every equipment
which has been connected to the exchanger will play a role of slave unit.

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 197

Chapter 10 Communications

Figure 10.2-3 Ethernet communication structure

10.2.3 IEC60870-5-103 Communication

The IEC specification IEC60870-5-103: Telecontrol Equipment and Systems, Part 5: Transmission
Protocols Section 103 defines the use of standards IEC60870-5-1 to IEC60870-5-5 to perform
communication with protective device. The standard configuration for the IEC60870-5-103
protocol is to use a twisted pair EIA RS-485 connection over distances up to 500m. It also supports
to use an Ethernet connection. The relay operates as a slave in the system, responding to
commands from a master station.

To use the rear port with IEC60870-5-103 communication, the relevant settings to the protective
device must be configured.

10.3 IEC60870-5-103 Interface over Serial Port

The IEC60870-5-103 interface over serial port (RS-485) is a master/slave interface with the
protective device as the slave device. It is properly developed by NR.

The protective device conforms to compatibility level 3.

The following IEC60870-5-103 facilities are supported by this interface:

„ Initialization (reset)

„ Time synchronization

„ Event record extraction

„ General interrogation

„ General commands

„ Disturbance records

10.3.1 Physical Connection and Link Layer

Two EIA RS-485 standardized ports are available for IEC60870-5-103 in this protective device.
The transmission speed is optional: 4800 bit/s, 9600 bit/s, 19200 bit/s or 38400 bit/s.

The link layer strictly abides by the rules defined in the IEC60870-5-103.

10.3.2 Initialization
Whenever the protective device has been powered up, or if the communication parameters have
been changed, a reset command is required to initialize the communications. The protective
device will respond to either of the two reset commands (Reset CU or Reset FCB), the difference
is that the Reset CU will clear any unsent messages in the transmit buffer.

The protective device will respond to the reset command with an identification message ASDU 5,
the COT (Cause Of Transmission) of this response will be either Reset CU or Reset FCB
depending on the nature of the reset command.

198 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 10 Communications

10.3.3 Time Synchronization

The protective device time and date can be set using the time synchronization feature of the
IEC60870-5-103 protocol. The protective device will correct for the transmission delay as specified
in IEC60870-5-103. If the time synchronization message is sent as a send/confirm message then
the protective device will respond with a confirmation. Whether the time-synchronization message
is sent as a send confirmation or a broadcast (send/no reply) message, a time synchronization
class 1 event will be generated/produced.

If the protective device clock is synchronized using the IRIG-B input then it will not be possible to
set the protective device time using the IEC60870-5-103 interface. An attempt to set the time via
the interface will cause the protective device to create an event with the current date and time
taken from the IRIG-B synchronized internal clock.

10.3.4 Spontaneous Events

Events are categorized using the following information:

„ Type identification (TYP)

„ Function type (FUN)

„ Information number (INF)

All spontaneous events can be gained by printing, implementing submenu “IEC103_PROTOCOL”

in the menu “PRINT”.

10.3.5 General Interrogation

The GI can be used to read the status of the relay, the function numbers, and information numbers
that will be returned during the GI cycle. The GI cycle strictly abides by the rules defined in the
IEC60870-5-103.

Refer the IEC60870-5-103 standard can get the enough details about general interrogation.

10.3.6 General Service

The generic functions can be used to read the setting and protection measurement of the
protective device, and modify the setting. Two supported type identifications are ASDU 21 and
ASDU 10. For more details about generic functions, see the IEC60870-5-103 standard.

All general classification service group numbers can be gained by printing, implementing submenu
“IEC103_PROTOCOL” in the menu “PRINT”.

10.3.7 Disturbance Records

This protective device can store up to eight disturbance records in its memory. A pickup of the fault
detector or an operation of the relay can make the protective device store the disturbance records.

The disturbance records are stored in uncompressed format and can be extracted using the
standard mechanisms described in IEC60870-5-103.

All channel numbers (ACC) of disturbance data can be gained by printing, implementing submenu

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 199

Chapter 10 Communications

“IEC103_PROTOCOL” in the menu “PRINT”.

10.4 IEC60870-5-103 Interface over Ethernet

The IEC60870-5-103 interface over Ethernet is a master/slave interface with the relay as the slave
device. It is properly developed by NR too. All the service of this relay is based on generic
functions of the IEC60870-5-103. The following table lists all the group number of this relay. And
this relay will send all the relevant information about group caption to the SAS or RTU after
establishing a successful communication link.

Group Number Group Caption Description

0 Device Description
1 Device Parameter
2 Setting Group
3 Setting
6 Virtual Enabling BI
9 Measurement
10 Fault Data
11 Net Setting
12 Enabling BI
13 Operation Element
14 Alarm Info
15 Disturbance Info List

10.5 Messages Description for IEC61850 Protocol

10.5.1 Overview
The IEC 61850 standard is the result of years of work by electric utilities and vendors of electronic
equipment to produce standardized communications systems. IEC 61850 is a series of standards
describing client/server and peer-to-peer communications, substation design and configuration,
testing, environmental and project standards. The complete set includes:

„ IEC 61850-1: Introduction and overview

„ IEC 61850-2: Glossary

„ IEC 61850-3: General requirements

„ IEC 61850-4: System and project management

„ IEC 61850-5: Communications and requirements for functions and device models

„ IEC 61850-6: Configuration description language for communication in electrical substations

related to IEDs

„ IEC 61850-7-1: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder equipment–

200 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 10 Communications

Principles and models

„ IEC 61850-7-2: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder equipment - Abstract
communication service interface (ACSI)

„ IEC 61850-7-3: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder equipment–
Common data classes

„ IEC 61850-7-4: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder equipment–
Compatible logical node classes and data classes

„ IEC 61850-8-1: Specific Communication Service Mapping (SCSM) – Mappings to MMS (ISO
9506-1 and ISO 9506-2) and to ISO/IEC 8802-3

„ IEC 61850-9-1: Specific Communication Service Mapping (SCSM) – Sampled values over
serial unidirectional multidrop point to point link

„ IEC 61850-9-2: Specific Communication Service Mapping (SCSM) – Sampled values over
ISO/IEC 8802-3

„ IEC 61850-10: Conformance testing

These documents can be obtained from the IEC (http://www.iec.ch). It is strongly recommended
that all those involved with any IEC 61850 implementation obtain this document set.

10.5.2 Communication profiles

The PCS-900 series relay supports IEC 61850 server services over TCP/IP communication
protocol stacks. The TCP/IP profile requires the PCS-900 series to have an IP address to establish
communications. These addresses are located in the submenu “EQUIP_SETTINGS”.

1. MMS protocol

IEC 61850 specifies the use of the Manufacturing Message Specification (MMS) at the upper
(application) layer for transfer of real-time data. This protocol has been in existence for a number
of years and provides a set of services suitable for the transfer of data within a substation LAN
environment. Actual IEC 61850-7-2 abstract services and objects are mapped to MMS protocol
services in IEC61850-8-1.

2. Client/server

This is a connection-oriented type of communication. The connection is initiated by the client, and
communication activity is controlled by the client. IEC61850 clients are often substation computers
running HMI programs or SOE logging software. Servers are usually substation equipment such
as protection relays, meters, RTUs, transformer, tap changers, or bay controllers.

3. Peer-to-peer

This is a non-connection-oriented, high speed type of communication usually between substation

equipment, such as protection relays, intelligent terminal. GOOSE is the method of peer-to-peer
communication.

4. Substation configuration language (SCL)

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 201

Chapter 10 Communications

A substation configuration language is a number of files used to describe IED and communication
system realized according to IEC 61850-5 and IEC 61850-7. Each configured device has an IEC
Capability Description (ICD) file and a Configured IED Description (CID) file. The substation single
line information is stored in a System Specification Description (SSD) file. The entire substation
configuration is stored in a Substation Configuration Description (SCD) file. The SCD file is the
combination of the individual ICD files and the SSD file, moreover, add communication system
parameters (MMS, GOOSE, control block, SV control block) and the connection relationship of
GOOSE and SV to SCD file.

10.5.3 Server data organization

IEC61850 defines an object-oriented approach to data and services. An IEC61850 physical device
can contain one or more logical device(s) (for proxy). Each logical device can contain many logical
nodes. Each logical node can contain many data objects. Each data object is composed of data
attributes and data attribute components. Services are available at each level for performing
various functions, such as reading, writing, control commands, and reporting.

Each IED represents one IEC61850 physical device. The physical device contains one or more
logical device(s), and the logical device contains many logical nodes. The logical node LPHD
contains information about the IED physical device. The logical node LLN0 contains information
about the IED logical device.

10.5.3.1 Digital status values

The GGIO logical node is available in the PCS-900 series relays to provide access to digital status
points (including general I/O inputs and warnings) and associated timestamps and quality flags.
The data content must be configured before the data can be used. GGIO provides digital status
points for access by clients. It is intended that clients use GGIO in order to access digital status
values from the PCS-900 series relays. Clients can utilize the IEC61850 buffered reporting
features available from GGIO in order to build sequence of events (SOE) logs and HMI display
screens. Buffered reporting should generally be used for SOE logs since the buffering capability
reduces the chances of missing data state changes. All needed status data objects are transmitted
to HMI clients via buffered reporting, and the corresponding buffered reporting control block
(BRCB) is defined in LLN0.

10.5.3.2 Analog values

Most of analog measured values are available through the MMXU logical nodes, and metering
values in MMTR, the else in MMXN, MSQI and so on. Each MMXU logical node provides data
from a IED current/voltage “source”. There is one MMXU available for each configurable source.
MMXU1 provides data from CT/VT source 1(usually for protection purpose), and MMXU2 provides
data from CT/VT source 2 (usually for monitor and display purpose). All these analog data objects
are transmitted to HMI clients via unbuffered reporting periodically, and the corresponding
unbuffered reporting control block (URCB) is defined in LLN0. MMXUx logical nodes provide the
following data for each source:

„ MMXU.MX.Hz: frequency

„ MMXU.MX.PPV.phsAB: phase AB voltage magnitude and angle

202 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 10 Communications

„ MMXU.MX.PPV.phsBC: phase BC voltage magnitude and angle

„ MMXU.MX.PPV.phsCA: Phase CA voltage magnitude and angle

„ MMXU.MX.PhV.phsA: phase AG voltage magnitude and angle

„ MMXU.MX.PhV.phsB: phase BG voltage magnitude and angle

„ MMXU.MX.PhV.phsC: phase CG voltage magnitude and angle

„ MMXU.MX.A.phsA: phase A current magnitude and angle

„ MMXU.MX.A.phsB: phase B current magnitude and angle

„ MMXU.MX.A.phsC: phase C current magnitude and angle

10.5.3.3 Protection logical nodes

The following list describes the protection elements for PCS-902 series relays. The specified relay
will contain a subset of protection elements from this list.

„ PDIS: phase-to-phase distance, phase-to-ground distance and SOTF distance

„ PTUC: undercurrent

„ PTOC: phase overcurrent, zero sequence overcurrent and overcurrent when CTS

„ PTTR: Thermal overload

„ PTUV: undervoltage

„ PTOV: overvoltage and auxiliary overvoltage

„ PSCH: Protection scheme

„ RBRF:Breaker failure

„ RPSB: Power swing detection/blocking

„ RREC: automatic reclosing

„ RSYN: Synchronism-check

„ RFLO: Fault locator

The protection elements listed above contain start (pickup) and operate flags, instead of any
element has its own start (pickup) flag separately, all the elements share a common start (pickup)
flags “PTRC.ST.Str.general”. The operate flag for PTOC1 is “PTOC1.ST.Op.general”. For
PCS-902 series relays protection elements, these flags take their values from related module for
the corresponding element. Similar to digital status values, the protection trip information is
reported via BRCB, and it also locates in LLN0.

10.5.3.4 LLN0 and other logical nodes

Logical node LLN0 is essential for an IEC61850 based IED. This LN shall be used to address
common issues for Logical Devices. Most of the public services, the common settings, control

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 203

Chapter 10 Communications

values and some device oriented data objects are available here. The public services may be
BRCB, URCB and GSE control blocks and similar global defines for the whole device; the
common settings include all the setting items of communication settings. System settings and
some of the protection setting items, which can be configured to two or more protection elements
(logical nodes). In LLN0, the item Loc is a device control object, this Do item indicates the local
operation for complete logical device, when it is true, all the remote control commands to the IED
will be blocked and those commands make effective until the item Loc is changed to false. In
PCS-900 series relays, besides the logical nodes we describe above, there are some other logical
nodes below in the IEDs:

„ LPHD: Physical device information, the logical node to model common issues for physical
device.

„ PTRC: Protection trip conditioning, it shall be used to connect the “operate” outputs of one or
more protection functions to a common “trip” to be transmitted to XCBR. In addition or
alternatively, any combination of “operate” outputs of protection functions may be combined to
a new “operate” of PTRC.

„ RDRE: Disturbance recorder function. It triggers the fault wave recorder and its output refers
to the “IEEE Standard Format for Transient Data Exchange (COMTRADE) for Power System”
(IEC 60255-24). All enabled channels are included in the recording, independently of the
trigger mode.

10.5.4 Server features and configuration

10.5.4.1 Buffered/unbuffered reporting

IEC61850 buffered and unbuffered reporting control blocks locate in LLN0, they can be configured
to transmit information of protection trip information (in the Protection logical nodes), binary status
values (in GGIO) and analog measured/calculated values (in MMXU, MMTR and MSQI). The
reporting control blocks can be configured in CID files, and then be sent to the IED via an
IEC61850 client. The following items can be configured.

„ TrgOps: Trigger options.

The following bits are supported by the PCS-900 series relays:

－ Bit 1: Data-change

－ Bit 4: Integrity

－ Bit 5: General interrogation

„ OptFlds: Option Fields.

The following bits are supported by the PCS-900 series relays:

－ Bit 1: Sequence-number

－ Bit 2: Report-time-stamp

－ Bit 3: Reason-for-inclusion

204 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 10 Communications

－ Bit 4: Data-set-name

－ Bit 5: Data-reference

－ Bit 6: Buffer-overflow (for buffered reports only)

－ Bit 7: EntryID (for buffered reports only)

－ Bit 8: Conf-revision

－ Bit 9: Segmentation

„ IntgPd: Integrity period.

„ BufTm: Buffer time.

10.5.4.2 File transfer

MMS file services are supported to allow transfer of oscillography, event record or other files from
a PCS-900 series relay.

10.5.4.3 Timestamps

The timestamp values associated with all IEC61850 data items represent the time of the last
change of either the value or quality flags of the data item.

10.5.4.4 Logical node name prefixes

IEC61850 specifies that each logical node can have a name with a total length of 11 characters.
The name is composed of:

„ A five or six-character name prefix.

„ A four-character standard name (for example, MMXU, GGIO, PIOC, etc.).

„ A one or two-character instantiation index.

Complete names are of the form xxxxxxPTOC1, where the xxxxxx character string is configurable.
Details regarding the logical node naming rules are given in IEC61850 parts 6 and 7-2. It is
recommended that a consistent naming convention be used for an entire substation project.

10.5.4.5 GOOSE services

IEC61850 specifies the type of broadcast data transfer services: Generic Object Oriented
Substation Events (GOOSE). IEC61850 GOOSE services provide virtual LAN (VLAN) support,
Ethernet priority tagging, and Ether-type Application ID configuration. The support for VLANs and
priority tagging allows for the optimization of Ethernet network traffic. GOOSE messages can be
given a higher priority than standard Ethernet traffic, and they can be separated onto specific
VLANs. Devices that transmit GOOSE messages also function as servers. Each GOOSE
publisher contains a “GOOSE control block” to configure and control the transmission.

The GOOSE transmission (including subscribing and publishing) is controlled by GOOSE VEBI
settings in device.

The PCS-900 series relays support IEC61850 Generic Object Oriented Substation Event (GOOSE)

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 205

Chapter 10 Communications

communication. All GOOSE messages contain IEC61850 data collected into a dataset. It is this
dataset that is transferred using GOOSE message services. The GOOSE related dataset is
configured in the CID file and it is recommended that the fixed GOOSE be used for
implementations that require GOOSE data transfer between PCS-900 series relays.

IEC61850 GOOSE messaging contains a number of configurable parameters, all of which must be
correct to achieve the successful transfer of data. It is critical that the configured datasets at the
transmission and reception devices are an exact match in terms of data structure, and that the
GOOSE addresses and name strings match exactly.

The general steps required for transmission configuration are:

1. Configure the data.

2. Configure the transmission dataset.

3. Configure the GOOSE service settings.

The general steps required for reception configuration are:

1. Configure the data.

2. Configure the reception dataset.

3. Configure the GOOSE service settings.

10.5.5 ACSI Conformance

10.5.5.1 ACSI basic conformance statement

Services Client Server PCS-900 Series

Client-Server Roles
B11 Server side (of Two-party Application-Association) － C1 Y
B12 Client side (of Two-party Application-Association) C1 － N
SCSMS Supported
B21 SCSM: IEC 61850-8-1 used N N Y
B22 SCSM: IEC 61850-9-1 used N N N
B23 SCSM: IEC 61850-9-2 used N N N
B24 SCSM: other N N N
Generic Substation Event Model (GSE)
B31 Publisher side － O Y
B32 Subscriber side O － Y
Transmission Of Sampled Value Model (SVC)
B41 Publisher side － O N
B42 Subscriber side O － N

Where:

C1: Shall be "M" if support for LOGICAL-DEVICE model has been declared

O: Optional

206 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 10 Communications

M: Mandatory

Y: Supported by PCS-900 series relays

N: Currently not supported by PCS-900 series relays

10.5.5.2 ACSI models conformance statement

Services Client Server PCS-900 Series

M1 Logical device C2 C2 Y
M2 Logical node C3 C3 Y
M3 Data C4 C4 Y
M4 Data set C5 C5 Y
M5 Substitution O O Y
M6 Setting group control O O Y
Reporting
M7 Buffered report control O O Y
M7-1 sequence-number Y Y Y
M7-2 report-time-stamp Y Y Y
M7-3 reason-for-inclusion Y Y Y
M7-4 data-set-name Y Y Y
M7-5 data-reference Y Y Y
M7-6 buffer-overflow Y Y N
M7-7 entryID Y Y Y
M7-8 BufTm N N N
M7-9 IntgPd Y Y Y
M7-10 GI Y Y Y
M8 Unbuffered report control M M Y
M8-1 sequence-number Y Y Y
M8-2 report-time-stamp Y Y Y
M8-3 reason-for-inclusion Y Y Y
M8-4 data-set-name Y Y Y
M8-5 data-reference Y Y Y
M8-6 BufTm N N N
M8-7 IntgPd N Y Y
Logging
M9 Log control O O N
M9-1 IntgPd N N N
M10 Log O O N
GSE
M12 GOOSE O O Y
M13 GSSE O O N
M14 Multicast SVC O O N
M15 Unicast SVC O O N

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 207

Chapter 10 Communications

M16 Time M M Y
M17 File transfer O O Y

Where:

C2: Shall be "M" if support for LOGICAL-NODE model has been declared

C3: Shall be "M" if support for DATA model has been declared

C4: Shall be "M" if support for DATA-SET, Substitution, Report, Log Control, or Time models has
been declared

C5: Shall be "M" if support for Report, GSE, or SMV models has been declared

M: Mandatory

Y: Supported by PCS-900 series relays

N: Currently not supported by PCS-900 series relays

10.5.5.3 ACSI Services conformance statement

Service Server/Publisher PCS-902

Server
S1 ServerDirectory M Y
Application association
S2 Associate M Y
S3 Abort M Y
S4 Release M Y
Logical device
S5 LogicalDeviceDirectory M Y
Logical node
S6 LogicalNodeDirectory M Y
S7 GetAllDataValues M Y
Data
S8 GetDataValues M Y
S9 SetDataValues M Y
S10 GetDataDirectory M Y
S11 GetDataDefinition M Y
Data set
S12 GetDataSetValues M Y
S13 SetDataSetValues O Y
S14 CreateDataSet O N
S15 DeleteDataSet O N
S16 GetDataSetDirectory M Y
Substitution
S17 SetDataValues M Y
Setting group control

208 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 10 Communications

S18 SelectActiveSG M/O Y

S19 SelectEditSG M/O Y
S20 SetSGValuess M/O Y
S21 ConfirmEditSGValues M/O Y
S22 GetSGValues M/O Y
S23 GetSGCBValues M/O Y
Reporting
Buffered report control block
S24 Report M Y
S24-1 data-change M Y
S24-2 qchg-change M N
S24-3 data-update M N
S25 GetBRCBValues M Y
S26 SetBRCBValues M Y
Unbuffered report control block
S27 Report M Y
S27-1 data-change M Y
S27-2 qchg-change M N
S27-3 data-update M N
S28 GetURCBValues M Y
S29 SetURCBValues M Y
Logging
Log control block
S30 GetLCBValues O N
S31 SetLCBValues O N
Log
S32 QueryLogByTime O N
S33 QueryLogAfter O N
S34 GetLogStatusValues O N
Generic substation event model (GSE)
GOOSE control block
S35 SendGOOSEMessage M Y
S36 GetGoReference O Y
S37 GetGOOSEElementNumber O N
S38 GetGoCBValues M Y
S39 SetGoCBValuess M N
Control
S51 Select O N
S52 SelectWithValue M Y
S53 Cancel M Y
S54 Operate M Y
S55 Command-Termination O Y

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 209

Chapter 10 Communications

S56 TimeActivated-Operate O N
File transfer
S57 GetFile M/O Y
S58 SetFile O N
S59 DeleteFile O N
S60 GetFileAttributeValues M/O Y
Time
SNTP M Y

10.5.6 Logical Nodes

10.5.6.1 Logical Nodes Table

The PCS-902 series relays support IEC61850 logical nodes as indicated in the following table.
Note that the actual instantiation of each logical node is determined by the product order code.

Nodes PCS-902 Series

L: System Logical Nodes
LPHD: Physical device information YES
LLN0: Logical node zero YES
P: Logical Nodes For Protection Functions
PDIF: Differential －
PDIR: Direction comparison －
PDIS: Distance YES
PDOP: Directional overpower －
PDUP: Directional underpower －
PFRC: Rate of change of frequency －
PHAR: Harmonic restraint －
PHIZ: Ground detector －
PIOC: Instantaneous overcurrent －
PMRI: Motor restart inhibition －
PMSS: Motor starting time supervision －
POPF: Over power factor －
PPAM: Phase angle measuring －
PSCH: Protection scheme YES
PSDE: Sensitive directional earth fault －
PTEF: Transient earth fault －
PTOC: Time overcurrent YES
PTOF: Overfrequency －
PTOV: Overvoltage YES
PTRC: Protection trip conditioning YES
PTTR: Thermal overload YES
PTUC: Undercurrent －
PTUV: Undervoltage YES

210 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 10 Communications

PUPF: Underpower factor －

PTUF: Underfrequency －
PVOC: Voltage controlled time overcurrent －
PVPH: Volts per Hz －
PZSU: Zero speed or underspeed －
R: Logical Nodes For Protection Related Functions
RDRE: Disturbance recorder function YES
RADR: Disturbance recorder channel analogue －
RBDR: Disturbance recorder channel binary －
RDRS: Disturbance record handling －
RBRF: Breaker failure YES
RDIR: Directional element －
RFLO: Fault locator YES
RPSB: Power swing detection/blocking YES
RREC: Autoreclosing YES
RSYN: Synchronism-check or synchronizing YES
C: Logical Nodes For Control
CALH: Alarm handling －
CCGR: Cooling group control －
CILO: Interlocking －
CPOW: Point-on-wave switching －
CSWI: Switch controller －
G: Logical Nodes For Generic References
GAPC: Generic automatic process control YES
GGIO: Generic process I/O YES
GSAL: Generic security application －
I: Logical Nodes For Interfacing And Archiving
IARC: Archiving －
IHMI: Human machine interface －
ITCI: Telecontrol interface －
ITMI: Telemonitoring interface －
A: Logical Nodes For Automatic Control
ANCR: Neutral current regulator －
ARCO: Reactive power control －
ATCC: Automatic tap changer controller －
AVCO: Voltage control －
M: Logical Nodes For Metering And Measurement
MDIF: Differential measurements －
MHAI: Harmonics or interharmonics －
MHAN: Non phase related harmonics or interharmonic －
MMTR: Metering －
MMXN: Non phase related measurement －

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 211

Chapter 10 Communications

MMXU: Measurement YES

MSQI: Sequence and imbalance －
MSTA: Metering statistics －
S: Logical Nodes For Sensors And Monitoring
SARC: Monitoring and diagnostics for arcs －
SIMG: Insulation medium supervision (gas) －
SIML: Insulation medium supervision (liquid) －
SPDC: Monitoring and diagnostics for partial discharges －
X: Logical Nodes For Switchgear
TCTR: Current transformer YES
TVTR: Voltage transformer YES
Y: Logical Nodes For Power Transformers
YEFN: Earth fault neutralizer (Peterson coil) －
YLTC: Tap changer －
YPSH: Power shunt －
YPTR: Power transformer －
Z: Logical Nodes For Further Power System Equipment
ZAXN: Auxiliary network －
ZBAT: Battery －
ZBSH: Bushing －
ZCAB: Power cable －
ZCAP: Capacitor bank －
ZCON: Converter －
ZGEN: Generator －
ZGIL: Gas insulated line －
ZLIN: Power overhead line －
ZMOT: Motor －
ZREA: Reactor －
ZRRC: Rotating reactive component －
ZSAR: Surge arrestor －
ZTCF: Thyristor controlled frequency converter －
ZTRC: Thyristor controlled reactive component －

10.6 GOOSE Service

10.6.1 GOOSE Introduction

The General Object oriented substation event (GOOSE) defined in IEC61850 standard is based
on the fast Ethernet multi-broadcasting message transmission, taking place of the hard-wired
communication mode between classic intelligent electronic device (IED) and providing a fast,
efficient and reliable method for communication among logic nodes.

The GOOSE service supports the exchange of public data comprised of data sets, it is used to

212 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 10 Communications

protect the data transmission which requires high real-time like tripping, breaker position and
interlocked information. The information exchange of GOOSE service is based on the
publish/subscribe mechanism, and any IED device in the same GOOSE network can be
conducted as subscription terminal to receive data and as publication terminal to provide
data to other IED device as well, so that the increasing or modification of communication data
between IED devices can be realized in a much easier way.

10.6.2 GOOSE Function

The PCS-902 series devices use independent high efficient DSP board to realize GOOSE, so it
has super-high real-time property and reliability. Two 100M FDX optical fiber Ethernet interfaces
on the DSP board can be corresponded to different VLAN networks. The GOOSE dual-networks
configuration improves the reliability and stability of system.

1. GOOSE receiving/sending mechanism

In order to ensure the real-time property and reliability of GOOSE service, GOOSE message
adopts ASN.1 code which relates to basic encoding rule (BER) and transmit data directly in
Ethernet link layer without passing through TCP/IP protocol and also adopts special
receiving/sending mechanism.

Sending of the GOOSE message adopts heartbeat message and position-altering message fast
resending combination mechanism. If the data in GOOSE data sets is not changed, the heartbeat
message whose interval is T0 will be sent, the status number (stnum) in message will not be
changed and the sequence number (sqnum) will be increased progressively. If the data in GOOSE
data set is changed, after sending a frame of position-altering message, the position-altering
message will be fast resent in the interval of T0, T1, T2, and T3. The status number (stnum) in the
message whose data is position-altered will be increased, and the sequence number (sqnum) will
be started from zero.

The GOOSE receiving can detect link interrupt according to the TATL (Time Allow to Live) in the
GOOSE message. The GOOSE data receiving mechanism can be divided into single frame
receiving and dual-frames receiving. The intelligent operation box uses dual-frames receiving
mechanism and update data after receiving two frames of messages with the same GOOSE data.
Other protection and monitoring devices use single frame receiving mechanism and update data
immediately after receiving position-altering message (stnum changed). If the status number
(stnum) in the received message is not changed, dual-frames message confirmation will be used
to update data.

2. GOOSE Alarm

GOOSE will alarm the abnormal conditions produced during receiving/sending process, the
GOOSE alarms mainly include: GOOSE network A/B network link breaking alarm, GOOSE
configuration inconformity alarm and GOOSE network A/B network-storm alarm.

The GOOSE network A/B link breaking alarm is: this alarm will be produced when correct GOOSE
message is not received in 2 times of the TATL (Time Allow to Live).

The GOOSE configuration inconformity alarm is: the attribute of GOOSE control block of GOOSE

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 213

Chapter 10 Communications

publisher and subscriber like configuration version number must be identical. Otherwise this
GOOSE configuration inconformity alarm will be produced.

The GOOSE network A/B network-storm alarm is: when network-storm is produced in GOOSE
network, if data flow of network port is beyond normal range and abnormal message is produced,
this GOOSE network A/B network-storm alarm will be produced.

3. GOOSE Service

When service status of the device is set to 1, the GOOSE message sent by the device has a Test
Flag and receiving terminal can obtain service status of sending terminal by the test flag of
message. When the service status of sending terminal conforms to that of receiving terminal, the
device will carry out normal processing to the received GOOSE data. When the service status of
sending terminal doesn’t conform to that of receiving terminal, the device will process the received
GOOSE data accordingly to ensure that the serviced device will not influence the normal running
of device, improving the flexibility and reliability of GOOSE service.

10.7 General Description

This section outlines the remote communications interfaces of NR Relays. The protective device
supports a choice of three protocols via the rear communication interface (RS-485 or Ethernet),
selected via the model number by setting. The protocol provided by the protective device is
indicated in the submenu in the “EQUIP_SETTINGS” column. Using the keypad and LCD, set the
parameter [Protocol], the corresponding protocol will be selected.

The rear EIA RS-485 interface is isolated and is suitable for permanent connection of whichever
protocol is selected. The advantage of this type of connection is that up to 32 protective devices
can be “daisy chained” together using a simple twisted pair electrical connection.

It should be noted that the descriptions contained within this section do not aim to fully detail the
protocol itself. The relevant documentation for the protocol should be referred to for this
information. This section serves to describe the specific implementation of the protocol in the relay.

10.8 Rear Communication Port Information

10.8.1 RS-485 Interface
This protective device provides two rear RS-485 communication ports, and each port has three
terminals in the 12-terminal screw connector located on the back of the relay and each port has a
ground terminal for the earth shield of the communication cable. The rear ports provide RS-485
serial data communication and are intended for use with a permanently wired connection to a
remote control center.

10.8.1.1 EIA RS-485 Standardized Bus

The EIA RS-485 two-wire connection provides a half-duplex fully isolated serial connection to the
product. The connection is polarized and whilst the product’s connection diagrams indicate the
polarization of the connection terminals it should be borne in mind that there is no agreed
definition of which terminal is which. If the master is unable to communicate with the product, and

214 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 10 Communications

the communication parameters match, then it is possible that the two-wire connection is reversed.

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 215

Chapter 10 Communications

216 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 11 Installation and Commissioning

Chapter 11 Installation and Commissioning

11.1 Introduction
This chapter focuses on the instructions on how to install and commission the protective device,
including procedures for mechanical and electrical installation, energizing and checking of external
circuitry, setting and configuration as well as verifying settings and performing a directionality test..
It can be used as a reference if a periodic test is performed.

The chapter contains the following information:

1) The “Safety information” presents warning and note signs, which users should draw
attention to.

2) The “Overview” gives an overview of the major task when installing and commissioning the
protection equipment.

3) The “Unpacking and checking the protective device” contains instructions on how to
receive the protection equipment.

4) The “Installing the protective device” contains instructions on how to install the protection
equipment.

5) The “Checking the external circuitry” contains instructions on how to check that the
protection equipment is properly connected to the protection system.

6) The “Energizing the protective device” contains instructions on how to start-up the
protection equipment.

7) The “Setting the protective device” contains instructions on how to download settings and
configuration to the protection equipment.

8) The “Establishing connection and verifying communication” contains instructions on how

to verify the communication.

9) The “Verifying settings by secondary injection” contains instructions on how to verify that
each included function operates correctly according to the set value.

10) The “Final Check” contains instructions on how verify that the protection equipment is
properly configured.

The chapter is addressing the installation, commissioning and maintenance personnel responsible
for taking the protection into normal service and out of service. The installation personnel must
have a basic knowledge of handling electronic equipment. The commissioning and maintenance
personnel must be expert in using protection equipment, test equipment, protection functions and
the configured functional logics in the protection.

11.2 Safety Information

This section contains safety information. Warning signs are presented to remind users to be

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 217

Chapter 11 Installation and Commissioning

careful during operations in order to avoid human injuries or damage to equipment.

„ Warning signs

Warning!

„ Strictly follow the company and country safety regulations. Working in a high voltage
environment requires serious approach to avoid human injuries and damage to
equipment.

„ Do not touch circuitry during operation. Potentially lethal voltages and currents are
present.

„ Always avoid touching the circuitry when the cover is removed. The product contains
electronic circuitries which can be damaged if exposed to static electricity (ESD). The
electronic circuitries also contain high voltage which is lethal to humans.

„ Always use suitable isolated test pins when measuring signals in open circuitry.
Potentially lethal voltages and currents are present.

„ Never connect or disconnect a wire and/or a connector to or from a protection equipment

during normal operation. Hazardous voltages and currents are present that may be lethal.
Operation may be disrupted and protection equipment and measuring circuitry may be
damaged.

„ Always connect the protection equipment to protective ground, regardless of the

operating conditions. This also applies to special occasions such as bench testing,
demonstrations and off-site configuration. Operating the protection equipment without
proper grounding may damage both terminal and measuring circuitry, and may cause
injuries in case of an accident.

„ Never disconnect a secondary connection of current transformer circuit without

short-circuiting the transformer’s secondary winding. Operating a current transformer
with the secondary winding open will cause a massive potential build-up that may
damage the transformer and may cause injuries to humans.

„ Never unmount the front or back cover from a powered equipment or from a protection
equipment connected to powered circuitry. Potentially lethal voltages and currents are
present.

„ Caution signs

Caution!

„ Always transport modules using certified conductive bags. Always handle modules using
a conductive wrist strap connected to protective ground and on a suitable antistatic
surface. Electrostatic discharge (ESD) may cause damage to the module.

„ Do not connect live wires to the protection equipment. Internal circuitry may be damaged.

218 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 11 Installation and Commissioning

„ Always use a conductive wrist strap connected to protective ground when replacing
modules. Electrostatic discharge (ESD) may damage the module and protection
equipment circuitry.

„ Take care to avoid electrical shock if accessing wiring and connection protection
equipment when installing and commissioning.

„ Note signs

Note!

„ Changing the active setting group will inevitably change the protection equipment’s
operation. Be careful and check regulations before making the change.

„ The protection assembly is designed for a maximum continuous current of four times
rated value.

„ Activating the other setting group without proper configuration may seriously affect the
protection equipment’s operation.

11.3 Overview
The settings for each function must be calculated before the commissioning task can start. A
configuration, made in the configuration and programming tool, must also be available if the
protection equipment does not have a factory configuration downloaded.

The protection equipment is unpacked and visually checked. It is preferably mounted in a cubicle.
The connection to the protection system has to be checked in order to verify that the installation
was successful.

The installation and commissioning task starts with configuring the digital communication modules,
if included. The protection equipment can then be configured and set, which means that settings
and a configuration has to be applied if the protection equipment does not have a factory
configuration downloaded. Then the operation of each included function according to applied
settings has to be verified by secondary injection. A complete check of the configuration can then
be made. A conformity test of the secondary system has also to be done. When the primary
system has been energized a directionality check should be made.

11.4 Unpacking And Checking The Protection Equipment

Procedure

1) Remove the transport casing.

2) Visually inspect the protection equipment.

„ Carefully examine the protection panel, protection equipment and other accessory parts
to check if any physical damage has occurred during installation.

„ The rating information should be given for the protection equipment.

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 219

Chapter 11 Installation and Commissioning

„ The rating information of other auxiliary protections should be checked to ensure it is

correct for the particular installation.

Panel wiring:

Check the conducting wire used in the panel to assure that the cross section meet the requirement.
Carefully examine the wiring to see that they are no connection failure exists.

Label:

Check all the isolator links, terminal blocks, ferrules, indicators, switches and push buttons to
make sure that their labels meet the requirements of this project.

Equipment plug-in modules:

Check each plug-in module of the equipments on the panel to make sure that they are well
installed into the equipment without any screw loosened.

Earthing cable:

Check whether the earthing cable from the panel terminal block is safely screwed to the panel
steel sheet.

Switch, keypad, isolator links and push button:

Check whether all the switches, equipment keypad, isolator links and push buttons work normally
and smoothly.

3) Check that all items are included in accordance with the delivery documents.

The user is requested to check that all software functions are included according to the delivery
documents after the terminal has been energized.

4) Check for transport damages.

These product checks cover all aspects of the protection, which should be checked to ensure that
the protection has no physically damages prior to commissioning, all functions are correctly and all
input quantity measurements are within the stated tolerances.

11.5 Installing The Protective Device

11.5.1 Overview
The mechanical and electrical environmental conditions at the installation site must be within
permissible range according to the technical data of the protection equipment. Dusty, damp places,
places liable to rapid temperature variations, powerful vibrations and shocks, surge voltages of
high amplitude and fast rise time, strong induced magnetic fields or similar extreme conditions
should be avoided. Please refer to Chapter 2 for details.

Sufficient space must be reserved in front of and at rear of the protection panel to allow access for
maintenance and future modifications. Flush mounted protection equipment should be mounted
so that equipment modules can be added and replaced without excessive demounting.

220 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 11 Installation and Commissioning

11.5.2 Dimensions
The equipment adopts IEC standard chassis and is rack with modular structure. It uses an integral
faceplate and plug terminal block on backboard for external connections. PCS-902 series is IEC
4U high and 19” wide. Figure 11.5-1 shows its dimensions and Figure 11.5-2 shows the panel
cut-out.
101.6
177.0

Figure 11.5-1 Dimensions of PCS-902

465.0
101.6

179.0

4-Ф6.8

450.0

Figure 11.5-2 panel cut-out of PCS-902

11.5.3 Grounding Guidelines

Switching operations in HV installations generate transient overvoltages on control signal cables.
There is also a background of electromagnetic RF fields in electrical installations that can induce
spurious currents in the devices or the leads connected to them.

All these influences can effect the operation of electronic apparatus. On the other hand, electronic
apparatus can transmit interference that can disrupt the operation of other apparatus.

In order to minimize these influences as far as possible, certain standards have to be observed
with respect to grounding, wiring and screening.

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 221

Chapter 11 Installation and Commissioning

Note!

All these precautions can only be effective if the station ground is of good quality.

11.5.4 Cubicle Grounding

The cubicle must be designed and fitted out, so that the impedance for RF interference of the
ground path from the electronic device to the cubicle ground terminal can be limited to a minimum
value.

Metal accessories such as side plates, blanking plates etc., must be effectively connected
surface-to-surface to the grounded frame to ensure a low-impedance path to ground for RF
interference. The contact surfaces must not only conduct well, they must also be non-corroding.

Note!

If the above conditions are not fulfilled, there is a possibility of the cubicle or parts of it
forming a resonant circuit at certain frequencies that would amplify the transmission of
interference by the devices installed and also reduce their immunity to induced
interference.

Movable parts of the cubicle such as doors (front and back) or hinged equipment frames must be
effectively grounded to the frame by three braided copper strips (refer to Figure 11.5-3).

The metal parts of the cubicle housing and the ground rail are interconnected electrically
conducting and corrosion proof. The contact surfaces shall be as large as possible.

Note!

For metallic connections please observe the voltage difference of both materials according
to the electrochemical code.

The cubicle ground rail must be effectively connected to the station ground rail by a grounding strip
(braided copper).

222 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 11 Installation and Commissioning

Figure 11.5-3 Cubicle grounding system

11.5.5 Ground Connection on the Device

There is a ground terminal on the rear panel (refer to Figure 11.5-4), and the ground braided
copper strip can be connected with it. Take care that the grounding strip is always as short as
possible. The important thing is that the device is only grounded at one point. Grounding loops
from unit to unit are not allowed.

There are some ground terminals on some connectors of the relays, and the sign is “GND”. All the
ground terminals are connected in the cabinet of this relay. So, the ground terminal on the rear
panel (refer to Figure 11.5-4) is the only ground terminal of this device.

Figure 11.5-4 Ground terminal

11.5.6 Grounding Strips and their Installation

High frequency currents are produced by interference in the ground connections and because of
skin effect at these frequencies, only the surface region of the grounding strips is of consequence.

The grounding strips must be of (preferably tinned) braided copper and not round copper
conductors, as the cross-section of round copper would have to be too large.

Data of braided copper strip: threaded M4, 4.0mm2. Proper terminations must be fitted to both
ends (press/pinch fit and tinned) with a hole so as to bolt them firmly to the connecting items.

The surfaces to which the grounding strips are bolted must be electrically conducting and
non-corroding.

The following figure shows the ground strip and termination.

Figure 11.5-5 Ground strip and termination

11.5.7 Making the electrical connections

Always make sure established guidelines for this type of terminal is followed during installation.
When necessary use screened twisted-pair cables to minimize susceptibility. Otherwise, use any

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 223

Chapter 11 Installation and Commissioning

kind of regular nonscreened tinned RK cable or equivalent.

When using screened cabling always use 360° full screen cable bushing to ensure screen
coupling. Ensure that all signals of the single circuit are in the same single cable. Avoid mixing
current and voltage measuring signals in the same cable. Also use separate cables for control and
measuring circuits.

1) Connecting the VT/CT circuits:

Heavy-duty terminal block, M4 threaded terminal ends. VT circuit must be connected with the
protective device through an MCB.

2) Connecting the auxiliary power:

Auxiliary power cords cross can be directly screwed fixed on the rear panel of DC board..

3) Input/output signal connectors:

Welding terminals. Those devices are supplied with sufficient M4 screws for connections to the
rear mounted terminal blocks using ring terminals, with a recommended maximum of two ring
terminals per relay terminal.

To meet the insulation requirements of the terminal block, for the sake of safety, an insulating
sleeve should be fitted over the ring terminal after crimping.

The wire used for all connections to the welding terminal blocks and heavy duty terminal blocks,
except for the EIA RS-485 port, should have a minimum voltage rating of 300Vrms.

It is recommended that the auxiliary power circuit wiring should be protected by using a 16A high
rupture capacity (HRC) fuse of type NIT or TIA. For safety reasons, current transformer circuits
must never be open.

4) Connecting to protective ground:

Connect the unit to the grounding bar of cubicle with green/yellow conductor; connected to the
protective Earthing terminal at the back of the DC board. Attend that the earth wire must be as
short as possible. All cautions have to be taken to ensure the best electrical conductivity,
particularly the contact quality and stainless conductor. The impedance between the relay Earthing
terminal and the Earth must be less than 20mΩ under 12Volt, 50Hz. What matters is that the
device has to be only grounded at one point. Loop grounding from unit to unit is not allowed.

5) Installing the optic fibres

Connectors are generally color coded; connect blue or dark grey cable connectors to blue or dark
grey (receive) back-side connectors. Connect black or grey cable connectors to black or grey
(transmit) back-side connectors.

Fiber optical cables are sensitive to handling. Do not bend too sharply. The minimum curvature
radius is 15 cm for plastic fibers and 25 cm for glass fibers. If cable straps are used, apply with
loose fit.

224 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 11 Installation and Commissioning

Note!

Always hold the connector, never the cable, when connecting or disconnecting optical
fibres. Do not twist, pull or bend the fibre. Invisible damage may increase fibre damping
thus making communication impossible.

6) Installing the RS-485 serial port communication cables:

When using galvanic connection between protective relay and communication equipment or
point-to-point galvanic connection between two protective relays it is essential that the cable
installation is carefully done. This is true regardless of type of module used, only the possible
length of the cable differs. The factors that must be taken into account is the susceptibility for noise
disturbance, due to that the levels of the communication signal are very low. For the best result, a
cable with twisted pairs with screen should be used.

For RS485 serial communication interface, a termination 120-ohm resistor has to be connected at
each extremity of the bus. Please refer to Chapter 10.

11.6 Check The External Circuitry

Users must check the installation including the verification of connection between relay and other
parts of the protection system. This shall be processed when the relay and all connected circuits
are de-energized.

1) Checking the VT/CT circuits

Check that the wiring is in strict accordance with the supplied wiring diagram.

Test the circuitry. The following tests are recommended:

„ Polarity check

„ CT circuit current measurement (primary injection test)

„ Grounding check

The polarity check verifies the integrity of the circuits and the phase relationship. The check should
be performed as close as possible to the relay. The primary injection test verifies the CT ration and
the wiring all the way through from the primary system to the relay. Injection must be performed to
each phase-to-neutral circuit and each phase-to-phase pair. In each case currents in all phases
and the neutral line are measured.

2) Checking the power supply

Check that the value of the auxiliary supply voltage remains in the permissible range under all
operating conditions. Check that the polarity is correct according to the instruction manual on the
rear plate of DC board.

3) Checking binary input circuits

Preferably, disconnect the binary input connector form the binary input cards. Check all connected

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 225

Chapter 11 Installation and Commissioning

signals so that both input level and polarity are in accordance with the relay’s specifications.

Note!

The binary inputs may be energized from an external dc auxiliary supply (e.g. the station
battery) in some installations. Check that this is not the case before connecting the field
voltage otherwise damage to the protection may result. The status of each binary input can
be viewed using either tool software installed in a portable PC or by checking the front
man-machine interface LCD. When each binary input is energized the display will change
to indicate the new state of the inputs.

4) Checking binary output circuits

Preferably, disconnect the binary output connector form the binary output cards. Check all
connected signals so that both load and polarity are in accordance with the relay’s specifications.

11.7 Energizing The Protective Device

Before the procedures in this section can be carried out, the connection to external circuitry must
be checked to ensure that the installation was made correctly.

User must energize the power supply to the relay to start it up. This could be done in a numerous
of ways, from energizing a whole cubicle to energizing a single relay. The user should reconfigure
the relay settings. The relay time must be set. The self-supervision function should also be
checked to verify that the relay unit operates properly. User could also check the software version,
the relay’s serial number, the installed modules, and their ordering number to ensure that the relay
is according to delivery and ordering specifications.

1) Checking front panel LCD display

Connect the relay to DC power supply correctly and turn the relay on. Check displayed program
version and time in command menu to ensure they are corresponding to what ordered.

2) Setting the date and time of the protective device

If time and date is not being maintained by substation automation system, it should be set
manually.

Set the date and time to the correct local time and date using menu item “CLOCK”. Please refer to
the section “Adjust the Clock” for detailed procedures.

If the auxiliary supply fails, fit a battery on CPU board, time and date will be maintained. Therefore
when the auxiliary supply is restored, the time and date will be corrected and there is not need to
set it again.

To test this, remove the auxiliary supply from the relay for approximately 30s. After being
re-energized, the time and date should be correct.

3) Checking light emitting diodes (LEDs)

On power up, the green LED “HEALTHY” should have illuminated and stayed on indicating that

226 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 11 Installation and Commissioning

the protective device is healthy.

The relay has latched signal relays which remember the state of the trip. Therefore these
indicators may also illuminate when the auxiliary supply is applied. If any of these LEDs are
lightened, then they should be reset before proceeding with further testing. If the LED is
successfully reset, the LED goes out.

It is likely that alarms related to voltage transformer supervision will not reset at this stage.

11.8 Setting The Protective Device

The customer specific values for each setting parameter have to be available. Each function
included in the relay has several setting parameters which has to be set in order to make the relay
behave as intended. A default value is provided for each parameter from factory.

All settings can be:

„ Download from a PC or laptop with tool software or remotely by SCADA. Front port
communication has to be established before the settings can be downloaded.

„ Entered manually through the local HMI

To change settings through the local HMI need a password which is “+”, “◄”, “▲” and “-” keyboard
on the front panel.

Unless previously agreed to the contrary, the customer will be responsible for determining the
application-specific settings to be applied to the protection, testing of any scheme logic applied by
external wiring and/or configuration of the protection’s internal programmable scheme logic.

11.9 Establishing Connection And Verifying Communication

This test should only be performed where the protection is to be accessed from a remote location
and will vary depending on the adopted communications standard.

The test is not intended for the verification of operation of the complete system from the relay to
the remote location, but for the protection’s rear communications port and any protocol converter
necessary.

11.10 Verifying settings by secondary injection

Required tools for testing of a protective device:

Minimum equipment required:

„ Multifunctional dynamic current and voltage injection test set with interval timer.

„ Multimeter with suitable AC current range and AC/DC voltage ranges of 0-440V and 0-250V
respectively.

„ Continuity tester (if not included in the multimeter).

„ Phase angle meter.

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 227

Chapter 11 Installation and Commissioning

„ Phase rotation meter.

Note!

Modern test set may contain many of the above features in one unit.

Optional equipment:

„ An electronic or brushless insulation tester with a DC output not exceeding 500 V (for
insulation resistance test when required).

„ A portable PC, with appropriate software (this enables the rear communications port to be
tested, if this is to be used, and will also save considerable time during commissioning).

„ EIA RS-485 to EIA RS-232 converter (if EIA RS-485 IEC60870-5-103 port is being tested).

„ An EPSON® 300K printer.

„ PCS-9000 serials dedicated protection tester HELP2000.

At the same time, the calculated settings, substation configuration diagram, the protective device
diagram and the instruction manual are necessary for tests.

The relay has to be set before the testing can start. Only the functions that are used should be
tested.

The response from a test can be viewed in different ways:

„ Binary output signals

„ Service values in the local HMI

„ A PC with tool software or SCADA or master station

All used setting groups should be tested. The user can release the functions to be tested and
prevent other functions from operation by setting the corresponding parameters. The user could
also energize the binary input [BI_BlkComm] to disable communication function to ensure that no
events are reported to remote station during the test.

The setting checks ensure that all of the application-specific protection settings (i.e. both the
protection’s function and programmable scheme logic settings), for the particular installation, have
been correctly applied to the protection.

11.10.1 Insulation test (if required)

Insulation resistance tests are only necessary during commissioning if required .

Isolate all wiring from the earth and test the isolation with an electronic or brushless insulation
tester at a DC voltage not exceeding 500V, The circuits need to be tested should include:

„ Voltage transformer circuits

„ Current transformer circuits

228 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 11 Installation and Commissioning

„ DC power supply

„ Optic-isolated control inputs

„ Output contacts

„ Communication ports

The insulation resistance should be greater than 100MΩ at 500V.

Test method:

Unplug all the terminals sockets of this protective device, and apply insulation resistance test to
each circuit above with an electronic or brushless insulation tester.

On completion of the insulation resistance tests, ensure all external wiring is correctly reconnected
to the protection

11.10.2 AC measurement check

1. Current measurement check

This test verifies that the accuracy of current measurement is within the acceptable tolerances.
Checking its magnitude using a multimeter. The corresponding reading can then be checked
either in the protection’s submenu “PROT_MEASUREMENT” column or a portable computer
connected to the front communication port with tool software.

The measurement accuracy of the protection is ± 5%. However, an additional allowance must be
made for the accuracy of the test equipment being used.

2. Voltage measurement check

This test verifies that the accuracy of voltage measurement is within the acceptable tolerances.
Checking its magnitude using a multimeter. The corresponding reading either in the protection’s
submenu “PROT_MEASUREMENT” or a portable computer connected to the front
communication port with tool software.

The measurement accuracy of the protection is ±5%. However, an additional allowance must be
made for the accuracy of the test equipment being used.

11.10.3 Print fault report

In order to acquire the details of protection operation, it is convenient to print the fault report of
protection device. The printing work can be easily finished when operator presses the print button
on panel of protection device to energize binary input [BI_Print] or operate control menu. What
should be noticed is that only the latest fault report can be printed if operator presses the print
button. A complete fault report includes the content shown as follows.

1) Trip event report

2) Binary input when protection devices start

3) Self-check and the transition of binary input in the process of devices start

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 229

Chapter 11 Installation and Commissioning

4) Fault wave forms compatible with COMTRADE

5) The setting value when the protection device trips

11.10.4 On-load Checks

The objectives of the on-load checks are:

1) Confirm the external wiring to the current and voltage inputs is correct.

2) Measure the magnitude of on-load current and voltage (if applicable).

3) Check the polarity of each current transformer.

However, these checks can only be carried out if there are no restrictions preventing the
tenderization of the plant protected.

Remove all test leads, temporary shorting leads, etc. and replace any external wiring that has
been removed to facilitate testing.

If it is necessary to disconnect any of the external wiring from the protection in order to perform a
foregoing tests, it should be ensured that all connections are replaced in accordance with the
relevant external connection or scheme diagram. Confirm current and voltage transformer wiring.

11.11 Final Check

After the above tests are completed, remove all tests or temporary shorting leads, etc. If it has
been necessary to disconnect all the external wiring from the protection in order to perform the
wiring verification tests. It should be ensured that all connections are replaced in accordance with
the relevant external connection or scheme diagram.

Ensure that the protection has been restored to service.

If the protection is in a new installation or the circuit breaker has just been maintained, the circuit
breaker maintenance and current counters should be zero. If a test block is installed, remove the
test plug and replace the cover so that the protection is put into service.

Ensure that all event records, fault records, disturbance records and alarms have been cleared
and LED’s has been reset before leaving the protection.

230 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 12 Maintenance

Chapter 12 Maintenance
NR numerical relay does not require any special maintenance. All measurements and signal
processing circuit are fully solid state. All input modules are also fully solid state. The output relays
are hermetically sealed.

Since the device is almost completely self-monitored, from the measuring inputs to the output
relays, hardware and software defects are automatically detected and reported. The
self-monitoring ensures the high availability of the device and generally allows a corrective rather
than preventive maintenance strategy. Therefore, maintenance checks in short intervals are not
required.

Operation of the device is automatically blocked when a hardware failure is detected. If a problem
is detected in the external measuring circuits, the device normally only provides alarm messages.

12.1 Appearance Check

1. The relay case should be clean without any dust stratification. Case cover should be sealed
well. No component has any mechanical damage and distortion, and they should be firmly fixed in
the case. Relay terminals should be in good condition. The keys on the front panel with very good
feeling can be operated flexibly.

2. It is only allowed to plug or withdraw relay board when the supply is reliably switched off.
Never allow the CT secondary circuit connected to this equipment to be opened while the primary
system is live when withdrawing an AC module. Never try to insert or withdraw the relay board
when it is unnecessary.

3. Check weld spots on PCB whether they are well soldered without any rosin joint. All dual
inline components must be well plugged.

12.2 Failure Tracing And Repair

Failures will be detected by automatic supervision or regular testing.

When a failure is detected by supervision, a remote alarm is issued and the failure is indicated on
the front panel with LED indicators and LCD display. It is also recorded in the event record.
Failures detected by supervision are traced by checking the “ALM_REPORT” screen on the LCD.

When a failure is detected during regular testing, confirm the following:

„ Test circuit connections are correct

„ Modules are securely inserted in position

„ Correct DC power voltage is applied

„ Correct AC inputs are applied

„ Test procedures comply with those stated in the manual

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 231

Chapter 12 Maintenance

12.3 Replace Failed Modules

If the failure is identified in the relay module and the user has spare modules, the user can recover
the protection by replacing the failed modules.

Repair at the site should be limited to module replacement. Maintenance at the component level is
not recommended.

Check that the replacement module has an identical module name (AI, PWR, CPU, SIG, BI, BO,
etc.) and hardware type-form to the removed module. Furthermore, the CPU module replaced
should have the same software version. In addition, the AI and PWR module replaced should have
the same ratings.

The module name is indicated on the top front of the module. The software version is indicated in
LCD menu “VERSION”.

Caution!

When handling a module, take anti-static measures such as wearing an earthed wrist band
and placing modules on an earthed conductive mat. Otherwise, many of the electronic
components could from damages. After replacing the CPU module, check the settings.

1) Replacing a module

„ Switch off the DC power supply

„ Disconnect the trip outputs

„ Short circuit all AC current inputs and disconnect all AC voltage inputs

„ Unscrew the module.

Warning!

Hazardous voltage can be present in the DC circuit just after switching off the DC power
supply. It takes approximately 30 seconds for the voltage to discharge.

2) Replacing the Human Machine Interface Module (front panel)

„ Open the relay front panel

„ Unplug the ribbon cable on the front panel by pushing the catch outside.

„ Detach the HMI module from the relay

„ Attach the replacement module in the reverse procedure.

3) Replacing the AI, PWR, CPU, BI or BO module

„ Unscrew the module connector

„ Unplug the connector from the target module.

232 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 12 Maintenance

„ Unscrew the module.

„ Pull out the module

„ Inset the replacement module in the reverser procedure.

„ After replacing the CPU module, input the application-specific setting values again.

Warning!

Units and modules may only be replaced while the supply is switched off and only by
appropriately trained and qualified personnel. Strictly observe the basic precautions to
guard against electrostatic discharge.

Warning!

When handling a module, take anti-static measures such as wearing an earthed wrist band
and placing modules on an earthed conductive mat. Otherwise, many of the electronic
components could suffer damage. After replacing the CPU module, check the settings.

Danger!

After replacing modules, be sure to check that the same configuration is set as before the
replacement. If this is not the case, there is a danger of the unintended operation of
switchgear taking place or of protections not functioning correctly. Persons may also be
put in danger.

12.4 Replace Button Battery

When the voltage of button Battery on CPU board is below 2.5 volts (nominal voltage is 3 volts),
please replace the button battery to ensure internal clock of CPU board running correctly.

12.5 Cleaning
Before cleaning the relay, ensure that all AC/DC supplies and current transformer connections are
isolated to prevent any chance of an electric shock. Use a smooth cloth to clean the front panel.
Do not use abrasive material or detergent chemicals.

12.6 Storage
The spare relay or module should be stored in a dry and clean room. Based on IEC standard
60255-6 the storage temperature should be from -25oC to 70oC, but the temperature of from -10oC
to 40oC is recommended for long-term storage.

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 233

Chapter 12 Maintenance

234 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 13 Decommissioning and Disposal

Chapter 13 Decommissioning and Disposal

13.1 Decommissioning
1. Switching off

To switch off the PCS-902, switch off the external miniature circuit breaker of the power supply.

2. Disconnecting Cables

Disconnect the cables in accordance with the rules and recommendations made by relational
department.

Danger!

Before disconnecting the power supply cables that connected with the DC module of the
PCS-902, make sure that the external miniature circuit breaker of the power supply is
switched off.

Danger!

Before disconnecting the cables that are used to connect analog input module with the
primary CTs and VTs, make sure that the circuit breaker for the primary CTs and VTs is
switched off.

3. Dismantling

The PCS-902 rack may now be removed from the system cubicle, after which the cubicles may
also be removed.

Danger!

When the station is in operation, make sure that there is an adequate safety distance to
live parts, especially as dismantling is often performed by unskilled personnel.

13.2 Disposal
In every country there are companies specialized in the proper disposal of electronic waste.

Note!

Strictly observe all local and national regulations when disposing of the device.

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 235

Chapter 13 Decommissioning and Disposal

236 NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD

 Chapter 14 Manual Version History

Chapter 14 Manual Version History

In the latest version of the instruction manual, several descriptions on existing features have been
modified.

Manual version and modification history records

Manual Version Software

Date Description of change
Source New Version
1.00 1.00 2010-08-16 Form the original manual.

NR ELECTRIC CO., LTD 237